Home

HP 8591C User's Manual

1. JENTER 104 903 MHz SPAN O Hz RES BW 100 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 20 0 msec Figure 5 12 Continuous Demodulation of an FM Signal 5 25 Triggering on a Selected Line of a Video Picture Field You can trigger on a TV picture carrier signal This example enables you to view a test signal transmitted during vertical retrace when the TV screen is blanked 1 Press PRESET 2 Set the frequency of a picture carrier signal to center frequency 3 Press TRIG and TV TRIG If the spectrum analyzer is in a nonzero span TV TRIG sets the amplitude scale to linear places a marker on the signal peak moves the marker to the reference level changes the detector to sample sets the sweep time to 100 ps sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz and sets the span to 0 Hz The TV line number is the active function The preset function sets the spectrum analyzer to trigger on an odd field of a video format and TV line number 17 The sweep time of 100 ys allows you to view two TV lines line 17 and part of line 18 The multiburst is on TV line number 17 and the composite is on TV line number 18 CA MKA B5 O22 usec REF 1 492 mv ATTEN 18 dB 302 45 pv CENTER 67 259 MHz SPAN Hz RES BW 1 MHz VBW 382 kHz SWP 160 usec Figure 5 13 Triggering on an Odd Field of a Video Format Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Triggering on a
2. E Line N Neutral Port number for plug is industry identifier for plug only Number shown for cable is HP Part Number for complete cable including plug Earth Ground L FORMATE amp O 1 12 Turning on the Analyzer for the First Time When you turn the cable TV analyzer on for the first time you should perform frequency and amplitude self calibration routines to generate correction factors and indicate that the unit is functioning correctly The cable TV analyzer should be allowed to warm up for 30 minutes before performing the self calibration routines See When Is Self Calibration Needed in Chapter 2 for helpful guidelines on how often the self calibration routines should be performed Perform the following steps 1 Ensure the reference connector is connected between the 10 MHz OUTPUT and EXT REF IN rear panel connectors See Figure 1 4 REFERENCE CONNECTOR pul3ie Figure 1 4 Reference Connector If you wish to use an external 10 MHz source as the reference frequency disconnect the reference connector from the rear panel and connect an external reference source to the EXT REF IN connector on the rear panel 2 Plug the power cord into the cable TV analyzer 3 Press LINE After a few seconds the screen displays the Ermware revision date in the YYMMDD format For example 930522 indicates May 22 1993 The baud rate RS232 XXXX is also displayed If yo
3. ENTER 100 0958 MHz SPAN 500 0 KHZ RES BW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 30 0 msec Figure 4 8 Using Marker Tracking to Track an Unstable Signal The spectrum analyzer can measure the short and long term stability of a source The maximum amplitude level and the frequency drift of an input signal trace can be displayed and held by using the maximum hold function The minimum amplitude level can be displayed by using minimum hold available for trace C only You can use the maximum hold and minimum hold functions if for example you want to determine how much of the frequency spectrum an FM signal occupies 4 15 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Tracking Unstable Signals Using Marker Track and the Maximum Hold and Minimum Hold Functions Example Using the maximumhold and minimum hold functions monitor the envelopes of a signal 1 Connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input 2 Press PRESET rrequency 100 MHz and SPAN 20 MHz 3 Press AMPLITUDE 9 dBmv ATTEN AUTO MAN 0 GdBmv ISPAN SPAN ZOOM 500 kHz Refer to Figure 4 9 Notice that the signal has been held in the center of the display 4 Turn off the marker track function by pressing MK TRACK ON OFF OFF 5 To measure the excursion of the signal press TRACE then MAX BOLD A As the signal varies maximum hold maintains the maximum responses of the input signal as shown in Figure 4 9 14 09 36 JUL
4. 3 43 Selecting the Frequency or Time Coordinate 3 44 Selecting the Amplitude Coordinate 3 44 Selecting the Segment Type 3 46 Completing Table Entry and Activating timit Line Testing lt ad ae te Ah Ok fot wae gene 3248 Saving or Recalling Limit Line Tables 3 48 Procedure for Creating an Upper and Lower Limit Line 3 49 Learn About the Analog Display Mode 2 3 52 Learn About the Windows Display 3 54 Learn How to Enter Amplitude Correction Factors 3 57 Procedure for Creating Amplitude Correction Factors 3 58 Amplitude Correction Functions 3 61 Editing or Viewing the Amplitude Correction Tables 3 61 Selecting the Amplitude Correction Point 3 61 Selecting the Frequency Coordinate 3 63 Selecting the Amplitude Coordinate 3 63 Completing Table Entry and Activating Amplitude Corrections 3 64 Saving or Recalling Amplitude Correction Tables 3 64 Contents 3 External Keyboard 200 4 3 65 Using the External Keyboard 3 68 External Keyboard Installation 3 68 To Enter a Screen Title 3 68 To Enter Programming Commands 3 69 To Enter a Prefix amp s lt 2 2 48 6 Ae Be aes 3 69 4 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode What You ll Learn in This Chapter 4 2 Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function fa oe ee be eG a
5. 7 16 ZONE CENTER ZONE SPAN ZONE PK RIGHT ZONE PK LEFT WINDOWS OFF SWEEP CONT SGL FREE RUN VIDEO TV LINE LINE Tv TRIG ODD FLD EXTERNAL TV TRIG EVEN FLD Ty TRIG TV TRIG VERT TV SYNC NEG POS TV Standard WINDOWS NEXT Toggles between windows if windows ore on Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions NTSC PAL M PAL SECAM L Previous Menu pull2 Toggles between split screen and full size display if windowa ore on pull3c 7 17 If You Have a Problem If You Have a Problem What You ll This chapter includes information on how to check for a problem with your Find in This HP 8591C cable TV analyzer and how to return it for service It also includes descriptions of the analyzer built in error messages Chapter Your cable TV analyzer is built to provide dependable service It is unlikely that you will experience a problem However Hewlett Packard s worldwide sales and service organization is ready to provide the support you need 8 2 CAUTION Calling HP Sales and Service Offices Sales and service offices are located around the world to provide complete support for your cable TV analyzer To obtain servicing information or to order replacement parts contact the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service office listed in Table 8 1 In any correspondence or telephone conversations refer to the cable TV analyzer by its model number and full serial number
6. M10748 05 199 EH 10748 OfdBmUUI29A 79910 dB SeLent PEAK POINT LOG 10 dB SELECT REG FREQ 350 000000 MHz SELECT AMPLITUD pe DELETE POINT WA SB sc FC Edit ACORR Done PURGE AMP COR CENTER 300 0 MHZ SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHz SwP 20 O msec Figure 3 1 2 Completed Amplitude Correction Table 9 Press EDIT DONE when all the points have been entered Use steps 10 and 11 to display corrected versus uncorrected amplitude trace data for trace comparison 10 Display the amplitude corrected trace in trace A by pressing the following keys CLEAR WRITE A VIEW A 11 Display the uncorrected amplitude trace in trace B by pressing the following keys TRACE A B C until B is selected CLEAR WRITE B CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 More 3 of 4 Amp Cor AMP COR ON OFF until OFF is selected 3 60 Editing or Viewing the Using Spectrum Analyzer Features learn How to Enter Amplitude Correction Factors Amplitude Correction Functions This section describes the amplitude correction functions in the order they are usually used Pressing CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 More 3 of 4 Amp Cor Amplitude Correction Tables accesses the softkey menus for creating an amplitude correction table Selecting the Amplitude Correcton Point NOTE PRESET turns amplitude correction factors off if it is on but does not clear an existing amplitude correction table Use PURGE AMP COR to clear an existing
7. MARKER gt CF 4 MARKER A 1 013 MHz 61 7 1 dB JENTER 300 500 MHz SPAN 5 000 MHz RES BW 30 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 20 0 msec Figure 4 24 Measuring the Distortion Product 4 36 NEXT PEAK NEXT PK RIGHT NEXT PK LEFT More 1 of 2 Using the Analyzer As a Receiver in Zero Frequency Span The spectrum analyzer operates as a fixed tuned receiver in zero span The zero span mode can be used to recover modulation on a carrier signal Center frequency in the swept tuned mode becomes the tuned frequency in zero span The horizontal axis of the screen becomes calibrated in time rather than frequency Markers display amplitude and time values The following functions establish a clear display of the video waveform e Trigger stabilizes the waveform trace on the display by triggering on the modulation envelope If the signal s modulation is stable video trigger synchronizes the sweep with the demodulated waveform e Linear mode should be used in amplitude modulation AM measurements to avoid distortion caused by the logarithmic amplifier when demodulating signals e Sweep time adjusts the full sweep time from 20 ms 20 ps in zero span to 100 s The sweep time readout refers to the full lo division graticule Divide this value by 10 to determine sweep time per division Resolution and video bandwidth are selected according to the signal bandwidth Each o
8. MARKER gt PK PK Peak Menu More 2of2 CENTER 774 MHz SPAN 1 800 GHz RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHZ SWP 36 0 msec Figure 4 13 Using the Marker to Peak Peak Function The frequency and amplitude differences between the signals appear in the active function block In addition the softkeys accessed by appear on the screen Example Measure the frequency and amplitude difference between two signals that do not appear on the screen at one time This technique is useful for harmonic distortion tests when narrow span and narrow bandwidth are necessary to measure the low level harmonics 1 Connect the spectrum analyzer s CAL OUT to the INPUT 75 Q if you have not already done so Press PRESET rrequency 300 MHz SPAN and the step down key C _ to narrow the frequency span until only one signal appears on the screen 2 Press PEAK search to place a marker on the peak 3 Press MARKER A to identify the position of the first marker 4 Press Trrequency tO activate center frequency Turn the knob clockwise slowly to adjust the center frequency until a second signal peak is placed at the position of the second marker It may be necessary to pause occasionally while turning the knob to allow a sweep to update the trace The first marker remains on the screen at the amplitude of the Erst signal peak 4 20 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Comparing Signals
9. outdbe Figure 1 2 Setting the line Voltage Selector Switch Before connecting the cable TV analyzer to the power source you must set the rear panel voltage selector switch correctly to adapt the cable TV analyzer to the power source An improper selector switch setting can damage the cable TV analyzer when it is turned on CAUTION Set the instrument s rear panel voltage selector switch to the line voltage range 115 V or 230 V corresponding to the available ac voltage See Figure 1 2 Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool in the slot and slide the switch up or down so that the proper voltage label is visible 1 8 Preparing For Use Power Requirements Checking the Fuse OA OTT e OOOO OOOO o pu129e Figure 1 3 Checking the Line Fuse The recommended fuse is size 5 by 20 mm rated F5A 250 V IEC approved This fuse may be used with input line voltages of 115 V or 230 V Its HP part number is 2110 0709 With an input line voltage of 115 V an alternate fuse can be used In areas where the recommended fuse is not available a size 5 by 20 mm rated fast blow 5 A 125 V UL CSA approved fuse may be substituted Its HP part number is 2110 0756 The line fuse is housed in a small container beside the rear panel power connector see Figure 1 3 The container provides space for storing a spare fuse as shown in the figure 1 9 Preparing For Use Power Requirements To chec
10. 1 14 Preparing For Use Turning on the Analyzer for the First Time 7 When the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines have been completed successfully store the correction factors by pressing CAL STORE The self calibration routines calibrate the cable TV analyzer by generating correction factors The softkey CAL STOKE stores the correction factors in the area of cable TV analyzer memory that is stored when the cable TV analyzer is turned off the cable TV analyzer will automatically apply these factors in future measurements If CAL STOKE is not pressed the correction factors remain in effect until the cable TV analyzer is turned off Performing the Tracking Generator Self Calibration Routine For cable TV analyzers with Option 011 the tracking generator self calibration routine should be performed prior to using the tracking generator NOTE Since the tracking generator calibration routine depends on the accuracy of the absolute amplitude level of the cable TV analyzer the cable TV analyzer amplitude calibration should be done prior to using CAL TRK GEN Preparing For Use Turning on the Analyzer for the First Time 1 To calibrate the tracking generator connect the tracking generator output RF OUT 75 Q to the cable TV analyzer INPUT 75 Q connector using an appropriate cable NOTE A low loss cable should be used for accurate calibration Use the 75 Q cable shipped with the cable TV analyzer
11. The top graticule line represents the power as indicated by the reference level REF displayed value Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements 44 30 03 AUG 24 1993 4 MKB 825 03000 MHz REF 22 6 dBmv AT 10 oB 15 47 OBMV SINGLE SMPL CHANNEL POWER MEAS LOG 10 38 CONT MEAS MARKER 825 03000 CENTEA 15 47 dBm IE FREG PWRGRAPH QN OFF WA SBI vc FCI CORA GAPH MKA ON OFF Previous Menu CENTER 825 03000 MHZ SPAN 60 00 KHz AES BW 1 0 kHz VBW 10 KHZ SWP 300 msec Figure 5 40 Channel Power Graph 9 To enable the graph marker press GRPH MKR ON OFF so ON is underlined Absolute frequency and amplitude are displayed 10 Press Previous Menu Press MEAS OFF to turn the measurement off and exit the power menu or press another measurement key to stop the current measurement and start a new measurement NOTE If the power menus have been exited without turning the power measurement off by pressing another front panel key press the MEAS USER key twice to return to the last power menu used 5 76 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions This chapter describes functions and controls of the cable TV analyzer in spectrum analyzer mode The front panel keys and softkey functions are listed alphabetically followe
12. per page are selected then the LDC function is displayed If four PLT I plots per page are selected then the LOC is displayed Press the softkey until the rectangular marker is in the desired section of softkey label The upper and lower sections of the softkey label graphically represent where the plotter output will be located 1 23 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting Note that for a multi pen plotter the pens of the plotter draw the different components of the screen as follows Description aws the annotation and graticula aws trace A aws trace B aws trace C and the display line aws user generated graphics and the lower limit line aws the upper limit line 8 Press Previous Menu COPY DEV PRMT PLT so that PLT is underlined then COPY 1 24 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting Printing Using an HP IB Interface Equipment e HP 8591C cable TV analyzer equipped with Option 02 1 e HP 10833 or equivalent HP IB cable e Printer with HP IB interface choose one of the following QO QO Q QO QO QO m HP 310 Portable DeskJet with HP IB to Centronics converter HP 550C DeskJet with HP IB to Centronics converter f HP 2225 ThinkJet HP 3630A PaintJet HP LaserJet with HP IB to Centronics converter MX 80 Epson with HP IB to Centronics converter t LQ 570 Epson with HP IB to Centronics converter Supports color printing Pa
13. 3 Set the span by pressing the following keys SPAN 20 MHz The calibration signal is 20 dB two graticule divisions below the top of the screen using these cable TV analyzer settings If desired adjust the reference level press AMPLITUDE to activate the reference level and use the knob or step keys to change the reference level Determine the amplitude and frequency of the signal You can either press PEAK SEARCH OF Press and move the marker to the signal peak Read the amplitude and frequency The display screen should look like the one in Figure 2 6 Frequency is displayed horizontally and amplitude power is displayed vertically 08 33 00 JUL 29 1993 Ua MKR 300 05 MHz REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 dB 28 58 GBM ARKER PEAK gt CF LOG 10 dB MARKER MARKER 300 05 MHz NEXT 28 58 dBmv PEAK NEXT PK RIGHT NEXT PK LEFT More 1 of 2 CENTER 300 00 MHz SPAN 20 00 MHz RES BW 100 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 20 0 msec Figure 2 6 Reading the Amplitude and Frequency 2 20 Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines Data from the self calibration routine is necessary for cable TV analyzer operation Executing the self calibration routine regularly ensures that the cable TV analyzer is using current calibration data that improves the cable TV analyzer frequency and amplitude accuracy Press the key to view the self calibr
14. 44 47 24 JUL 29 1993 4p REF ZONE 48 8 1 CENTER dBmv 10 H f ONE dB i PAN PEAK ZONE PK RIGHT VBW 1 MHz c ZONE PK LEFT WINDOWS OFF START 709 8 MHZ STOP 1 2505 GHz RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHZ SWP 20 0 msec Figure 3 10 Windows Display Mode 3 54 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features learn About the Windows Display Example Use the windows display format to view the calibrator signal 1 Connect the CAL OUT signal to the cable TV analyzer s INPUT 75 Q Press PRESET FREQUENCY START FREQ 0 Hz STOP FREQ 2 GHz 2 Turn on the windows display by pressing the WINDOWS ION key The active window is indicated by a solid line around the display rather than a broken line Press ZONE CENTER use the knob or step keys to move the zone to include one of the harmonics Notice that the span marked by the zone markers in the upper window is shown as a full display in the lower window NOTE The upper window is not active so the trace is not updated though the zone position is updated The upper window must be activated by pressing WINDOWS to update the trace data 3 Press ZONE PK RIGHT The cable TV analyzer identifies the first signal to the right of the zone and moves the zone so that it is centered around the new signal 4 Press ZONE SPAN and use the knob step keys or the data entry keys to change the zone span t
15. ALL DLP s CARD saves an image of the cable TV analyzer memory This means a program cannot be saved selectively if several programs are present in the cable TV analyzer memory at the time Use Catalog Internal DELETE FILE to delete the items in user memory that you do not wish to be saved on the memory card ALL DLP CARD saves all programs and key definitions that are in cable TV analyzer memory onto the memory card Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card To Save a Program l Press CONFIG or DISPLAY then Change Prefix to enter a new prefix or change the existing prefix If you do not specify a prefix the program will be saved with a Ele name consisting of d_ register number 2 Press SAVE If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 3 Press ALL DLP CARD REGISTER and PREFIX are displayed on the cable TV analyzer display 4 Use the numeric keypad to enter a register number and then press ENTER The data is saved with a Ele name consisting of a d the prefix that was entered an underscore _ and the register number The d denotes that the Ele contains downloadable program data Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card To Recall a Program 1 Press or RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD CARD is underlined when the memory card is selected
16. Front Panel Key Access Option 07 only sets the duration of the gate The gate length can be set from 1 ps to 65 535 ms in 1 pS steps If the GATE LENGTH softkey is accessed outside of the time gate utility it turns off the gate markers but does not affect the gate utility settings When the gate utility is entered the current value of the gate length will be used The GATE LENGTH softkey can be accessed from within the gate utility under the Define Gate menu Front Panel Key Access SWEEP Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions GATE ON OFF GATE UTILITY NOTE Option 107 only turns on or off the gate the time gated analyzer capability The gate can be turned on outside or from within the gate utility The gate utility makes it easier to set up and manipulate the gate If GATE ON OFF is accessed under the menu it turns the gate on and off If GATE ON OFF is accessed under the Define Gate softkey from within the gate utility the gate can only be turned on when the frequency domain window is active If the time domain window is made active the gate will be turned off Gate manipulation with the gate turned on in the time domain window is difficult due to trace dropouts and triggering errors Front Panel Key Access Option 107 only accesses the softkey functions used for the time gated analyzer capability It creates related time domain and frequency domain windows to set
17. The following example demonstrates the rules for setting up a time gated measurement In this example we are using two signal generators to generate two signals at the same frequency 50 MHz The pulse generators space interleave the signals in time as well as pulse modulate the signals Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only PULSE SIGNAL GENERATOR 1 GENERATOR 1 o RF OUTPUT PULSE MODULATION INPUT PULSE GENERATOR 2 SIGNAL GENERATOR p OSCILLOSCOPE 2 PULSE MODULATION INPUT RF OUTPUT REFLECTED SOURCE DIRECTIONAL BRIDGE GATE TRIGGER INPUT put20c Figure 5 19 Test Setup for Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability NOTE Be sure that the input impedance for the oscilloscope channels is set to 1 MQ 5 41 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Table 5 2 Pulse Generator Test Setup Settings Setting Pulse Pulse Generator 1 Generator 2 Period 280 ps 280 ps Width 50 ps 50 ps Trigger Positive edge of square wave Not applicable Voltage peak to peak 5V 5V Trinner delav 85 us None Table 5 3 Signal Generator Test Setup Settings Signal Signal Generator 1 Generator 2 50 MHz
18. activates ON or deactivates OFF the output power of the tracking generator SRC The power level can then be adjusted using the data keys step keys or knob Pressing any digit O through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu The available output power level varies for different analyzer models See specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for specific information for your analyzer Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL Option 011 only allows the user to set the step size of the source power level source power offset and power sweep range functions The step size may be values from 32 7 dB to 32 7 dB The default setting is one vertical scale division Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL sets the frequency at the left side of the graticule The left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies When these frequencies are activated their values are displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span Front Panel Key Access Frequency saves the current analyzer state on the memory card To save the current state press STATE CARD use the numeric keypad to enter a number and press ENTER If you want the file name of the stored data to contain a prefix press Change Prefix to enter a prefix before storing the data If the state data was stored using a prefix the file name for the state data consists of s prefix _ register number
19. An additional copy of the HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Reference User s Guide the HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Getting Started and Quick Reference Guide and the Calibration Guide of the appropriate model number for your cable TV analyzer are available as a set under Option 910 Service Documentation Option 9 15 Option 915 provides one copy of the service guide The appropriate cable TV analyzer model number must be specified It also includes one copy of the component level information for the HP 85916 cable TV analyzer The service guide describes assembly level troubleshooting procedures and adjustment procedures The component level information includes parts lists component location diagrams and schematic diagrams for selected repairable assemblies The manuals can be ordered separately 9 6 Accessories A number of accessories are available from Hewlett Packard to help you configure your cable TV analyzer for your specific applications They can be ordered through your local HP Sales and Service Office RF Bridges The HP 86207A 750 RF bridge can be used to make reflection measurements with the cable TV analyzer This external directional bridge offers high directivity and excellent port match The HP 86207A operates over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz AC Power Source The HP 85901A provides 200 watts of continuous power for field and mobile application The self contained ac power source h
20. Front Panel Key Access CAL returns to the main gate utility menu from within the gate utility Pressing Main Menu accesses the Define Time Define Gate Define Coupling UPDATE TIMEFREQ and EXIT UTILITY softkeys Front Panel Key Access SWEEP displays the main coil span signal MC SPAN from the span dividers on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions MAN TRK ADJUST MARKER ON OFF Option 011 only allows the user to adjust the frequency of the tracking generator oscillator manually using the step keys or knob The tracking adjust is tuned to maximize the amplitude of the trace Tracking error occurs when the output frequency of the tracking generator is not exactly matched to the input frequency of the analyzer The resulting mixing product from the analyzer input mixer is not at the center of the IF bandwidth Any tracking errors may be compensated for through manual adjustments of the tracking generator s oscillator or through an automatic tracking routine which is initiated by pressing TRACKING PEAK Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL turns the selected marker on or off One of the four markers must first be selected by the SELECT 1 2 3 4 key otherwise marker 1 or the last selected marker will be turned on or off When a new marker is turn
21. If no prefix was specified the file name is s register number If windows are being used only the state of the active window will be saved Front Panel Key Access 6 137 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions STATE INTRNL STOP FREQ STOR PWR ON UNITS STP GAIN ZERO STUVWX 6 138 saves the current analyzer state in the selected state register To save the current state press STATE INTRNL and use the numeric keypad to enter a state register number valid state register numbers are 1 through 8 If windows are being used only the state of the active window will be saved Front Panel Key Access SAVE sets the frequency at the right side of the graticule The left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies When these frequencies are activated their values are displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span Front Panel Key Access Frequency sets the default settings for the units used in the linear and the logarithmic modes when the instrument is powered on The settings for the units can be changed during normal instrument operation but they will return to the default settings when the instrument is powered on again This is a service calibration function Refer to the service guide for more information Front Panel Key Access disables the two 20 dB step gain amplifiers on the A12 Amplitude Contro
22. To Recall a State 1 Press RECALL If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL 2 Press INTERNAL STATE 3 Enter the register number under which the state was saved and the state is recalled automatically State data can also be recalled by using the catalog 1 Press RECALL If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL 2 Press Catalog Internal and CATALOG REGISTER Use the knob to highlight the number of the state register to be retrieved The state registers have a ST preceding the register number 3 Press LOAD FILE NOTE Register 9 is a Special register which can aid in recovering from inadvertent loss of line power power failure Press RECALL INTERNAL STATE then 9 to place the cable TV analyzer in the state that existed just prior to the loss of power or set POWER ON LAST to do this automatically Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from Analyzer Memory To Save a Trace Saving trace data is very similar to saving state data Saving trace data saves both the trace data and the state data 1 Enter a screen title if desired by using_ DISPLAY and Change Title 2 Set up the trace to be stored 3 Press SAVE If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL 4 Press Trace Intrnl This accesses a menu displaying TRACE A TRACE B and TRACE C 5 Press the softkey for the trace that you want to save T
23. display mode See Table 6 1 for a list of functions that are not available with analog displays If a trace is blanked while using an analog display the data is permanently blanked and cannot be recalled even if you use the view function The copy function can be used to provide a printout of the display It must be configured to use a printer and not a plotter After using other functions press ANALOG ON OFF to return to the dot density function Limit lines can be used to test data in an analog display but they cannot be displayed Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Table 6 1 Commands Not Available with Analog Operation Command A lt gt B A B A ON OFF B DL B CLEAR WRITE B CLEAR WRITE C DEMOD OW OFF FFT MKR CNT ON OFF MK PAUSE ON OFF MAX HOLD A MAX HOLD B MIN HOLD C NORMLIZE ON OFF MK TRACK ON OFF SPAN ZOOM THRESHLD ON OFF TRACKING PEAK VID AVG ON OFF VIEW A VIEW B VIEW C exchanges trace A a puts the difference puts the difference nitially erases trace nitially erases trace stops the analyzer s updates trace A wit updates trace B wit updates trace C wit the difference betw moves the signal clo finds the highest sig sets a lower bounda starts a routine whi starts a routine whi holds end displays t holds end displays t holds and displays t turns AM or FM demodulation on and off changes zero span data to turns the m
24. n HP 310 Portable DeskJet HP 500 DeskJet HP 500C DeskJet HP 550C DeskJet HP 3630A PaintJet HP LaserJet LQ 570 Epson MX 80 Epson Supports color printing Interconnection and Printing Instructions 1 Turn off the printer and the spectrum analyzer 2 Connect the printer to the spectrum analyzer using the parallel printer cable 3 Turn on the spectrum analyzer and printer 4 On the spectrum analyzer press CONFIG Print Conf ig 5 Select the configuration for your printer by pressing the appropriate key Note that the softkey is activated when the key title is underlined 1 33 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting Set Colr Printer NOTE To proceed with the three printouts per page format after printing one printout per page it is Press this key to print in color if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard color printer then select the appropriate printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page prior to formfeeding the page One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfeeding each printout necessary to press PRINTER SETUP Pressing PRINTER SETUP resets the internal counter 1 34 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting Set B amp W Printer Press this key to print in black and white then press one of the following keys to select the appropriate printer mode e Press HP B amp W PRINTER if the spectrum analyzer
25. off OHz Off log 10 dB div Off 2 kHz lauto coupled Off 6 115 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Kay Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Table 6 1 2 Preset Conditions for All Models continued Measure On end of sweep command QNEOS On sweep command ONSWP Reference level Reference level offset Reference level position Resolution bandwidth Span Start frequency Stop frequency State registers 1 8 Sweep Sweep time Threshold Trace A Trace B Trace C Trace math command TRMATH Trace registers Trigger ideo averaging ideo bandwidth lt lt Video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth rati S A analyzer cleared cleared 49 dBmV in power on units 0 dB top 8th graticule 3 MHz coupled Refer to Table 6 10 Refer to Table 6 10 Refer to Table 6 10 unaffected continuous Refer to Table 6 10 coupled Of clear write stor e blank stor e blank cleared unaffected free Off 1M Hz coupled 03 6 116 Print Config PRINTER ADDRESS PRINTER SETUP PRT MENU ON OFF Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions accesses the softkey functions that are used to address the printer select a black and white print or a color print a color print requires an HP PaintJet printer and reset the printer See the key for more information Front Panel Key Access CONFIG Option 021 only allows you to cha
26. or a for amplitude correction factors the prefix that was entered an underscore _ and the register number Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card To Recall Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors 1 Use Change Prefix to enter the prefix or use the existing prefix 2 press RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 3 Press Card Trace to access the menu with LIMIT LINES and AMP COR 4 Press either LIMIT LINES to recall a limit line table or AMP COR to recall amplitude correction factors 5 Enter the register number that the limit line data or amplitude correction factors was saved under and then press ENTER NOTE If LOAD FILE is used to recall limit line files or amplitude correction factor files the traces are set to the store blank mode Press TRACE CLEAR WRITE A to view trace A data or press PRESET 3 27 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card Saving and Recalling Programs with a Memory Card Programs also called downloadable programs or DLPs can be loaded into cable TV analyzer memory either by loading a program from a memory card or by defining a function with programming commands The process of saving and recalling programs from the memory card is similar to saving state data To save program information to the memory card use ALL DLP CARD NOTE
27. plots per page are selected then the LOC m is displayed Press the softkey until the rectangular marker is in the desired section of softkey label The upper and lower sections of the softkey label graphically represent where the plotter output will be located 8 Press PLT gt L JT ON OFF so that ON is underlined 9 Then press COPY Printing after Plotting or Plotting after Printing Pressing without changing COPY DEV PRNT PLT produces the function last entered a print or a plot e To print after doing a plot press CONFIG COPY DEV PRMT PLT so that PRNT is underlined then COPY e To plot after printing press CONFIG COPY DEV PRNT PLT so that PLT is underlined and copy 1 38 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage or destroy electronic components All work on electronic assemblies should be performed at a static safe work station Figure 1 5 shows an example of a static safe work station using two types of ESD protection e Conductive table mat and wrist strap combination e Conductive floor mat and heel strap combination Both types when used together provide a significant level of ESD protection Of the two only the table mat and wrist strap combination provides adequate ESD protection when used alone To ensure user safety the static safe accessories must provide at least 1 MQ of isolation from ground Refer to Table 1 5 for information on ordering Static safe accesso
28. s An alternate method for recalling a file uses the key sequence RECALL Catalog Card CATALOG ALL use the knob to highlight the desired file then LOAD FILE t The screen title is part of the display image but is an image only It is not recalled as a title 3 32 Using Limit Line Functions Limit lines provide an easy way to compare trace data to a set of amplitude and frequency parameters while the cable TV analyzer is sweeping the measurement range An upper and or lower limit line can be displayed Every measurement sweep of trace A is compared to the limit lines If trace A is at or within the bounds of the limit lines LIMIT PASS is displayed If trace A is out of the limit line boundaries LIMIT FAIL is displayed Figure 3 4 shows a sample limit line display Limit lines are constructed from a table of frequency and amplitude coordinate pairs Limit line segments are created by connecting these points Everything except the segment length is defined by the entry for its beginning point There are several different ways of entering the frequency amplitude pairs These are described in the following section NOTE Limit lines can only by created and edited from the front panel in the format of limit line tables Limit lines that are in a trace format can only be created using remote commands or a down loadable program See HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8597C Cable TV
29. 1 Press to enter the title mode 2 Type in a screen title using the external keyboard The entry appears at the top line of the cable TV analyzer display as it is entered 3 Press ENTER on the external keyboard Pressing ENTER moves the characters to the position on the display for screen title annotation Note that to view more than 31 characters per line turn off the time and date display by pressing the following keys CONFIG TIMEDATE TIMEDATE ON OFF OFF 3 68 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features External Keyboard To Enter Programming Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and Commands HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information 1 Press on the external keyboard to enter the mode for executing remote commands 2 Type in a programming command for example type IP 3 Press ENTER on the external keyboard to execute the command NOTE Unlike entering a remote programming command using an external controller entering the remote programming commands with the external keyboard does not require including the cable TV analyzer address It is also not necessary to terminate the programming line with a semicolon However semicolons are necessary for separating the programming commands For example a program line is entered via the external controller as OUTPUT 718 CF 300MHZ SP 1MHZ The same program line is entered using the external keyboard as CF 300MH
30. 2 Press Catalog Card More 1 of 2 then CATALOG DLP Use the knob to highlight the data to be retrieved 3 Press LOAD FILE Programs can also be recalled by specifying the prefix and the register number 1 Use Change Prefix to enter the prefix or use the existing prefix 2 Press RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 3 Press CARD DLP enter the register number that the program was saved under and then press ENTER Table 3 3 summarizes the functions when saving and recalling data to and from the memory card Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card Table 3 3 Save and Recall Functions Using Memory Card Operation Screen File Name Register Key Sequence Title Range Available save state slcurrent prefix Prefix SAVE STATE CARD iregister register lt 8 register ENTER characters recall state slcurrent prefix Prefix RECALL register register lt 8 CARD STATE register 1 characters ENTER save trace tlcurrent prefix Prefix SAVE Trace Card register register lt 8 TRACE A TRACE 8 or characters TRACE C Iregister recall trace tlcurrent prefix Prefix RECALL register register lt 8 Card Trace characters TRACE A TRACE B o TRACE C register WI ENTER save display image Yest ilcurrent prefix Prefix SAVE DISPLAY CARD Iregister register lt 8 regist
31. 2 Press the following cable TV analyzer keys CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 then CAL TRK GEM TG SIGNAL NOT FOUND will be displayed if the tracking generator output is not connected to the cable TV analyzer input 3 To store this data in the area of cable TV analyzer memory that is stored when the cable TV analyzer is turned off press CAL STORE When the self calibration routines have been completed successfully the cable TV analyzer is ready for normal operation 1 16 Equipment Printing or Plotting You may wish to obtain a permanent record of data displayed on the cable TV analyzer screen This can be done using the copy key of the cable TV analyzer and a printer or plotter Printing Using an RS 232 Interface e HP 8591C cable TV analyzer e HP13242G RS 232 cable e Printer with RS 232 interface choose one of the following a HP 500 500C and 550C DeskJet a HP 2225 ThinkJet a HP 3630A PaintJet a HP LaserJet a LQ 570 Epson a MX 80 Epson Supports color printing 1 17 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting Interconnection and Printing Instructions 1 Turn off the cable TV analyzer and the printer NOTE The RS 232 interface allows only one device either the printer or the plotter to be connected to the cable TV analyzer Refer to the programmer s guide for more information on RS 232 protocol and cable wiring 2 Connect the printer using an RS 232 cable 3 Turn on the cable TV
32. 5 17 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Stimulus Response Measurements 5 Since we are only interested in the rejection of the low pass filter tune the spectrum analyzer s center frequency so that the roll off of the filter comprises the majority of the trace on the display see Figure 5 6 6 Decrease the resolution bandwidth to increase sensitivity and narrow the video bandwidth to smooth the noise In Figure 5 7 the resolution bandwidth has been decreased to 10 kHz De REF 48 8 dBmV AT 10 dB PEAK AUTO MAN LOG 10 dB VID BW AUTO MAN VBW RBW RATIO VID AVG ON OFF Pe CENTER 350 0 MHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 15 0 sec Figure 5 7 Decrease the Resolution Bandwidth to Improve Sensitivity 5 18 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Stimulus Response Measurements Adjusting the resolution bandwidth may result in a decrease in amplitude of the signal This is known as a tracking error Tracking errors occur when the tracking generator s output frequency is not exactly matched to the input frequency of the spectrum analyzer Tracking errors are most notable when using narrow resolution bandwidths Tracking error can be compensated manually or automatically In narrow bandwidths the manual method of adjusting the tracking is usually faster than the automatic tracking adjustment To compensate for th
33. 6 142 temperature conditions 1 14 TG UNLVL message 5 22 ThinkJet Printer mode switch settings 1 25 third order intercept measurement 5 59 6 144 third order intermodulation distortion 4 34 third order inter modulation measurement 5 63 verification of 5 66 THRESHLD ON OFF 6 143 threshold line 6 143 Time Date 6 143 TIMEDATE ON OFF 6 144 Index 29 time domain window definition 6 52 gate utility 6 52 time gate definition of 6 52 delay 6 77 gate on off 6 78 length 6 77 triggering 6 76 using the gate utility 5 28 time gated functional check 5 56 self calibration routines 5 54 spectrum analyzer settings 5 39 table of spectrum analyzer settings 5 52 time gated spectrum analyzer capability operation 5 33 time gate utility 6 78 coupling 6 52 delay sweep 6 139 done 6 57 entering 6 76 exit 6 69 marker on 6 93 pulse parameters 6 1 18 use of 5 28 time gating example of use 5 37 spectrum analyzer settings 5 39 time window resolution bandwidth 6 142 sweep time 6 142 TOI ON OFF 5 63 6 144 trace blank trace A 6 20 blank trace B 6 20 blank trace C 6 20 clear write trace A 6 40 clear write trace B 6 41 clear write trace C 6 42 move trace B into C 6 19 A lt gt B 6 7 A B A 6 8 A C 6 8 B DL B 6 19 view mode 6 153 TRACE 6 144 trace A maximum hold 6 93 Index 30 TRACE A 6 145 TRACE A B C 6 145 trace B maximum hold 6 94 TRACE B 6 145 trace C
34. 6 6 p LOCK ON OFF 6 4 6 6 PK MODE lt gt DL NRM 6 108 PK SORT FRQ AMP 6 109 PK TABLE ON OFF 6 109 Plot Config 6 109 plot menu 6 110 plotter 9 9 PLOTTER ADDRESS 6 109 plotter configuration 6 44 plotter output 6 109 plotting 6 45 6 48 HP IB interface 1 30 laserjet 1 37 RS 232 1 22 plotting to laserjets 6 1 10 PLT _ LOC 6 109 PLT MENU ON OFF 6 1 10 PLTS PG 1 2 4 6 110 POINT 3 46 6 1 10 point deletion 6 53 Index 22 positive peak detection mode 6 55 power bandwidth 6 102 power bandwidth measurement 5 67 power cable 1 11 power input 2 8 power measurement 6 111 adjacent channel power 6 9 adjacent channel power extended 6 10 channel bandwidth 6 38 channel power 6 38 channel spacing 6 39 continuous sweep mode 6 44 occupied bandwidth 6 102 power bandwidth 6 102 turning off 6 94 power measurement setup 6 132 Power Menu 6 111 POWER ON IP LAST 6 11 1 power on state of analyzer 6 111 power requirements 1 7 preamplifier gain 6 70 predetermined correction factors 6 50 prefix catalog of 6 33 clearing 6 39 entry 6 36 selection 6 129 prefix entry external keyboard 3 69 preparing memory card for use 3 17 preparing your cable TV analyzer for use 1 4 PRESET 2 4 6 112 PRESET 6 115 preset conditions common 6 113 for all models 6 115 model specific 6 113 print black and white 6 81 Print Config 6 117 printer 9 10 HP PaintJet 6 45 PRINTER ADDRESS 6 117 printe
35. 7 Press Previous Menu COPY DEV PRNT PLT PRNT should be underlined then copy 1 36 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting Plotting to an HP LaserJet Printer Equipment e HP 8590 Series spectrum analyzer with RS 232 or Parallel Interface e Any of the following HP LaserJets n Q QO QO QO QO HP LaserJet IIP HP LaserJet II HP LaserJet IHP HP LaserJet 4 HP LaserJet 4L HP LaserJet 4P e HP 13242G RS 232 cable or HP 92284A parallel printer cable Interconnection and Plotting Instructions 1 Turn off the spectrum analyzer NOTE The RS 232 or parallel interface allow only one device either the printer or the plotter to be connected to the spectrum analyzer Refer to the Programmer s Guide for more information on protocol and cable wiring 2 Connect the HP LaserJet to the analyzer 3 Turn on the analyzer and the HP LaserJet printer 1 37 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting 4 Press CONFIG 5 Press COPY DEV PRNT PLT so that PLT is underlined 6 Press CONFIG Plot Conf ig You can choose a full page half page or quarter page plot with the PLTS PG 1 2 4 softkey Press PLTS PG 1 2 4 to underline the number of plots per page desired 7 If two or four plots per page are chosen a function is displayed that allows you to select the location on the paper of the plotter output If two plots PLT J per page are selected then the LOC function is displayed If four PLT J
36. If the shipping materials are in good condition retain them for possible future use You may wish to ship the cable TV analyzer to another location or to return it to Hewlett Packard for service See How to Return Your Analyzer for Servicing in Chapter 8 for more information about shipping materials NOTE Complete instructions for installing your cable TV analyzer in an equipment rack are provided in a service note that is included with Options 1CM and 1CN Rack Mounting Kits 1 5 Preparing For Use Initial Inspection Table l l Accessories Supplied with the Cable TV Analyzer Description HP Part Number zable TV RF video measurements personality HP 85721A ipped with analyzer table 75 O BNC 5062 6452 ipped with analyzer Vemory card holder 9222 1545 ipped with analyzer Memory card 128 kilobyte HP 82215A ipped with analyzer dapter BNC m to Type Fif 1250 2477 ipped with analyzer Option 107 only Youpler 0955 0704 ipped wi alyzer Option 107 only ower cable See Table 1 3 ipped with analyzer teference connector 1250 1499 ipped connected between the 10 MHz REF T and the EXT REFIN on the rear panel the ana soft carrying pack 9211 7102 ipped wi yzer Jocumentation e HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Spectrum ipped wi yzer Analyzer Reference User s Guide o HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Cable TV ipped wi yzer Measurements User s Guide e HP 8590 E Series Spectrum Analyzers and ipped wi yzer HP 8591C Cab
37. NOTE Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions accesses functions which make transmitter power measurements The measurements are designed for analog radio or continuous carrier digital radio signals If another front panel key is pressed exiting the power menus press the MEAS USER key twice to return to the last power menu that was being used Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER determines the state of the analyzer when the analyzer is powered on If the POWER ON function is set to IP the state of the analyzer is the same as it is after is pressed when the analyzer is powered on If the POWER ON function is set to LAST then the state that the analyzer was left in when it was powered off is recalled The setting IP or LAST of the POWER ON function is not changed by pressing PRESET Use the POWER ON IP LAST softkey function to change the setting of the analyzer state which is recalled at power on Limit lines are not recalled when the analyzer is powered up If you have a downloadable program or personality installed in analyzer memory the following changes apply to the operation of the POWER ON function When using a downloadable program or personality the last state of the personality is not recalled We recommend that if you are using a downloadable program or personality you set POWER ON IP LAST to IP If POWER ON IP LAST is set to LAST you must press whenever you power on
38. ONMKR 6 31 ONPWRUP 6 31 ONSRQ 6 31 ONSWP 6 31 ONTIME 6 31 TRMATH 6 31 ONMKR command 6 31 on off switch 2 6 ONPWRUP command 6 31 on screen signal positioning horizontal 6 49 vertical 6 49 ONSRQ command 6 31 ONSWP command 6 31 ONTIME command 6 31 operation local 6 87 operation manual see User s Guide 9 6 options extra calibration guide Option 910 9 6 extra user s guide Option 910 9 6 front panel protective cover Option 040 9 4 HP IB Option 021 9 3 impact cover Option 040 9 4 narrow resolution bandwidths Option 130 9 5 rack mount kit Option 908 9 5 rack mount kit with handles Option 909 9 6 service documentation Option 915 9 6 tracking generator 753 Option 01 1 9 3 options displayed 6 133 output power 6 137 output screen data 6 45 overview menus and softkeys 2 16 Index 21 P PaintJet printer 6 131 PAINTJET PRINTER 6 105 PAL 6 105 PAL M 6 106 PAL video format 6 141 PARAM AUTO MAN 6 106 pass code 6 50 peak next 6 100 next left 6 100 next right 6 100 peak detection mode positive negative 6 55 PEAK EXCURSN 6 106 Peak Menu 6 107 peak response routine 6 148 peak search outside of the zone 6 155 6 156 PEAK SEARCH 2 19 6 107 peak table 6 109 mode 6 108 sorting 6 109 using 3 6 7 peak to peak measurement 6 91 PEAK ZOOM 6 108 percent amplitude modulation 6 6 measurement 5 61 percent amplitude modulation measurement 5 59 phase lock on off
39. Option 107 only 5 28 Contents 4 Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Introducing the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability to View Pulsed RF oo wee ey a he xe Example of a Time Gated Pulsed RF Signal Setting the Gate Delay and Gate Length Properly When NOT Using the Gate Utility Using the Self Calibration Routines with Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Option 107 Performing a Functional Check of the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Option 107 Using the One Button Measurements to Measure N dB Bandwidth Percent Amplitude Modulation and Third Order Intercept TOI N dB Bandwidth Measurement Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement Third Order Intermodulation Measurement TOI Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements Occupied Bandwidth and Transmitter Frequency Error Adjacent Channel Power Ratio ACP Channel Power Measurement 6 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Service Functions a sos ae a ke Se GS Service Calibration Functions Service Diagnostic Functions Service Diagnostic Functions continued Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions 7 Key Menus 8 If You Have a Problem What You ll Find in This Chapt
40. Options and Accessories What You ll Many options and accessories are available to enhance the cable TV analyzer s so that it will better meet the needs of your application This chapter Find in This contains a list of the available options for your cable TV analyzer followed by Chapter a list of some of the available accessories 9 2 Options Options can be ordered by option number when you order the cable TV analyzer Some of the options are also available as kits that can be ordered and installed after you have received your cable TV analyzer The options are listed numerically by their option number Tracking Generator Option 011 Option 011 provides a 1 MHz to 1 8 GHz built in tracking generator Option 011 has 753 output impedance Option 011 is also available as retrofit kit Option R11 after the purchase of your cable TV analyzer or as a kit HP part number 5062 6480 Carrying Case Color Tan Option 015 The carrying case in the optional color of tan for the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer is durable and makes it easy to transport and protect the analyzer from moisture and dirt HP IB Interface Option 02 1 Option 021 enables you to control your cable TV analyzer from a computer that uses an Hewlett Packard interface bus HP IB Such computers include the HP 9000 Series 300 and the HP Vectra PC This option also enables the cable TV analyzer to control a printer or plotter Option 021 includes a 9 3
41. The trigger marker may be used to perform settling time measurements on the rising or falling edges of a digital communications signal Settling time is the time from the trigger to 90 percent of the stable pulse on off value Press Main Menu to exit the define time menu 10 Press Define Gate Use the GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH keys to position the gate Once gate delay or gate length are activated use the knob and data entry keys can be used to position the two vertical gate markers Select a time interval within the last half of the pulse is selected Turn the gate on by pressing GATE ON OFF so that ON is underlined This activates the frequency domain window which is the lower window The spectrum selected with the current gate position can now be viewed in the frequency domain window Press Main Menu The resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and sweep time are not optimized so the frequency display may not look correct There may be signal dropouts or poor frequency resolution This can be corrected by entering the pulse parameters and turning on the coupling Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Gate Utility to Simplify Time Gated Measurements Option 107 only The gate utility can optimize the setting of resolution bandwidth if the user enters the value of the pulse width and turns on the coupling The video bandwidth will be optimized if the gate length is entered and coupled The sweep ti
42. This chapter introduces the spectrum analyzer features of the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer These features can be used to manipulate measurement data and to make measurements more easily In this chapter you will Use the internal preamplifier Use the marker table to list all the active markers Use the peak table to list the displayed signals Save and recall data from analyzer memory Save and recall data from the memory card Learn about creating limit lines Learn about the analog display mode Learn about the windows display Learn how to enter amplitude correction factors Use the external keyboard To change the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer to spectrum analyzer mode press the following keys MODE SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3 2 Using the Internal Preamplifier The HP 8591C cable TV analyzer is equipped with an internal preamplifier Using a preamplifier with a spectrum analyzer can obtain a system preamplifier and spectrum analyzer noise Egure that is lower than that of the spectrum analyzer alone This improves the system sensitivity for making low level amplitude measurements However a preamplifier does reduce the dynamic measurement range of the spectrum analyzer To turn the internal preamplifer on press AMPLITUDE then INT AMP ON OFF to underline ON 3 3 Use the Marker Table to List All the Active Markers The marker table function can be used to display a list of all of the active markers It is somet
43. To Recall Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors in Chapter 3 for more information Front Panel Key Access or SAVE_ allows you to choose fixed or relative type of limit lines The fixed FIX type uses the current limit line as a reference with fixed frequency and amplitude values The relative REL setting causes the current limit line value to be relative to the displayed center frequency and reference level amplitude values When limit lines are specified with time rather than frequency the REL setting only affects the amplitude values The current amplitude values will be relative to the displayed reference level amplitude but the time values will always start at the left edge of the graticule 6 83 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions As an example assume you have a frequency limit line If the limit line is specified as fixed entering a limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz displays the limit line segment at 300 MHz If the same limit line table is specified as relative it is displayed relative to the analyzer center frequency and reference level If the center frequency is at 1 2 GHz a relative limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz will display the limit line segment at 1 5 GHz If the amplitude component of the relative limit line segment is 10 dB then 10 dB is added to the reference level value to obtain the amplitud
44. With this information the HP representative can quickly determine whether your unit is still within its warranty period In general a problem can be caused by a hardware failure a software error or a user error Follow these general steps to determine the cause and to resolve the problem 1 Perform the quick checks listed in Check the Basics these checks may eliminate the problem altogether or may give a clearer idea of its cause 2 If the problem is a hardware problem you have several options e Repair it yourself contact your HP Sales and Service Office to obtain the most current test and maintenance information If it becomes necessary to return your analyzer to a Hewlett Packard service center save any user defined functions or measurement personalities to a memory card It may be necessary for the service center to load diagnostic or measurement personalities into user memory which would over write existing programs or memory could be erased during repair Hewlett Packard cannot guarantee that the user memory will be preserved Refer to Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card in Chapter 3 of this guide e Return the analyzer to Hewlett Packard for repair if the analyzer is still under warranty or is covered by an HP maintenance contract it will be repaired under the terms of the warranty or plan If the analyzer is no longer under warranty or is not covered by an HP maintenance plan Hewlett Packard wi
45. erases any data previously stored in trace B and continuously displays any signals detected during the sweep of the analvzer This function is activated at power on and by pressing PRESET Changing the trace mode of trace C to clear write or minimum hold can change the trace mode of trace B If trace B is in clear write mode or maximum hold mode when trace C is changed to clear write or minimum hold the trace mode of trace B is changed to store blank The following table shows the trace mode of trace B before and after changing trace C to clear write or minimum hold trace mode Trace Mode of Trace B Trace Mode of Trace B Before After Clear write Store blank Store blank View Maximum hold View Changing the trace mode of trace B to clear write or maximum hold can change the trace mode of trace C If trace C is in clear write mode when trace B is changed to clear write or minimum hold the trace mode of trace C is changed to minimum hold Trace Mode of Trace C Trace Mode of Trace C Before Clear write Minimum hold Minimum hold Minimum hold View View Front Panel Key Access TRACE 6 41 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions CLEAR WRITE 6 42 erases any data previously stored in trace C and continuously displays any signals detected during the sweep of the analvzer This function is activated at power on and by pressing PRESET Chan
46. minimum hold 6 95 TRACE C 6 145 trace modes 2 14 trace registers locking 6 123 Trace Card 6 146 Trace Intrnl 6 147 Track Gen 5 15 6 147 tracking generator 6 147 external leveling input 2 7 frequency adjustment 6 88 internal external leveling 6 12 normalization 5 20 operation 5 12 output 2 5 output power 6 137 peak response 6 148 power sweep 6 119 power sweep range 6 137 self calibration 6 22 self calibration routine 1 15 2 24 source attenuator 6 136 source power offset 6 136 6 137 source power step size 6 137 stimulus response 5 12 warn up time 2 24 tracking generator 750 Option 01 1 9 3 tracking generator self calibration routine 1 16 tracking generator unleveled condition 5 22 tracking peak automatic adjustment 5 19 manual adjustment 5 19 TRACKING PEAK 5 19 6 148 tracking unstable signals 4 13 transit case 9 10 TRIG 6 148 trigger 6 148 external 6 70 free run 6 74 line 6 85 video 6 153 triggering EDGE POL POS NEG 6 58 Index 31 gate edge or level 6 76 gate utility 6 58 triggering on a selected line video picture field 5 26 trigger modes 2 13 2 14 TRIG MKR ON OFF 6 148 TRMATH command 6 31 turning off markers 6 92 turning off the FFT function 6 72 turning off windows display 6 154 turning on the analyzer for the first time 1 13 turn off active function 2 10 TV LINE 6 149 TV Standard 6 149 TVSTND 5 27 TV SYNC NEG POS 6 149 TV trig ev
47. 2 5 58 N dB Bandwidth Measurement 5 60 Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement 5 62 Third Order Intermodulation Measurement 5 65 Occupied Bandwidth 2 020 5 69 Adjacent Channel Power oa o a 5 71 Adjacent Channel Power Extended 5 72 Adjacent Channel Power Graph 2 5 72 Channel Power i e uor eoio b g ieu e Poeno e e a 5 75 Channel Power Graph ooo a a a 5 76 1 Memory Card Catalog Information 2 6 27 Analyzer Memory Catalog Information 6 29 CATALOG ON EVENT Display aoaaa 6 33 Connecting a Printer to the analyzer 2 6 48 Contents 9 Tables 2 Power Requirements Se nF pan a a a 3 AC Power Cables Available o 00 a aaa 4 Setting of ThinkJet Printer Mode Switches 5 Static Safe Accessories 2 a a a 1 Screen Annotation for Trace Trigger and Sweep Modes 2 Screen Annotation 5 oz de weak He ek we PT 1 Summary of Save and Recall Operations Analyzer Memory 2 Comparison of Analyzer Memory and Memory Card Operations 3 Save and Recall Functions Using Memory Card 8 External Keyboard Functions 000 1 Determining Spectrum Analyzer Settings for Viewing a Pulsed RP Signal goora gen got ae ee Ea ae ce 5 2 Pulse Generator Test Setup Settings 202 2 5 3 Signal Generator Test Setup Settings 2 5 4 Gate Delay Re
48. 2 3 Front Panel Features ee ee ee eae 2 3 Rear Panel Features E aa ee ee 2 7 Data Controls Wb we E E E E E E S Hold Keys sncs doen dw tee FM oe a 8 Seer 2 10 Knob Ss pity erie Gliese wade es 2 10 Number Units Keypad Bees en eee Dee 21 Step Keys ao ae Be ae as 3 Se ah Fine Focus Control 2 ee eee som ca 212 Screen Annotation lt s 0e ew hae esai 2 13 Menu and Softkey Overview bs ah En Eck vy BE 2 16 Making a Measurement Lae oh a eee ald Measurement Summary saoao a a 4 2 20 Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines 2 21 Warm Up Time a we a yao el SE rat ee ae oe 2 21 Performing the Tracking Generator Self Calibration Routine Option 011 only Seen he sae oe 8 2 24 When Is Self Calibration Needed mo Foe ok Sete 2 26 Memory Card Insertion and Battery Replacement dots a o 22 Changing the Memory Card Battery 2 28 Procedure to Change the Memory Card Battery 2 29 Analyzer Battery Information lt 231 3 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features What You ll Learn in This Chapter 3 2 Using the Internal Preamplifier 3 3 Use the Marker Table to List All the Active Markers 3 4 Use the Peak Table to List the Displayed Signals 3 6 Saving and Recalling Data from Analyzer Memory 3 8 To Save a State de sn dp ashy es ag Osa seh 3 8 To Recall a State wy ah seat E We ae tink GP G
49. 2 4 6 120 RECALL AMP COR 6 120 recalling a display image from the memory card 3 25 6 23 recalling a DLP from the memory card 6 24 recalling amplitude correction factors from analyzer memory 3 13 15 recalling amplitude correction factors from the memory card 3 27 recalling a program from the memory card 3 30 recalling a state from analyzer memory 3 9 recalling a state from the memory card 3 21 6 24 recalling a trace from analyzer memory 3 11 6 82 recalling a trace from the memory card 3 23 6 25 recalling limit lines from analyzer memory 3 13 15 recalling limit line tables from the memory card 3 27 RECALL LIMIT 6 121 reference connector 1 13 reference detector 10V 6 6 10V 6 6 2V 6 7 ground 6 80 reference level 6 12 1 reference level offset 6 122 REF LVL 6 121 REF LVL OFFSET 6 122 relative liiit line type 6 83 remote command dispose all 6 65 6 66 6 67 front panel execution 6 69 remote operation 6 44 RES BW AUTO MAN 6 122 resolution bandwidth 6 122 resolving signals 4 3 8 resolution bandwidth coupling 6 17 gate utility 6 49 resolution bandwidths optional 9 5 resolution of marker counter 6 43 RF bridge 9 7 Index 25 RF OUT 75 Q 2 5 RPG knob 2 10 RPG TITLE 6 123 RS 232 cable 9 10 RS 232 interface connector 2 9 S sales and service offices 8 11 sample detection use with time gated capability 5 34 sample detection mode 6 55 SAVE 2 4 6 124 SAVE AMP COR
50. 29 1993 MKA TRK 100 1325 MHZ REF 9 0 dBmv AT O dB 7 81 dBmv Shek PEAK WRITE A LOG 10 MAX 9B HOLD A WI o BLANK A E ai CENTER 100 1325 MHz SPAN 500 0 kHz RES BW 10 kHz VBW 10 KHZ SWP 30 0 msec kal Figure 4 9 Viewing an Unstable Signal Using Max Hold A Annotation on the left side of the screen indicates the trace mode For example MA SB SC indicates trace A is in maximum hold mode trace B and trace C are in store blank mode See Screen Annotation in Chapter 2 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Tracking Unstable Signals Using Marker Track and the Maximum Hold and Minimum Hold Functions 6 Press TRACE_ TRACE A BC to select trace B Trace B is selected when B is underlined Press CLEAR WRITE B to place trace B in clear write mode which displays the current measurement results as it sweeps Trace A remains in maximum hold mode showing the frequency shift of the signal 7 Press TRACE A B C to select trace C C should be underlined Press MIN HOLD C Trace C is in the minimum hold mode and displays the minimum amplitude of the frequency drift of the signal 14 11 46 JUL 29 1993 4p MKRA TAK 100 0963 MHz REF 9 0 dBmv AT 0 dB 7 93 dBMV CLEAR PEAK WRITE C LOG 10 dB MIN HOLD C SPAN 500 0 kH VIEW C BLANK C H TEE MC FC Trace C
51. 6 91 MARKER REF LVL 6 91 MARKER START 6 92 MARKER STOP 6 92 markers using multiple markers 3 5 marker table mode 6 142 using 3 4 5 marker to 6 98 marker tracking 4 11 6 97 6 108 mass storage device analyzer memory 6 82 memory card 6 82 MAX HOLD A 4 16 6 93 MAX HOLD B 6 94 maximum hold 4 13 Index 18 maximum mixer level 6 94 MAX MXR LVL 6 94 MEAS OFF 6 94 measuring amplitude modulation 5 3 measuring low level signals 4 22 MEASAJSER 6 94 MEM LOCKED 6 95 6 123 memory amount available 6 29 memory card battery 2 28 blank card 3 18 card configuration 6 23 catalog display images 6 28 catalog DLPs 6 28 catalog functions 6 26 cataloging 3 18 6 28 cataloging amplitude correction factor files 6 26 catalog lit lines 6 30 catalog states 6 34 catalog traces 6 34 changing the battery 2 28 delete file 6 20 6 53 display recall 6 23 formatting 3 18 6 74 inserting a memory card 2 27 preparation for use 3 17 program and variable cataloging 6 25 recalling a display image 3 25 recalling a DLP 6 24 recalling amplitude correction factors 3 27 recalling a program 3 30 recalling a state 3 21 6 24 recalling a trace 3 23 6 25 recalling limit lines 3 27 saving a display image 3 24 saving amplitude correction factors 3 26 saving and recalling data 3 15 saving and recalling programs 3 28 saving a program 3 29 saving a state 3 20 saving a trace 3 22 saving limit lin
52. 900 MHz SPAN 1 800 GHz RES BW 3 0 MHZ VBW 1 MHZ SWP 36 0 msec Figure 4 11 Placing a Marker on the CAL OUT Signal 4 18 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Comparing Signals Using Delta Markers 3 Press MARKER A to activate a second marker at the position of the first marker Move the second marker to another signal peak using the NEXT PK RIGHT or NEXT PK LEFT softkeys or the knob 4 The amplitude and frequency difference between the markers is displayed in the active function block and in the upper right corner of the screen See Figure 4 12 Press MKR More 1 of 2 then MARKER ALL OFF to turn the markers off 14 24 23 JUL 29 1993 U4 MKA A 297 MHz REF 48 8 cBmv AT 10 dB 8 19 0B MARKER PEAK NORMAL ____4 CENTER 900 MHz SPAN 1 800 GHZ RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHZ SWP 36 0 msec Figure 4 12 Using the Marker Delta Function 5 The MARKER PK PK softkey can be used to find and display the frequency and amplitude difference between the highest and lowest amplitude signals To use this automatic function press MKR More 1 of 2 MARKER PK PK See Figure 4 13 4 19 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Comparing Signals Using Delta Markers 10 09 32 JUL 30 1993 w MKA A 27 MHz REF 48 8 dBmV AT 10 dB 753 32 0B EKER PEAK gt START LOG MARKER gt STOP dB 10
53. Card To Save a Display Image Press DISPLAY or CONFIG Change Prefix Use the softkeys to enter a prefix under which you want the state saved A prefix can be one to seven characters long If you do not specify a prefix the display image will be saved with a file name consisting of i_ register number Press SAVE If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD Selecting CARD selects the memory card as the mass storage device Press DISPLAY CARD REGISTER and PREFIX are displayed on the cable TV analyzer display Use the numeric keypad to enter a register number and then press ENTER Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card To Recall a Display Image 1 Use Change Prefix to enter the prefix or use the existing prefix 2 Press SAVE or RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 3 Press Catalog Card then CATALOG ALL Use the knob to highlight the display image data to be retrieved 4 Press LOAD FILE NOTE The intensity of some screen items may differ if the window configuration of the current cable TV analyzer state does not match the recalled display image This will not affect the ability to copy the screen Display image data can also be recalled by specifying the prefix and the register number 1 Press RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 2 Press CARD BIS
54. FLATNESS 1 DNUM 6 INIT FLT EXIT ALC TEST 2 More 6 7 5 Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Lyrocat COPY DEV PRNT PLT Plot Contig Print Config Time Date Change Prefix More 1 of 3 PLTS PG 1 2 4 PLT Loc 29 PLT gt LuT ON OFF PLOTTER ADDRESS PLT MENU ON OFF Previous Menu Set B amp W Printer Set Colr Printer PRINTER ADDRESS PRT MENU ON OFF PRINTER SETUP Previous Menu TIMEDATE ON OFF DATEMODE MDY DMY SET TIME SET DATE Previous ABCDEF GHIJKL MNOPOR STUVWX YZ_H Spe Cleor More 1 of 2 Card Config Dispose User Mem gt BAUD RATE DEFALT CONFIG SHOW OPTIONS 9 More 2 of 3 Changes to ANALYZER ADDRESS for Option 021 Changes to EXIT SHOW when SHOW OPTIONS is pressed Changes to MEM LOCKED when SAV LOCK is ON Appeors onty when PLTS PG 2 or 4 is selected 7 6 COPY HP B amp W PRINTER EP MXBO SML LRG EP LQ57G SML LRG Previous Menu PAINTJET PRINTER DESKJET 310 550C Previous Menu lt gt ZA OP Za a Edit Done More 2 of 2 CATALOG CARD FORMAT CARD BLANK CARD Previous Menu ERASE MEM CARD ERASE DLP MEM ERASE STATE ALL 2 ERASE TRACE ALL 2 ERASE MEM ALL Previous Menu POWER ON IP LAST SYNC NRM NTSC DEFAULT SYNC SYNC NRM PAL More 3 OF 3 pul32c PUI7 HOLD DSP LINE ON OFF 34 Change Title Limit Lines ANALOG ON OFF More 1 of 2 34 After selecting this softkey digit O th
55. IMDODODODOVDODDOODOOO DODODVDDDDDODOOOO0O0COM om coc 2 Figure 2 3 Adjusting the Fine Focus 2 12 Screen Annotation Figure 2 4 shows an example of the annotation that may appear on a cable TV analyzer screen The screen annotation is referenced by numbers and is listed in Table 2 2 The function key column indicates which front panel key or softkey activates the function related to the screen annotation Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on a specific function key 0 04 o3 MAR A ae KEYBOARD L 1 4 SCREEN TITLE vow MKR TRK 399 9 MHz REF 58 8 dBmV AT 20 dB PG 10 0 dB SMPL He CENTER FREQ EdT START FREQ aB DL STOP CX 4 5 0 FREQ dBm AVG 00 CF STEP L AUTO MAN WA SB ae GAs FS FREQ OFFSET CENTER 399 9 MHz OFFST 100 0 MHz SPAN 200 0 MHz RES BW 1 MHz 20 mse RL O V15 300 kHz SWP bs gt Figure 2 4 Screen Annotation pu124c In Figure 2 4 item 21 refers to the trigger and sweep modes of the cable TV analyzer The Erst letter F indicates the cable TV analyzer is in free run 2 13 Getting Started Screen Annotation trigger mode The second letter S indicates the cable TV analyzer is in single sweep mode Item 22 refers to the trace modes of the cable TV analyzer The first letter W indicates that the cable TV analyzer is in clear wr
56. Options and Accessories Options connector for an external keyboard an HP IB connector and the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide Option 021 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R21 after the purchase of your cable TV analyzer or as a kit HP part number 5062 6454 Note that Option 021 deletes the RS 232 interface that is standard with the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer Front Panel Protective Cover Option 040 The impact cover assembly snaps onto the front of your cable TV analyzer to protect the front panel during travel and when the unit is not in use Note that this option is for use without the soft carrying case Option 040 is also available as a kit Impact Cover Assembly HP part number 5062 4805 TV Receiver Video Tester Option 107 This option adds non interfering RF and video measurement capability to the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer Noise Figure Card Option 119 This option adds noise figure measurement capability to the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer 9 4 CAUTION CAUTION Options and Accessories Options Narrow Resolution Bandwidths Option 130 This option provides additional narrow resolution bandwidths of 30 Hz 100 Hz and 300 Hz These bandwidths improve the cable TV analyzer sensitivity and allow you to resolve closely spaced signals Option 130 is also available as a retrofit kit Option R30 after the purchase of you
57. POWER FFT Menu ADJ CHAN PWR extd CHANNEL POWER 5 Setup MEAS OFF IARKER gt AUTO FFT SINGLE FFT CONT INUS FFT FFT STOP FREQ FFT OFF More 1 of 2 33 Changes to GRPH MKR ON OFF when GRAPH ON mkr MARKERnormaL MARKER A SINGLE MEAS CONT MEAS CENTER FREQ OCC BW POWER Setup Previous Menu SINGLE MEAS CONT MEAS CENTER FREQ ACPGRAPH ON OFF Setup 33 Previous Menu SINGLE MEAS CONT MEAS CENTER FREQ ACPGRAPH ON OFF Setup 33 Previous Menu SINGLE MEAS CONT MEAS CENTER FREQ PWRGRAPH ON OFF Setup 33 Previous Menu CHANNEL SPACING CHANNEL BANDWDTH PARAM AUTO MAN VID AVG ON OFF OCC BW POWER Previous Menu FFT MARKERS MARKER gt FFT STOP MARKER gt MID SCRN SIGNAL ID More 2 of 2 MARKER AMPTD 34 SELECT 1 2 3 4 MARKER ON OFF More Toi MK TRACE AUTO ABC MK READ F TIP MARKER ALL OFF More 2 of 2 After selecting this softkey pressing ony digit O through 9 brings up the appropriate ampli tude terminator menu pul5de 7 8 MARKER gt CF or MARKER gt MID SCRN 16 MARKER gt REF LVL MARKER gt CF STEP MARKER A gt SPAN MARKER gt MINIMUM More 1 of 2 MARKER gt START MARKER gt STOP MARKER gt PK PK Peak Menu More 2 of 2 6 Alternate softkey when th FFT function is selected Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions PEAK SEARCH PU112 MK TRACK ON OFF MK COUNT
58. PRESEL TIMEOUT Indicates that the preselector peak routine cannot be performed H SAMPLE FAIL Indicates the sample detector has failed H SETUP ERROR Indicates that the span channel bandwidth or channel spacing are not set correctly for the adjacent channel power or channel power measurement U SIGNAL NOT FOUND Indicates the PEAK ZOOM routine did not End a valid signal U SIGNAL CLIPPED Indicates that the current FFT measurement sweep resulted in a trace that is above the top graticule line on the cable TV analyzer display If this happens the input trace trace A has been clipped and the FFT data is not valid U Signals do not fit expected AM pattern Indicates that the AM routine cannot perform the percent AM measurement because the on screen signals do not have the characteristics of a carrier with two sidebands U Signals do not fit expected TOI pattern Indicates that the TOI routine cannot perform the third order inter modulation measurement because the on screen signals do not have the characteristics of two signals and two distortion products U SMPLR UNLCK Indicates that the sampling oscillator circuitry is not functioning properly If this message appears check that the external frequency reference is correctly connected to the EXT REF INPUT U and H SOFTKEY OVFL Softkey nesting exceeds the maximum number of levels U If You Have a Problem Error Messages SRQ __ The spec
59. Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE CATALOG VARIABLS CENTER FREQ CF STEP AUTO MAN Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions catalogs all of the variables saved in analyzer memory Variables can be saved in analyzer memory by loading in a downloadable program from the memory card or defining a function using remote programming commands VARDEF or TRDEF Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE activates the center frequency function to allow the selection of frequency that will be at the center of the screen Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL MEAS USER or FREQUENCY changes the step size for the center frequency function Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function is activated the step keys change center frequency by the step size value The step size function is useful for finding harmonics and sidebands beyond the analyzer current frequency span When auto coupled the center frequency step size is set to one graticule 10 percent of the span Front Panel Key Access AUTO courre or FREQUENCY 6 35 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Change Prefix Change Title allows you to enter a prefix that can be used for saving and recalling data to and from the memory card and for cataloging by the prefix The prefix can be from one to seven characters long The longer the prefix the shorter the register numbe
60. Selected line of a Video Picture Field 4 Press TV TRIG EVEN FLD to trigger on an even field of a video format NKA 85 A peec 492 mv ATTEN i d8 289 G2 WwW CENTER 67 259 MHz SPAN Hz WARES BW 1 MHZ VBW 382 kHz SWP 108 usec Figure 5 14 Triggering on an Even Field of a Video Format The default video format is NTSC Press TV Standard then PAL M PAL or SECAM L to select a different video format For non interlaced video formats press TV TRIG VERT INT NOTE The video format selection NTSC PAL M PAL or SECAM L automatically selects the video modulation negative or positive 5 27 Using the Gate Utility to Simplify Time Gated Measurements Option 107 only Note that Option 107 is required to perform this application The time gate allows the user to control when a spectrum analyzer measurement begins and the length of time during which the measurement is made The time gate is an RF signal switch that permits signal into the spectrum analyzer only while the switch or gate is closed Since the spectrum analyzer receives the signal only when passed through the gate it will only display the measurement results from the portion of the signal selected by the time position of the gate closure The time gate acts as a time filter rejecting signals and spectra not occurring at the desired time The time gate utility simplifies the use of the time gate In the gate utility the spectrum an
61. Set B amp W Printer then EP LQ570 SML LRG until LRG is underlined to set up the large screen printout This will allow for one printout per page The large screen printout format will not allow for printing of the menu keys Press Set B amp W Printer then EP LQ570 SML LRG until SML is underlined to set up the small screen printout This will allow for two printouts per page Front Panel Key Access CONFIG sets the analyzer to be compatible with an Epson MX80 compatible printer Press Set B amp W Printer then EP MX80 SML LRG until LRG is underlined to set up the large screen printout This will allow for one printout per page The large screen printout format will not allow for printing of the menu keys Press Set B amp W Printer then EP MX80 SML LRG until SML is underlined to set up the small screen printout This will allow for two printouts per page Front Panel Key Access CONFIG EXECUTE TITLE EXIT Exit Catalog EXIT SHOW EXIT UTILITY Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions executes a programming command displayed in the screen title area of the analyzer The Change Title function can be used to print programming commands in the screen title area of the display The commands can then be executed from the front panel of the analyzer without an external computer by pressing the EXECUTE TITLE softkey Front Panel Key Access exits the EDIT FLATNESS softkey menu This is
62. Sweep time directly affects how long it takes to complete a measurement It does not include the dead time between the completion of one sweep and the start of the next It is usually a function of frequency span resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth Resolution affects sweep time in that the IF filters are band limited circuits requiring finite times to charge and discharge The amount of time the mixing product remains in the IF filter passband is directly proportional to the bandwidth inversely proportional to the sweep in Hz per unit of time The rise time of a filter is inversely proportional to its bandwidth and if the proportionality constant k is included then we can make the rise time equal the k divided by resolution bandwidth Mathematically this is represented as resolution bandwidth _ resol utzob ah dth x sweep time span sweep time span k resolution bandwidth Time in Passband Rise Time Solving for sweep time k x span sw time ____ SP resolution bandwidth time gate A time gate acts as a time filter rejecting signals and spectra not corresponding to the desired time It is an RF signal switch that admits the signal to the analyzer only while the switch or gate is closed Since the analyzer receives the signal only when passed through the gate it will only display the measurement results from the portion of the signal selected by the gate position in time title line The
63. The PLT MENU ON OFF function is set to OFF when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed Front Panel Key Access CONFIG allows you to plot a full page half page or quarter page output Selecting two plots per page requires a plotter that has the rotate command RO The plotter will be set to a full page output when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed Front Panel Key Access allows you to plot a full page half page or quarter page output to an HP LaserJet printer This softkey can be accessed by pressing CONFIG then Plot Config Front Panel Key Access specifies a limit value for one coordinate point so that a POINT segment specifies a limit value for a single frequency or time For an upper limit line a POINT segment is indicated by a line drawn vertically from the coordinate point to a point off the top of screen For a lower limit line a POINT segment is indicated by a line drawn vertically from the coordinate point to a point off the bottom of screen The POINT segment type is generally used as the last segment in the limit line table However if the last segment in the table is not of the POINT segment type an implicit point is automatically added at the right hand side of the screen If a visible POINT segment at the right hand edge of the display is not desired add an explicit last point segment to the limit line table that is higher in frequency than the stop frequency Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY Power Menu POWER ON IP LAST
64. The video bandwidth must be wide enough than 1 divided by the gate length so that the rise times of the video bandwidth do not attenuate the signal 1 Video Bandwidth gt atelengih Resolution Bandwidth et the resolution bandwidth to a value The resolution bandwidth must be wide greater then 2 divided by the gate delay enough so that the charging time for the minus the signal delay resolution bandwidth filters is less than the pulse width of the signal Resolution Bandwidth gt 2 Gate Delay Signal Delay 5 39 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Example of a Time Gated Pulsed RF Signal The measurement procedures in this section explain how to use the time gate capability without the convenience of the Gate Utility functions The Gate Utility provides the user with simultaneous displays of the frequency and time domain to assist in setting up and manipulating the time gate An oscilloscope is not needed when using the Gate Utility A list of all the Gate Utility keys can be found under the key in the key menus in Chapter 7 Descriptions of the different Gate Utility functions are found in Chapter 6 NOTE This example only applies to using time gated spectrum analyzer capability with a pulsed RF signal For more information on using Option 107 to view other types of signals see product note 8590 2
65. Using Delta Markers NOTE Changing the reference level changes the marker delta amplitude readout The annotation in the upper right corner of the screen indicates the amplitude and frequency difference between the two markers See Figure 4 14 To turn the markers off press MKR More 1 of 2 then MARKER ALL OFF 74 33 36 JUL 29 1993 ie MKA A 300 0 MHZ REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 dB 8 2808 EENEN PEAK FREJ START FREQ STOP FREQ CF STEP AUTO MAN FREQ OFFSET CENTER 600 0 MHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 3 0 MHZ VBW 1 MHz SWP 20 0 msec Figure 4 14 Frequency and Amplitude Difference Between Signals 4 21 Measuring Low Level Signals Using Attenuation Video Bandwidth and Video Averaging Spectrum analyzer sensitivity is the ability to measure low level signals It is limited by the noise generated inside the spectrum analyzer The spectrum analyzer input attenuator and bandwidth settings affect the sensitivity by changing the signal to noise ratio The attenuator affects the level of a signal passing through the instrument whereas the bandwidth affects the level of internal noise without affecting the signal In the first two examples in this section the attenuator and bandwidth settings are adjusted to view low level signals If after adjusting the attenuation and resolution bandwidth a signal is still near the noise visibility can be improve
66. Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements The power menu provides several powerful transmitter measurement functions that are easy to use The measurements include e Occupied Bandwidth e Adjacent Channel Power Ratio e Channel Power These transmitter power measurements can be used to measure analog and continuous carrier digital radios The transmitted signal can be tones noise or a combination of tones and noise without affecting the measurement accuracy The power is measured in an rms way so that power and power ratio values are consistent with power meter results The signal or signals being measured should be displayed before activating the measurement The spectrum analyzer center frequency should be set to the carrier frequency and the reference level should be set so that the signal is near the top graticule A power measurement may require the user to enter the channel spacing and or channel bandwidth before activating the function The spectrum analyzer automatically selects all of the other settings for accurate and efficient measurements There is also a manual mode where the user selects all of the spectrum analyzer settings The manual mode should be used carefully since it has limitations and requirements that are necessary to ensure the measurement is accurate Power measurements are made continuously updating at the end of each sweep This allows you to make adjustments and see changes a
67. a frequency separation of 200 kHz the resolution bandwidth must be less than the signal separation and resolution of 100 kHz must be used The next larger filter 300 kHz would exceed the 200 kHz separation and would not resolve the signals 4 5 Resolving Small Signals Hidden by Large Signals Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function When dealing with resolution of signals that are not equal in amplitude you must consider the shape of the IF filter as well as its 3 dB bandwidth The shape of the filter is defined by the shape factor which is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB bandwidth Generally the IF filters in this spectrum analyzer have shape factors of 15 1 or less If a small signal is too close to a larger signal the smaller signal can be hidden by the skirt of the larger signal To view the smaller signal you must select a resolution bandwidth such that k is less than a See Figure 4 3 l a alk ee k lt a Figure 4 3 Resolution Bandwidth Requirements for Resolving Small Signals The separation between the two signals must be greater than half the filter width of the larger signal at the amplitude level of the smaller signal Example Resolve two input signals with a frequency separation of 200 kHz and an amplitude separation of 60 dB 1 To obtain two signals with a 200 kHz separation connect the equipment as shown in the previous section Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude Using
68. amplitude correction table Press Edit Amp Cor to edit an existing amplitude correction table or if no amplitude correction table currently exists to create an amplitude correction table Pressing PURGE AMP COA two times consecutively clears an existing amplitude correction table Pressing SELECT POINT specifies the amplitude correction point to be entered or edited Amplitude correction data is constructed from left to right and is created by entering frequency and amplitude values into an amplitude correction table The frequency and amplitude values specify a coordinate point from which amplitude corrections are interpolated See Figure 3 13 Up to 79 points can be specified for the amplitude corrections table Using Spectrum Analyzer Features learn How to Enter Amplitude Correction Factors 14 05 24 AUG 18 1993 REF 48 8 dBmV AT 10 dB CENTER FREQ Gedideds sete SE aah AOSS AAEE E RASAR a ee START CF STEP AUTO HAN FREQ OFFSET Hz STOP 4898 8 MHz 0 MHz VBW MHz SWP 20 0 msec Item 1 Frequencies below first point use first amplitude level 2 First segment interpolated with the 10 dB amplitude level 3 Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts the second segment 4 Third segment interpolated with the 10 dBamplitude level 5 Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts the fourth segment 3 62 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features learn How to Enter Amplitude Correction Factors Sele
69. an Unstable Signal Using Max Hold A Viewing an Unstable Signal With Max Hold Clear Write and IVINS rarah Ge ae I E ce te eth ee A Placing a Marker on the CAL OUT Signal Using the Marker Delta Function 2 2 Using the Marker to Peak Peak Function Frequency and Amplitude Difference Between Signals Low Level Signal 2 2 ee Using 0 dB Attenuation Gb Eee ee ee i Decreasing Resolution Bandwidth aA E te BAe Decreasing Video Bandwidth 8 8 Using the Video Averaging Function Harmonic Distortion 2 a a e a RF Attenuation of 10 dB aaa aaa aaa No Harmonic Distortion o o aa a Third Order Intermodulation Equipment Setup Measuring the Distortion Product Viewing an AM Signal 0 Measuring Modulation In Zero Span s FFT Annotati n o ooa Gg eA Beg oao e eR ete ae a Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement Block Diagram of a Spectrum Analyzer Tracking Generator Measurement System Transmission Measurement Test Setup Tracking Generator Output Power Activated Spectrum Analyzer Settings According to the Measurement Requirement ca ip tad 2h Ee oy eek OP te a Decrease the Resolution Bandwidth to Improve Sensitivity Manual Tracking Adjustment Compensates for Tracking Error Normalized Trace ce tent oe ae ae ie het Ae pete ee eh M
70. analyzer and printer 4 Press CONFIG More i of 3 To set the baud rate to 9600 baud press BAUD RATE 9600 Hz To set the baud rate to 1200 baud press BAUD RATE 1200 Hz NOTE Some of the programs in this manual utilize 1200 baud If your system uses the RS 232 handshake lines you can use 9600 baud for all of the programs 6 Press CONFIG Print Conf ig 1 18 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting 7 Select the configuration for your printer by pressing the appropriate key Note that the softkey is activated when the key title is underlined Set Colr Printer Press this key to print in color if the cable TV analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard color printer then select the appropriate printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page prior to formfeeding the page One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfeeding each printout NOTE To proceed with the three printouts per page format after printing one printout per page it is necessary to press PRINTER SETUP Pressing PRINTER SETUP resets the internal counter 1 19 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting Set B amp W Printer Press this key to print in black and white then press one of the following keys to select the appropriate printer mode e Press BP B amp W PRINTER if the cable TV analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard pr
71. analyzers usually offer only one kind of unit typically dBm marker A visual indicator we can place anywhere along the displayed trace A marker readout indicates the absolute value of the trace frequency and amplitude at the marked point The amplitude value is displayed with the currently selected units Refer also to delta marker and noise marker maximum input level The maximum signal power that may be safely applied to the input of an analyzer Typically 1 W 30 dBm for Hewlett Packard analyzers MEAS UNCAL Annotation indicating an uncalibrated measurement condition exists It appears when instrument settings affect accuracy of measurement results to the extent that they no longer meet specifications Glossary 15 measurement bandwidth The resolution bandwidth required for a specific EMI measurement For MIL STD measurements the resolution bandwidth is often determined by the tester with the approval of the contracting agency For commercial testing the measurement bandwidths required usually follow the recommendations of CISPR Band A 10 kHz to 150 kHz 200 Hz Band B 150 kHz to 30 MHz 9 kHz Band C and D 30 MHz to 1 GHz 120 kHz measurement range The ratio expressed in dB of the maximum signal level that can be measured usually the maximum safe input level to the lowest achievable average noise level This ratio is almost always much greater than can be realized in a single measurement Refer also to dynamic r
72. analyzers with microprocessors allow reference level and marker values to be indicated in dBm dBmV dByV volts and in some cases watts linear input level The maximum input signal level where gain compression does not occur Refer also to gain compression Glossary 14 LO The abbreviation for local oscillator The local oscillator output in a superheterodyne system is mixed with the received signal to produce a sum or difference equal to the intermediate frequency IF of the receiver Refer also to IF LO feedthrough The response that occurs on an analyzer s display when the first local oscillator frequency is equal to the first IF The LO feedthrough is a 0 Hz marker with no error so it can be used to improve the frequency accuracy of analyzers with nonsynthesized LO systems log display The display mode in which vertical deflection is a logarithmic function of the input signal voltage Log display is also referred to as logarithmic mode The display calibration is set by selecting the value of the top graticule line reference level and scale factor in volts per division On Hewlett Packard analyzers the bottom graticule line represents zero volts for scale factors of 10 dB division or more The bottom division therefore is not calibrated for those analyzers Analyzers with microprocessors allow reference level and marker values to be indicated in dBm dBmV dByV volts and occasionally in watts Nonmicroprocessor based
73. and blanks the active function text from the display No data can be accidentally entered using the knob step keys or keypad Activating another function will turn off the hold function Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY HP B amp W PRINTER IDNUM INIT FLT INPUT Z 502 752 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions selects a black and white print Use this function if you have a black and white HP printer or if you are using an HP PaintJet printer but want to have a black and white print Pressing DEFAULT CONFIG selects the HP B amp W PRINTER softkey Start printing by pressing COPY DEV PRNT PLT PRNT and COPY Front Panel Key Access is used when the instrument is powered on the first time It inputs the analyzer model number and option information This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Refer to the service guide for more information Front Panel Key Access CAL is used when the instrument is powered on the first time It sets the defaults for spectrum analyzer flatness including the start and stop frequencies and the step size All of the correction values are set to zero This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Refer to the service guide for more information Front Panel Key Access adjusts the voltage readout by 1 76 dB to correct for the difference between voltage and power measurements in a 75 Q system versus a 50 Q
74. annotated ATTEN AUTO MAN AUTO A summary of all front panel keys and their related softkeys can be found in Chapter 7 Key Menus 2 16 CAUTION Making a Measurement Do not exceed the maximum input power The maximum input power for the HP 8591C is 72 dBmV 0 2 watt continuous 100 V dc with 10 dB or more attenuation Let s begin using the cable TV analyzer by measuring an input signal Since the 300 MHz calibration signal CAL OUT is readily available we will use it as our input signal You cannot hurt the cable TV analyzer by using the calibration signal and pressing any of the keys described in this section Don t be afraid to play with the knob step keys or number units keypad If you have experimented with other keys and wish to return to a known state press the green key 1 First turn the instrument on by pressing CINE Wait for the power up process to complete 2 Press the green key 3 Connect the cable TV analyzer CAL OUT to the INPUT 75 Q with an appropriate cable 4 Set the frequency Press the rrequency key CENTER appears on the left side of the screen indicating that the center frequency function is active The CENTER FREQ softkey label appears in inverse video to indicate that center frequency is the active function The active function block is the space on the screen within the graticule where the center frequency messages appear Functions appearing in this block
75. appear record the messages and refer to the cable TV analyzer service guide or contact the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office listed in Table 8 1 If the error message FREQ UNCAL stays onscreen Perform the frequency self calibration routine by pressing CAL FREQ wait for the routine to complete then press CAL STORE 8 7 If You Have a Problem Before You Call Hewlett Packard If the calibration routines cannot be performed Use CAL FETCH to retrieve the correction data that has previously been saved If the fetched correction data is corrupt perform the steps in If the display is scrambled to set the correction data back to factory default values If the calibration data is corrupt Use CAL FETCH to retrieve the correction data that has previously been saved If the fetched correction data is corrupt perform the steps in If the display is scrambled to set the correction data back to factory default values If the display is scrambled Perform the following procedure to reinitialize the memory area for correction factors instrument configuration and miscellaneous constants This procedure will not erase factory installed calibration factors 1 Press FREQUENCY 37 Hz CAL then press the following softkeys bottom softkey bottom softkey third softkey from the top A readable display should appear 8 8 If You Have a Problem Before You Call Hewlett Packard 2 Press the fol
76. are inoperative until the NEXT or HOLD key is pressed Front Panel Key Access or DISPLAY 6 37 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions CHANNEL BANDWDTH CHANNEL POWER allows the user to enter the channel bandwidth to set up the analyzer when using the measurement functions under the Power Menu softkey When the power measurements are first accessed the initial value for channel bandwidth is 16 kHz If the value is changed the new value will be saved through an instrument preset or power on An error message will occur for invalid values of channel bandwidth and channel spacing If one of the power measurements is active and the channel bandwidth is changed with PARAM AUTO selected then the coupled analyzer settings are immediately updated If CONT MEAS is also selected then another sweep is taken and the measured results are updated Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER measures the power and power spectral density in the channel bandwidth specified by the user Two vertical lines on the display indicate the edges of the channel bandwidth The measurement can be made on a single sweep or to continuously update at the end of each sweep The center frequency reference level and channel bandwidth must be set by the user If PARAM AUTO MAN is selected AUTO is underlined other settings will be coupled and set automatically PARAM AUTO MAN can be selected to manually control all settings
77. by underlining MAN The measurement stops and the analyzer is returned to its prior state when other functions are activated The channel power measurement responds like an rms power measurement Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER 6 38 CHANNEL SPACING Clear CLEAR PARAM Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions allows the user to enter the channel spacing to set up the analyzer when using the measurement functions under the Power Menu softkey When the power measurements are first accessed the initial value for channel spacing is 25 kHz Once the value is changed the new value will be saved through an instrument preset or power on An error message will occur for invalid values of channel spacing and channel bandwidth If one of the power measurements is active and the channel spacing is changed with PARAM AUTO selected then the coupled analyzer settings are immediately updated If CONT MEAS is also selected then another sweep is taken and the measured results are updated Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER clears the current screen title or prefix This softkey is accessed under the YZ_ Spc Clear softkey when using Change Title or Change Prefix Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or SAVE clears all of the pulse parameters in the gate utility It sets the value of pulse width pulse repetition interval and reference edge to zero and turns off the
78. coupling of the pulse parameters to the resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and sweep time Front Panel Key Access SWEEP 6 39 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions CLEAR WRITE A 6 40 erases any data previously stored in trace A and continuously displays any signals during the sweep of the analyzer This function is activated at power on and by pressing PRESET Changing the trace mode of trace C to clear write or minimum hold can change the trace mode of trace A If trace A is in clear write mode or maximum hold mode when trace C is changed to clear write or minimum hold the trace mode of trace A is changed to store blank The following table shows the trace mode of trace A before and after changing trace C to clear write or minimum hold trace mode Trace Mode of Trace A Trace Mode of Trace A Before Clear write Store blank Maximum hold Store blank View View Changing the trace mode of trace A to clear write or maximum hold can change the trace mode of trace C If trace C is in clear write mode when trace A is changed to clear write or minimum hold the trace mode of trace C is changed to minimum hold Trace Mode of Trace C Trace Mode of Trace C Before After Clear write Minimum hold Minimum hold View Minimum hold View Front Panel Key Access TRACE CLEAR WRITE B Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions
79. displayed after MAX REG x during a save or recall operation If a screen title is present it is saved with the trace data The time and date that the trace was stored is appended to the screen title If windows are being used only the trace of the active window will be saved When comparing a trace displayed in view mode with a recalled trace it is possible to over write the displayed trace by recalling the trace data This can happen because the instrument state is saved and recalled with the trace data For example if you save trace A when it is in clear write mode place trace A in view mode then recall the trace data into trace B trace B will be placed in view mode but the trace mode of trace A is changed to clear write mode since the trace mode of trace A was clear write when it was saved To avoid this problem change the trace mode of the traces to view or blank mode before saving the trace data Front Panel Key Access Option O 1 only displays softkey menus for use with a built in tracking generator Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL 6 147 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions TRACKING Option 011 only PEAK activates a routine that automatically adjusts the tracking adjustment to obtain the peak response of the tracking generator on the analyzer display NOTE For tracking peak to function properly the tracking generator must be connected to the analyzer Before m
80. gated spectrum analyzer capability The trigger input coincides with signal 1 5 38 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Made Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Use the guidelines in Table 5 1 when using time gated spectrum analyzer capability to view a pulsed RF signal These are only guidelines and the spectrum analyzer settings can be changed if necessary Table 5 1 Determining Spectrum Analyzer Settings for Viewing a Pulsed RF Signal Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Setting Comments Function Sweep Time Set the sweep time to be 401 times greater Because the gate must be on at least once than the pulse repetition interval PRI per trace point the sweep time has to be set to the pulse repetition interval times for Sweep time gt 401x PRI every point of the trace Each trace has 401 points Gate Delay The gate delay is equal to the signal delay The gate delay must be set so that the plus half of the pulse width ing captures the pulse If the gate delay is too short or too long the gating can miss Gate Delay Signal Delay r 2 pulse or include resolution bandwidth Sient responses Gate Length The gate length is equal to one fourth the e gate length is too long the signal pulse width display can include transients caused by the spectrum analyzer filters Gate length 7 4 Video Bandwidth Set the video bandwidth to a value greater
81. if positive video modulation is required Front Panel Key Access TRIG allows the user to enter the percent of the power desired when using the occupied bandwidth measurement under the Power Menu softkey When the power measurements are Erst accessed the initial value for percent power is 99 percent Once the value is changed the new value will be saved through an instrument preset or power on If the occupied bandwidth measurement is active and the percent power is changed another sweep is taken and measured Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER integrates the power of the displayed and puts markers at the frequencies containing a selected percent of the power The measurement defaults to 99 of the occupied bandwidth power The power bandwidth routine Erst computes the combined power of all signal responses contained in the trace For 99 occupied power bandwidth it then puts markers at the frequencies at which 0 5 of the power lies to the right of the right marker and to the left of the left marker Thus 99 of the power lies between the markers The difference of the marker frequencies is the 99 power bandwidth and is the value displayed 6 102 WINDOWS Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions The GCC BW POWER softkey can be used to change the measured power value from 1 to 99 99 of the total displayed power The occupied bandwidth function also indicates the value of the measured p
82. implemented after the resolution bandwidth filtering and before the video filtering The displayed signal is a result of the decay time for the resolution bandwidth filters and is not an accurate representation of the input signal If the gate occurs at the beginning of the RF pulse signal or at the end of the RF pulse signal the signal displayed on the spectrum analyzer can be attenuated or contain transient signals caused by the spectrum analyzer see Figure 5 27 If this happens decrease the gate length and change the gate delay to place the gate output during the signal Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only B amp W PRINTER ro 3 PAINTJET dB PRINTER SWEEPTI ME 150 msec suunvnopsouansauensavervnsesvesessescese PRINTER eS ADDRESS EEE E EE co taeds ev agahaelcomba nein Mecacri ate eater sol nen Lite lt EE ASEET TEE AS eens E Oe bel ON OFF SA VB 5 y x SE FO Krani IET AET E OEE ents np ar nies PRINTER CORR a O SETUP 1 PREU Pa id ee es Bei tert N oe Nasal es el EE A MENU CENTER 50 00 MH SPAN 20 00 MHz RT RES BW 188 kHz VBW 100 kHz SWP 150 mce Figure 5 27 Gate is Occurring at the Beginning of the Pulse In Figure 5 27 the peak amplitude has not been reached and the transient response of the resolution bandwidth filters adds noise Table 5 4 and Table 5 5 provide the recommended in
83. in the nominal input impedance of the analyzer dBmV dB relative to 1 mV millivolt dBuV dB relative to 1 uV volts and in some analyzers watts update To make existing information current to bring information up to date upgrade To improve the quality or extend the capability of an instrument or product Enhancements to upgrade the product These enhancements can then be documented in an update package variable persistence A property of the display that allows the adjustment of the trace fade rate which is created by the display s electron beam It is a capability of purely analog displays which provides flicker free trace display regardless of sweep time Glossary 27 vector display The display type where the electron beam is directed so the image consisting of trace graticule and annotation is written directly onto the display face It is not created from a series of dots as with the raster display video A term describing the output of an analyzer s envelope detector The frequency range extends from 0 Hz to a frequency that is typically well beyond the widest resolution bandwidth available in the analyzer However the ultimate bandwidth of the video chain is determined by the setting of the video filter video amplifier A post detection dc coupled amplifier that drives the vertical deflection plates of the display Refer also to video bandwidth and video filter video average The digital averaging of analyz
84. indicates if the signal is being displayed at the wrong frequency Glossary 23 single sweep mode The analyzer sweeps once when trigger conditions are met Each sweep is initiated by pressing an appropriate front panel key or by sending a programming command sinusoid A wave whose electric field vector is proportional to the sine or cosine of an angle that is a linear function of tune or distance or both softkey Key labels displayed on a screen or monitor which are activated by mechanical keys surrounding the display or located on a keyboard Softkey selections usually evoke menus that are written into the program software Front panel key selections determine which menu set of softkeys appears on the display span Span equals the stop frequency minus the start frequency The span setting determines the horizontal axis scale of the analyzer display span accuracy The uncertainty of the indicated frequency separation of any two signals on the display spectral purity See noise sidebands spectral component One of the sine waves comprising a spectrum spectrum An array of sine waves differing in frequency and amplitude They are properly related with respect to phase and taken as a whole constitute a particular time domain signal Glossary 24 spectrum analyzer A device that effectively performs a Fourier transform and displays the individual spectral components sine waves that constitute a time domain sig
85. interval has been entered gate trigger position markers will be shown in the time domain window A ff indicates positive triggering A indicates negative triggering Front Panel Key Access SWEEP allows you to edit the current amplitude correction factors table by accessing the SELECT POINT SELECT FREQ SELECT AMPLITUD DELETE POINT Edit Done and PURGE AMP COA softkeys Front Panel Key Access Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information starts the DLP editor function and loads the highlighted item from the catalog of analyzer user memory to be displayed and edited It copies the item into the analyzer DLP editor memory which is a 2500 byte memory buffer If an item is edited the new edited version will not be overwritten in the analyzer user memory until it is processed by the SAVE EDIT softkey Front Panel Key Access or Edit Done EDIT DONE EDIT FLATNESS Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions can be accessed through both the amplitude correction menu and the change prefix menu When accessed from the amplitude correction menu the amplitude correction factors table is erased from the analyzer screen and the amplitude correction menu is restored on screen Use Edit Done when all the amplitude correction factors have been entered When accessed from the change pref
86. is connected to a Hewlett Packard printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page prior to formfeeding the page One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfeeding each printout NOTE To proceed with the three printouts per page format after printing one printout per page it is necessary to press PRINTER SETUP Pressing PRINTER SETUP resets the internal counter e Press EP MX80 SML LAG if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a MX 80 Epson or other compatible 9 pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will print two printouts to a page and will print softkey labels if desired See step 7 Pressing this key to underline LRG will print only one printout to a page and will not print the softkey labels 1 35 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting e Press EP LQ570 SML LRG if the spectrum analyzer is connected to a LQ 570 Epson or other compatible 24 pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will print two printouts to a page and will print softkey labels if desired See step 7 Pressing this key to underline LRG will print only one printout to a page and will not print the softkey labels 6 If you want the softkey labels to be printed with the spectrum analyzer display printout press PRT MENU ON OFF so that ON is underlined Note that this function does not work when EP MX80 SML LRG or EP LQ570 SML LRG are pressed to underline LRG
87. kHz 5 48 11 Since the gate length was not changed the video bandwidth is still 100 kHz Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Figure 5 25 shows the first pulsed RF signal contained in trace A and the second pulsed RF signal contained in trace B GATE LENGTH GATE DELA EQGE POL POS NEG PY OREO Va VB SO LED eno E E F E E E P AE TS E GATE CTL CORR i A s EDGE LVL E PREV a ada m PODON f N T lve tend MENU MHz SPAN 5 009 NHz 100 kHz VBW 100 kHz SWP 128 msec RT Figure 5 25 Viewing Both Signals with Time Gating 5 49 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Setting the Gate Delay and Gate Length Properly When NOT Using the Gate Utility If the gate delay and gate length are not set properly you may not be viewing an accurate representation of a signal For example If the gate does not occur during the RF pulsed signal the amplitude of the signal displayed on the spectrum analyzer is lower than the actual signal See Figure 5 26 CLEAR WRITE A MAX HOLD A VIEW A BLANK A T SPAN 20 00 MHz RES BW 180 kHz VBW 100 KHz SWP 158 mseo RT 50 08 MH Figure 5 26 Gate Not Occurring During the Pulse The time gate is
88. labels to be printed with the analyzer display printout when using COPY press PRT MENU ON OFF so that ON is underlined Press and the process will begin The screen remains frozen no further sweeps taken until the data transfer to the printer is complete The analyzer works with many Hewlett Packard and Epson compatible printers The plotting process is similar to the printing process On the analyzer press CONFIG Plot Conf ig Use BAUD RATE to change the baud rate of the analyzer if necessary For Option 021 use PLOTTER ADDRESS to change the HP IB address for the plotter if necessary With PLTS PG 1 2 4 you can choose a full page half page or quarter page plot Press PLTS PG 1 2 4 to underline the number of plots per page desired If two or four plots per page are chosen a softkey function is displayed that allows you to select the location of the plotter output on the paper If two plots per page are selected PLT LOC is displayed If four plots per page are selected PLT LOC _ m is displayed Press the softkey until the rectangular marker is in the desired section of the softkey label The upper and lower sections of the softkey label graphically represent the position of the page where the plotter output will be located 6 46 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions NOTE The HP 7470A Plotter does not support two plots per page output If you use an HP 7470A Plotte
89. length and edge trigger polarity no longer apply Using the One Button Measurements to Measure N dB Bandwidth Percent Amplitude Modulation and Third Order Intercept TOI The spectrum analyzer includes one button measurement functions With one key press they make accurate measurements of e N GB Bandwidth e Percent Amplitude Modulation e Third Order Inter modulation The signal or signals being measured must be displayed before activating the measurement Measurements are made continuously updating at the end of each sweep This allows you to make adjustments and see changes as they happen The single sweep mode can also be used providing time to study or record the data The individual measurements are described below N dB Bandwidth Measurement It is often necessary to measure a signal response s bandwidth such as when testing a band pass filter The signal to be measured must be centered on the display with a span that includes the full response Activate the measurement by turning the N dB PTS ON OFF key ON The spectrum analyzer places arrow markers at the 3 dB points on either side of the response and reads the bandwidth For other bandwidth responses enter the number of dB down desired from 1 dB to 80 dB No other signal can appear on the display within N dB of the highest signal The measured signal cannot have more than one peak that is greater than or equal to N dB A signal must have a peak greater than th
90. level 6 106 NOTE Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions When a peak has a lump on its skirt that is the peak excursion value above the threshold the lump is considered a peak in its own right only if it has a peak excursion drop on both sides Two peaks that are so close that only a valley divides them are not differentiated if the valley is not the peak excursion value deep Peak Menu PEAK SEARCH When the peak excursion value is less than 6 dB the marker peaking functions may not recognize signals less than 6 dB above the noise floor To correct this when measuring signals near the noise floor the excursion value can be reduced even further To prevent the marker from identifying noise as signals reduce the noise floor variance to a value less than the peak excursion value by reducing the video bandwidth or by using video averaging Front Panel Key Access peak search accesses the same softkeys that are available when peak SEARCH is pressed see the key description for PEAK starcu below Pressing Peak Menu instead of peak search allows you to use the peak search functions without initiating a new peak search Front Panel Key Access automatically places a marker on the highest amplitude of a trace displays the marker s amplitude and frequency It also accesses the menus of marker peak functions including the peak table functions 6 107 Spectrum Analyze
91. level value is set to the top of the screen and the bottom graticule becomes zero volts Each division of the graticule is one eighth of the reference level in volts Pressing SCALE LOG LIN always sets the units specified for the current amplitude scale Pressing PRESET or powering on the analyzer sets the default units Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE 6 126 SECAM L SELECT 1234 SELECT AMPLITUD SELECT DLT AMPL Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions triggers on the SECAM L video formats Pressing SECAM L alters the TV line number that the analyzer triggers on internally the line number displayed when TV LINE does not change Pressing SECAM L changes the video modulation to positive set TV SYNC MEG POS to NEG if negative video modulation is required Front Panel Key Access TRIG selects one of the four possible markers A marker can be turned on once it is selected A marker that has already been turned on will become active when it is selected If a marker has already been turned on and assigned to a specific trace it will become active on that trace and the MK TRACE AUTO ABC softkey will have the appropriate trace letter underlined Front Panel Key Access allows you to enter either the amplitude value for the displayed upper or lower limit line segment or the amplitude value for the current amplitude correction point Enter the amplitude value for the selected
92. limit line table and switch between frequency and time Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to be synchronized with the next cycle of the line voltage Front Panel Key Access TRIG displays any portion of the limit lines that are currently within the analyzer display boundary If Y yes is underlined the limit lines are displayed If N no is underlined they are not displayed If AUTO is underlined the display of the limit lines is dependent on LMT TEST The limit lines will be displayed while the limit test function is turned on otherwise they will be turned off Limit lines cannot be displayed while using the analog display mode Limit testing can be done but the limit lines will not be displayed Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions LMT TEST ON OFF LOAD FILE NOTE turns the limit line testing and if LMT DISP AUTO is selected turns the display of the limit lines on and off When limit line testing is enabled every measurement sweep of trace A is compared to the limit lines If trace A is at or within the bounds of the limit lines LIMIT PASS is displayed If trace A is out of the limit line boundaries LIMIT FAIL is displayed Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY loads a file from the memory card into analyzer memory When the memory card is selected pressing any of the catalog soft
93. math operations Front Panel Key Access TRACE_ Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions BAUD RATE BINARY SPAN BLANK A BLANK B BLANK C BLANK CARD sets the data transmission speed Also see the description for the key The baud rate is set to 1200 by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG Front Panel Key Access displays the output of the span DAC that is located on the AT Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL stores the amplitude data for trace A and removes it from the screen The trace A register will not be updated as the analyzer sweeps Front Panel Key Access TRACE stores the amplitude data for trace B and removes it from the screen The trace B register will not be updated as the analyzer sweeps Front Panel Key Access TRACE stores the amplitude data for trace C and removes it from the screen The trace C register will not be updated as the analyzer sweeps Front Panel Key Access TRACE deletes all the files from the memory card Pressing BLANK CARD displays the message If you are sure press key again to purge data Press BLANK CARD again if you want to delete all files from the memory card Front Panel Key Access CONFIG 6 20 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions activates the resolution bandwidth function and accesses the soft
94. may be changed to relative and one entered as relative may be changed to fixed When the limit line type is changed the frequency and amplitude values in the limit line table are modified by the current center frequency and reference level settings to keep the limit line in the same position on the cable TV analyzer Selecting the Limit Line Table Format Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions Press Edit Upper Edit Lower Edit Up Low or Edit Mid Delt to edit or create a limit line table Each of the edit softkeys represents a different type of limit line table format The choice of edit softkey depends upon whether you want an upper limit line only a lower limit line only or both an upper and a lower limit line If you want both lower limit lines then the characteristics of the limit lines being entered affect your choice of using the upper lower or mid delta functions The four limit line table formats are described below e The upper limit line table format is accessed by Edit Upper With the upper limit line table format the coordinates of only the upper limit line are displayed for editing lower limit line coordinates are not specified Even if lower limit line values exist or the values had been entered as an upper and lower limit line table the upper limit line values are treated as a separate table from the lower limit line values Upper limit line entries can have independent frequency and amplitud
95. mixers frequency resolution The ability of an analyzer to separate closely spaced spectral components and display them individually Resolution of equal amplitude components is determined by resolution bandwidth Resolution of unequal amplitude signals is determined by resolution bandwidth and bandwidth selectivity frequency response The peak to peak variation in the displayed signal amplitude over a specified center frequency range Frequency response is typically specified in terms of dB relative to the value midway between the extremes It also may be specified relative to the calibrator signal frequency span The magnitude of the displayed frequency component Span is represented by the horizontal axis of the display Generally frequency span is given as the total span across the full display Some analyzers represent frequency span scan width as a per division value frequency stability The stability of a frequency component to remain unchanged in frequency or amplitude over short and long term periods of time Stability refers to the local oscillator s ability to remain fixed at a particular frequency over time The sweep ramp that tunes the local oscillator influences where a signal appears on the display Any long term variation in local oscillator frequency drift with respect to the sweep ramp causes a signal to shift its horizontal position on the display slowly Shorter term local oscillator instability can appear as rand
96. normalized with respect to the display line even if the value of the display line is changed This function is executed on all subsequent sweeps until it is turned off A minus sign appears between the trace A status and the trace B status in the screen annotation while the function is active To turn off the normalize function press NORMLIZE ON OFF so that OFF is underlined The normalize function is useful for applying correction data to a trace For example store a measurement sweep of the response of a system in trace B Trace A can be used to measure the response of the system after a device is added Set NORMLIZE ON OFF to ON to subtract the system response from the response of the device under test to characterize the response of a device under test Front Panel Key Access TRACE displays the display line and makes the display line function active The trace data is normalized with respect to the display line even if the value of the display line is changed Front Panel Key Access TRACE 6 101 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions NTSC OCC BW Y POWER OCCUPIED BANDWDTH allows you to trigger on the NTSC video format Pressing NTSC alters the TV line number that the analyzer triggers on internally the line number displayed when TV LINE is pressed does not change Pressing NTSC changes the video modulation to negative set TV SYNC NEG POS so that POS is underlined
97. or powered off so the text being edited will not be lost Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE 6 125 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions SAVE LIMIT SCALE LOG LIN saves the current limit line tables in the current mass storage device analyzer memory or memory card To verify the current mass storage device press SAVE LIMIT If MAX REG appears on the analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press SAVE_ or RECALL then INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device Press SAVE LIMIT enter a register number then press to save the current limit line table in analyzer memory or on the memory card When saved on the memory card limit line tables are stored with 1 the prefix and the register number entered When saved in analyzer memory the register number is saved in a trace register Trace register values are restricted to a range between 0 and the number x indicated by MAX REG x Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY scales the vertical graticule divisions in logarithmic units when LOG is underlined When the SCALE LOG LIN function is the active function the logarithmic units per division can be changed Values may range from 0 1 to 20 dB per division When LIN is underlined the vertical scale is in linear mode which has a range of 1 kW to 1 pW The reference
98. placed anywhere along the trace A readout indicates the relative frequency separation and amplitude difference between the reference and active markers Glossary 6 detector mode The manner in which analog video information is processed prior to being digitized and stored in memory Refer also to negative peak positive peak quasi peak detector rose n fell and sample digital display A display that uses vectors drawn between a series of data points analog video that are first digitized and stored in memory then displayed The number of stored data points is a function of the particular analyzer The displayed information is refreshed old data points are replaced with new data points stored in memory at a flicker free rate The data in memory is updated at the sweep rate of the analyzer display dynamic range The maximum dynamic range over which both the larger and smaller signal can be viewed simultaneously on the display For analyzers with a maximum logarithmic display of 10 dB division the actual dynamic range may be greater than the display dynamic range Refer also to dynamic range display fidelity The measurement uncertainty of relative differences in amplitude on an analyzer On purely analog analyzers those analyzers that display trace information immediately and do not store then recall the data to the screen these differences are displayed on the screen and the graticule is used to evaluate the measurement Many an
99. reset of the peak detector on the A16 Processor Video assembly after each analog to digital conversion This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL activates an adjustable horizontal line that is used as a visual reference line The line which can be used for trace arithmetic has amplitude values that correspond to its vertical position when compared to the reference level The value of the display line appears in the active function block and on the left side of the screen The display line can be adjusted using the step keys knob or numeric keypad Pressing any digit 0 through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu To deactivate the display line press DSP LINE ON OFF so that OFF is underlined Also see the VIDEO softkey description Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY MKR FCTN or PEAK SEARCH sets the dwell time for the marker pause during which demodulation can take place in nonzero span sweeps The dwell time can be set from 2 milliseconds to 100 seconds Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL 6 57 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions EDGE POL POS NEG Edit Amp Cor EDIT CAT ITEM determines whether the gate triggers on the positive going or negative going edge of the signal at the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector on the rear panel of the analyzer If the gate utility is used and a pulse repetition
100. signal amplitudes accurately because it may not find the true peak of the signal Video averaging clarifies low level signals in wide bandwidths by averaging the signal and the noise As the spectrum analyzer takes sweeps you can watch video averaging smooth the trace 1 Position a low level signal on the spectrum analyzer screen 2 Press TRACE More 1 of 3 then VID AVG ON OFF When ON is underlined the video averaging routine is initiated As the averaging routine smooths the trace low level signals become more visible VID AVG 100 appears in the active function block The number represents the number of samples or sweeps taken to complete the averaging routine 4 28 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring low level Signals Using Attenuation Video Bandwidth and Video Averaging 3 To set the number of samples use the number units keypad For example press VID AVG ON OFF so that ON is underlined 25 Hz Turn video averaging off and on again by pressing VID AVG ON OFF OFF VID AVG ON OFF ON The number of samples equals the number of sweeps in the averaging routine During averaging the current sample appears at the left side of the graticule Changes in active functions settings such as the center frequency or reference level will restart the sampling The sampling will also restart if video averaging is turned off and then on again Once the set number of sweeps has been complete
101. source attenuation 0 REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 dB Enc ew PEAK ON OFF LOG 10 T r dB TRACKING PEAK MAN TRK AQJUST PWR SWP po ON OFF WA SB SC FC SRC ATN CORA MAN AUTO More i 1of2 CENTER 900 MHz SPAN 1 800 GHz RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 36 0 msec Figure 5 5 Tracking Generator Output Power Activated 5 16 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Stimulus Response Measurements 4 Put the sweep time of the analyzer into stimulus response auto coupled mode by pressing More 1 of 2 then SWP CPLG SR SA until SR stimulus response mode is underlined Auto coupled sweep times are usually much faster for swept response measurements than they are for spectrum analyzer measurements NOTE In the stimulus response mode the Q reactance versus resistance of the OUT can determine the fastest rate at which the spectrum analyzer can be swept To determine whether the analyzer is sweeping too fast slow the sweep time and note whether there is a frequency or amplitude shift of the trace Continue to slow the sweep time until there is no longer a frequency or amplitude shift ip REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 dB PEAK SPAN 500 0 MHz JENTER 350 0 MHz SPAN 500 0 MHz AES BW 3 0 MHZ VBW 1 MHz SwP 20 0 msec Figure 5 6 Spectrum Analyzer Settings According to the Measurement Requirement
102. span is automatically set to be three times the channel spacing value The center frequency step size is automatically set to be equal to the channel spacing Press Previous Menu to return to the main power menu 5 Press OCCUPIED BANDWDTH to activate the function Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements 4 REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 dB SINGLE SMPL foccudren gw 94 00 MEAS LOG OBW 26 55 kHz 10 dB Pwr 46 1 dBnjv CONT MEAS CENTER FREQ occ Bw POWER Setup Previous Menu CENTER 825 03000 MHz SPAN 90 00 KHZ AES BW 1 0 KHz VBW 10 kHz SwP 300 msec Figure 5 35 Occupied Bandwidth 6 If you want to change the percent power value press the OCC BW POWER key and use the knob or the data entry keys to change the calculated percent power Press Previous Menu Press MEAS OFF to turn the measurement off and exit the power menu or press another measurement key to stop the current measurement and start a new measurement NOTE If the power menus have been exited without turning the power measurement off by pressing another front panel key press the MEAS USER key twice to return to the last power menu used 5 69 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements Adjacent Channel Power Ratio
103. the frequency and amplitude of the marker will appear in the active function area do p Increase the counter resolution by pressing More 1 of 2 CNT RES AUTO MAN and then entering the desired resolution using the step keys or the number units keypad For example press 1 kHz The marker counter readout is in the upper right corner of the screen The resolution can be set from 10 Hz to 100 kHz 4 The marker counter remains on until turned off Turn off the marker counter by pressing MKR FCTN then MK COUNT ON OFF until OFF is underlined MARKER ALL OFF also turns the marker counter off 4 9 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Increasing the Frequency Readout Resolution Using the Marker Counter 13 42 36 JUL 29 1993 CNTR 300 000 MHz REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 GB 27 58 dBmv CNT RESOLN 1 kHz CENTER 300 0 MHz SPAN 100 0 MHz TABLE ADL NAM AUTO MAN DSP LINE ON OFF More 2eafe RES BW 1 0 MHz VBW 300 KHz SWP 75 0 msec Figure 4 6 Using the Marker Counter Decreasing the Frequency Span Using the Marker Track Function Using the spectrum analyzer s marker track function you can quickly decrease the span while keeping the signal at center frequency Example Examine a carrier signal in a 200 kHz span 1 Press PRESET tune to a carrier signal and place a marker at the peak If you are using the CAL OUT signal place the m
104. the horizontal placement of the signal on the screen Changing the reference level changes the vertical placement of the signal on the screen Increasing the span increases the frequency range that appears horizontally on the screen A CENTER j FREQUENCY TUDE REFERENCE LEVEL FREQUENCY pui19c Figure 2 5 Relationship between Frequency and Amplitude Getting Started Making a Measurement 7 Set the marker You can place a diamond shaped marker on the signal peak to find the signal s frequency and amplitude To activate a marker press the key located in the MARKER section of the front panel The MARKER NORMAL label appears in inverse video to show that the marker is the active function Turn the knob to place the marker at the signal peak You can also use the PEAK search key which automatically places a marker at the highest point on the trace Readouts of marker amplitude and frequency appear in the active function block and in the upper right corner of the display Look at the marker readout to determine the amplitude of the signal If another function is activated the frequency and amplitude can still be identified by looking at the marker readout in the upper right corner of the screen Measurement Summary Connect the cable TV analyzer CAL OUT to the INPUT 75 and press the PRESET key Set the center frequency by pressing the following keys FREQUENCY 300 MHz
105. the marker to a signal of interest 4 Press AUX CTRL Demod DEMOD ON OFF so that ON is underlined and DEMOD AM FM so that FM is underlined SPEAKER ON OFF is set to ON by the preset function Use the front panel volume control to control the speaker s volume 5 The signal is demodulated at the marker s position for the duration of the dwell time Use the step keys knob or number units keypad to change the dwell time For example press the step up key Cj twice to increase the dwell time to 2 seconds 6 The peak search functions can be used to move the marker to other signals of interest Press PEAK SEARCH to access NEXT PEAK NEXT PK RIGHT or NEXT PK LEFT Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Demodulating and listening to an AM or FM Signal MKA 104 95 MHz REF 48 9 dBmy AT 10 oB 14 31 dBmv PEAK LOG 10 dB WA SB sc FC CORR l ine START 88 00 MHz STOP 108 00 MHz RES BW 100 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 75 0 mse Figure 5 11 Demodulation of an FM Signal Example The signal can be continuously demodulated if the spectrum analyzer is in zero span 1 Place the marker on a signal of interest as in steps 1 through 3 of the previous example If the signal of interest is the highest amplitude on screen signal set the frequency of the signal to center frequency by pressing then MK TRACK ON OFF ON If it is no
106. the trace or state registers press SAV LOCK ON OFF so that OFF is underlined For remote operation use PSTATE OFF U INVALID ACTDEF The specified ACTDEF name is not valid See the ACTDEF programming command U INVALID AMPCOR FREQ For the AMPCOR command the frequency data must be entered in increasing order See the description for the AMPCOR programming command for more information U INVALID BLOCK FORMAT IF STATEMENT An invalid block format appeared within the IF statement See the description for the IF THEN ELSE ENDIF programming command for more information U INVALID CARD Indicates one of the following conditions a card reader is not installed the memory card is write protected check the position of the switch on the memory card the memory card is a read only memory ROM card or a memory card has not been inserted INVALID CARD BAD MEDIA Indicates the formatting routine FORMAT CARD for the memory card could not be completed See the description for INVALID CARD above for more information about the possible causes of this message U and H INVALID CARD DATA ERROR Indicates the data could not be retrieved from the memory card U and H If You Have a Problem Error Messages INVALID CARD DIRECTORY Indicates the memory card has not been formatted U INVALID CARD NO CARD Indicates a memory card has not been inserted LJ INVALID CARD TYPE Indicates one of the following cond
107. to List the Displayed Signals The peak table function can be used to list the amplitude and frequency of up to 10 of the signals being displayed This is done by pressing a single key without having to put a marker on each signal Multiple signals from components such as oscillators and mixers or from surveillance are automatically identified and listed The information is updated at the end of each sweep The peak table display can easily be copied to a printer It is often helpful to have the cable TV analyzer sort the signals The peak table feature marks and list the signals based on the criteria selected The signals can be sorted by increasing frequency or decreasing amplitude The peak table function can be set to select all of the displayed signals or only those signals above or below a specified display line Note that a signal must have a peak of at least 6 dB to be recognized by the peak table function This value can be changed using the peak excursion function pe 57 39 JUL 29 1993 REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 dB Freq MHz Amplitude Pk Freq MHz Amplitude 5 37 60 dBmv 6 1796 11 26 dBmv 306 28 43 dBmv 7 1202 10 93 dBmv 503 20 34 dBmv 8 905 19 14 dBmv 9 1499 15 66 dBmY 10 CENTEA 900 MHz SPAN 1 800 GHZ RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHZ SWP 36 0 msec Figure 3 2 Peak Table Display 3 6 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Use the Peak Table to List the Displayed
108. to reduce static electricity Wrap the instrument several times in the material to both protect the instrument and prevent it from moving in the carton 5 Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive tape 6 Mark the shipping container FRAGILE HANDLE WITH CARE to ensure careful handling Retain copies of all shipping papers 8 13 Error Messages The cable TV analyzer can generate various messages that appear on its screen during operation to indicate a problem There are three types of messages hardware error messages H user created error messages U and informational messages M e Hardware error messages indicate the cable TV analyzer hardware is probably broken Refer to Chapter 8 for more information User created error messages appear when the cable TV analyzer is used incorrectly They are usually generated during remote operation entering programming commands using either a controller or the external keyboard Informational messages provide information indicating the cable TV analyzer progress within a specific procedure The messages are listed in alphabetical order on the following pages each message is defined and its type is indicated by an H U or M If You Have a Problem Error Messages ADC 2V FAIL Indicates a hardware failure H ADC GND FAIL Indicates a hardware failure H ADC TIME FAIL Indicates a hardware failure H and U CAL _ During
109. trace in the clear write mode in the order of trace A then trace B then trace C If no traces are currently being written it will select a trace in the view store mode again in the order of trace A B then C Front Panel Key Access moves the signal that is nearest to the active marker to the center of the screen and keeps the signal there MKR TRK or CNTR TRK appears in the upper right corner of the display An may appear in the upper right corner of the display while the analyzer is verifying that it has the correct signal Pressing MK TRACK ON OFF PRESET MARKER NORMAL or MARKER ALL OFF turns off the marker track function When marker track is on and the span is reduced an automatic zoom is performed the span is reduced in steps so that the signal remains at the center of the screen If the span is zero marker track cannot be activated Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions MKR MKR FCTN MNOPQR accesses the marker control softkeys which select the type and number of markers and turn them on and off Markers are diamond shaped characters that identify points of traces and allow the traces to be manipulated and controlled on the screen During manual operation four markers may appear on the display simultaneously only one can be controlled at a time The marker that is controlled is called the active marker Pressing activates th
110. tracking generator forms a stimulus response measurement system With the tracking generator as the swept source and the spectrum analyzer as the receiver operation is analogous to a single channel scalar network analyzer A narrow band system has a wide dynamic measurement range but the tracking generator s output frequency must be made to precisely track the spectrum analyzer s input frequency This wide dynamic range will be illustrated in the following example Figure 5 3 shows the block diagram of a spectrum analyzer and tracking generator system Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Stimulus Response Measurements SPECTRUM ANALYZER creverecnneentetaneeneneseecnnen Figure 5 3 Block Diagram of a Spectrum Analyzer Tracking Generator Measurement System Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Stimulus Response Measurements Using a Spectrum Analyzer With a Tracking Generator The procedure below describes how to use the built in tracking generator system of the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer equipped with Option 011 to measure the rejection of a low pass filter which is a type of transmission measurement Illustrated in this example are the functions in the tracking generator menu such as adjusting the tracking generator output power source calibration and normalization Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Stimulus Response Measurements Stepping through the Measu
111. values of amplitude level differences consider the filter skirts between the 3 dB and 60 dB points to be approximately straight In this case we simply used the 60 dB value U4 MKA 306 910 MHz REF 23 7 dBm ATTEN 10 dB 23 87 dBm PEAK LOG 10 dB RES BW 3 kHz WA SB sc FC CORR CENT AROG 0139 kHz VBW 3B kHz SPASWP 028 mMHz Figure 4 5 Signal Resolution with a 30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth 4 8 Increasing the Frequency Readout Resolution Using the Marker Counter The marker counter increases the resolution and accuracy of frequency readout When using the marker count function if the bandwidth to span ratio is too small less than O Ol the Reduce Span message appears on the display If Widen RES BW is displayed it indicates that the resolution bandwidth is too narrow If the signal being counted is the largest signal within the 300 Hz bandwidth then the count will be correct If there is another larger signal even off the display the count will be for the larger signal Example Increase the resolution and accuracy of the frequency readout on the signal of interest 1 Place a marker on the signal of interest If you are using the CAL OUT signal place the marker on the 300 MHz calibration signal Press Frequency 300 MHz 100 MHz and_ PEAK SEARCH Press MKR FCTN then MK COUNT ON OFF ON should be underlined to turn the marker counter on COUNTER and
112. visibility of the signal Reducing video bandwidths requires slower sweep times to keep the spectrum analyzer calibrated Using the video bandwidth function measure the amplitude of a low level signal 1 As in the first example connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input Set the spectrum analyzer to view a low level signal 2 Narrow the video bandwidth by pressing Bw VID BW AUTO MAN and the step down key J_ This clarifies the signal by smoothing the noise which allows better measurement of the signal amplitude A mark appears next to the VBW annotation at the bottom of the screen indicating that the video bandwidth is not coupled to the resolution bandwidth Instrument preset conditions couple the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth so that the video bandwidth is equal to or narrower than the resolution bandwidth If the bandwidths are uncoupled when video bandwidth is the active function pressing VID BW AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined recouples the bandwidths See Figure 4 18 4 26 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring low level Signals Using Attenuation Video Bandwidth and Video Averaging NOTE The video bandwidth must be set wider than the resolution bandwidth when measuring impulse noise levels 10 31 33 JUL 30 1993 K4 MKR 100 15 MHZ REF AT 1048 2 84 d8m RES BW PE
113. you to change the numeric value of an active function 12 INPUT 75 Q is the signal input for the cable TV analyzer Excessive signal input will damage the cable TV analyzer input attenuator and input mixer Use extreme caution when using the cable TV analyzer around high power RF sources and transmitters The maximum input power that the cable TV analyzer can tolerate appears on the front panel and should not be exceeded Excessive dc voltage can also damage the input attenuator For your particular instrument note the maximum dc voltage that should not be exceeded on the cable TV analyzer front panel beneath the INPUT 75 Q connector 13 PROBE PWR provides power for high impedance ac probes or other accessories 14 CAL OUT provides a calibration signal of 300 MHz at 29 dBmV 15 VOL INTEN The VOL INTEN knob changes the brightness of the display and the volume of the internal speaker The inside part of the knob adjusts the intensity while the outside part adjusts the volume 16 TV_IN Provides the input for the built in Television tuner Option 107 17 Memory card reader reads from or writes to a memory card 2 5 CAUTION Getting Started Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer If the tracking generator output power is too high it may damage the device under test Do not exceed the maximum power that the device under test can tolerate 18 RF OUT 75 Q supplies a source output for the built in tracking generator For Option 01
114. 0 MHz SPAN 200 0 MHZ RES BW 1 0 MHZ VBW 300 KHZ SWP 20 0 msec Figure 4 21 RF Attenuation of 10 dB 6 Compare the response in trace A to the response in trace B If the distortion product decreases as the attenuation increases distortion products are caused by the spectrum analyzer s input mixer The change in the distortion product is shown by the marker delta value The high level signals causing the overload conditions must be attenuated to eliminate the interference caused by the internal distortion 4 32 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Identifying Distortion Products Using the RF Attenuator and Traces If the responses in trace A and trace B differ as in Figure 4 2 1 then attenuation is required If there is no change in the signal level the distortion is not caused internally For example the signal amplitude in Figure 4 22 is not high enough to cause internal distortion in the spectrum analyzer so any distortion that is displayed is present on the input signal 15 42 47 AUG 26 1993 REF 38 8 oBmv AT 10 GB PEAK LOG 10 dB ATTEN AUTO MAN REF LVL SCALE LOG LIN INT AMP ON OFF CENTER 400 0 MHz SPAN 200 0 MHZ RES BW 1 0 MHZ VBW 300 KHz SwP 20 0 msec Figure 4 22 No Harmonic Distortion 4 33 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Identifying Distortion Products Using the RF Attenuator and Traces Th
115. 07 only Table 5 5 Sweep Time Settings Pulse Repetition Pulse Repetition Sweep Time minimum Interval PRI Frequency PRF 21 ms gt S41 Se iS A aA a a a n aa naana an 4 Hz 100 gt 249 ms Use the MAX HOLD trace function and take several measurement sweens 53 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Using the Self Calibration Routines with Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Option 107 The spectrum analyzer s self calibration routines initiated by pressing CAL AMPTD or CAL FREQ amp AMPTD should be performed prior to using the time gated spectrum analyzer capability functions Use the following procedure to perform the self calibration routines and to check the results of the self calibration routines NOTE Be sure that the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector on the spectrum analyzer s rear panel is not connected to anything while performing the spectrum analyzer s self calibration routines jam Remove the cable from the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector 2 Connect the CAL OUT connector to the spectrum analyzer input connector with the calibration cable Press CAL Press either CAL FREQ amp AMPTD to perform the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines or CAL AMPTD to perform the amplitude self calibration routine W 4 When the self calibr
116. 1 the output frequency range of the cable TV analyzer is 1 MHz to 1 8 GHz 19 turns the instrument on and off An instrument self check is performed every time the instrument is turned on After applying power allow the temperature of the instrument to stabilize for best measurement results Note that the instrument continues to draw power when it is plugged into the ac power source even if the line power switch is off 2 6 Getting Started Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer Rear Panel Features EARPHONE 1G GATE TRIG GATE T INAUT GUTPU OWO A iN A p VOLTAGE SELECTOR Au HIGH SNEEP T N outPuT output OE MONITOR EXT TRIG AUX INTERFACE OUTPUT Ye vaoaro 4 pu123c Figure 2 2 Rear Panel Feature Overview l EXT ALC INPUT allows the use of an external detector or power meter for automatic leveling control of the tracking generator For Option 011 only 2 TV TRIG OUTPUT TTL provides TV trigger output using TTL and negative edge triggering Standard except f or Option 701 3 GATE TRIGGER INPUT TTL accepts a TTL signal which acts as the gate trigger In edge mode the trigger event positive or negative edge initiates a gate delay In level mode the gate trigger input signal opens 2 7 CAUTION Getting Started Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer and closes the gate directly TTL high sets the gate on TTL low sets the gate
117. 123 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions accesses softkey menus that allow you to store state data trace data limit line tables and amplitude correction factors on a memory card or in analyzer memory The SAVE function also allows you to save state data trace data limit line tables amplitude correction factors and program data on the memory card In addition pressing accesses the softkey menus used to catalog the saved data in analyzer memory or on the memory card To save to or catalog from analyzer memory press INTERNAL CARD so that INTERNAL is underlined To save to or catalog from the memory card press INTERNAL CARD so that CARD is underlined Saving state data saves the analyzer settings but not the trace data Saving trace data saves both the trace data and the state data Display images and programs also called downloadable programs or DLPs can only be saved to or recalled from the memory card States and traces are saved in analyzer memory even if the instrument is turned off or PRESET_ is pressed Eight analyzer memory state registers and many trace registers are available for the user The Catalog Internal softkey is used to access the catalog functions It also accesses the DLP editor utility 6 124 SAVE AMP COR SAVE EDIT Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions saves the current amplitude correction factors table to th
118. 2 8 voltage selector switch 1 8 Volts 6 154 volume control 2 5 W warmup 1 14 warmup time 2 21 Watts 6 154 when self calibration is needed 2 26 windows NEXT 6 100 ON 6 103 switching between 6 100 switching time and frequency windows 6 150 using 3 54 56 ZOOM 6 156 windows keys 2 5 WINDOWS OFF 6 154 write protect switch 2 29 Index 33 X X FINE TUNE DAC 6 5 6 154 Y YZ_ Spe Clear 6 154 7 ZERO MARKER 6 154 ZERO SPAN 4 11 6 154 ZONE CENTER 6 155 ZONE PK LEFT 6 155 ZONE PK RIGHT 6 156 ZONE SPAN 6 156 ZOOM 6 156 zooming a window 6 156 Index 34
119. 23 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring Low Level Signals Using Attenuation Video Bandwidth and Video Averaging 6 Press AMPLITUDE ATTEN AUTO MAN Press the step up key CT once to select 20 dB attenuation Increasing the attenuation moves the noise floor closer to the signal A mark appears next to the AT annotation at the top of the display indicating the attenuation is no longer coupled to other spectrum analyzer settings 7 To see the signal more clearly press 0 BmV Zero attenuation makes the signal more visible As a precaution to protect the spectrum analyzer s input mixer 0 dB RF attenuation can be selected only with the number units keypad 44 50 13 JUL 29 1993 LA MKR 100 15 MHZ REF 38 8 dBmv AT O dB 2 20 dBmv PEAK LOG 4B AUTO MAN REF LVL ATTEN SCALE LOG LIN WA St sc Ft CORT More 1 of 2 CENTER 100 15 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHZ RES BW 100 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 20 0 msec Figure 4 16 Using 0 dB Attenuation Before connecting other signals to the spectrum analyzer input increase the RF attenuation to protect the spectrum analyzer s input mixer press ATTEN AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined or press auro courre and AUTO ALL 4 24 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring low level Signals Using Attenuation Video Bandwidth and Video Averaging Example The re
120. 3 limit line functions 3 39 48 limit lines 3 33 amplitude coordinate 3 44 cataloging 6 30 creating 3 34 3 38 delete segment 6 53 displaying 3 48 6 85 edit done 6 59 editing 3 37 edit lower table 6 60 edit mid delta amplitude 6 61 edit table 6 60 edit upper and lower tables 6 62 edit upper table 6 62 fixed 3 40 fixed and relative 6 83 flat type 6 73 frequency or time 3 40 frequency or time coordinate 3 44 point 6 110 purge 6 118 recall table 6 121 relative 3 40 save table 6 126 segment number 3 43 SEGMENT TYPE 3 46 select amplitude 6 127 select delta amplitude 6 127 select frequency 6 128 select frequency or time 6 85 select lower amplitude 6 128 select middle amplitude 6 128 select segment 6 129 select time 6 130 select type 6 130 select upper amplitude 6 130 slope type 6 135 table format 3 41 table type 3 40 testing 3 48 6 86 upper and lower 3 49 using RECALL LIMIT 3 48 Index 16 using SAVE LIMIT 3 48 Limit Lines 6 83 LIMIT LINES 3 39 6 83 LIMIT PASS 3 33 LIMITS FIX REL 3 36 3 40 6 83 LIMITS FRQ TIME 3 35 3 40 6 85 LINE 6 85 linear scale 6 126 LINE front panel key 2 6 LINE switch 2 6 line voltage selector switch 1 8 list of markers 6 96 marker table 3 4 list of peaks 6 109 peak table 3 6 LMT DISP Y N AUTO 3 48 6 85 LMT TEST ON OFF 3 38 3 48 6 86 LOAD FILE 6 86 LOCAL 6 44 G87CAL local operation 6 44 6 87 lock internal state and tr
121. 4 3 63 6 128 SELECT LWR AMPL 3 45 6 128 SELECT MID AMPL 3 45 6 128 SELECT POINT 3 61 6 129 SELECT PREFIX 6 129 SELECT SEGMENT 3 43 6 129 SELECT TIME 6 130 SELECT TYPE 6 130 SELECT UPR AMPL 3 45 6 130 self calibration routine CAL TRK GEN 1 15 self calibration routines 1 13 2 21 26 amplitude 6 2 1 CAL 6 21 correction factors 6 21 frequency 6 22 frequency and amplitude 6 22 tracking generator 6 22 sensitivity spectrum analyzer 4 22 Service Cal 6 3 6 131 Service Diag 6 4 6 131 service documentation Option 915 9 6 service functions 6 3 Service Cal 6 3 Service Diag 6 4 SET ATTN ERROR 6 3 6 131 Set B amp amp W Printer 6 131 Set Color printer 6 131 SET DATE 6 132 SET TIME 6 132 setting gate delay 5 50 setting gate length 5 50 setting the amplitude 2 17 setting the center frequency 2 17 setting the marker 2 19 setting the span 2 17 setup power measurement functions 6 132 printer 6 117 SGL SWP 6 132 Index 27 SHOW OPTIONS 6 133 signal comparison 4 18 SIGNAL ID 6 133 signal peak highest 6 135 signal tracking 4 11 6 108 See also marker tracking SINGLE FFT 6 134 SINGLE MEAS 6 134 single sweep 6 132 6 139 SLOPE 3 46 6 135 softkey label 2 4 softkey locations 7 2 softkey overview 2 16 softkeys 2 4 source power 6 137 space character 6 154 span 0 Hz 6 154 LAST SPAN 6 83 window zone 6 156 SPAN 2 4 2 17 6 135 SPAN ZOOM 4 13 6 135 SPEAKER
122. 50 MHz 47 dBmV 39 dBmV On On Frequency Amplitude Pulse Modulation 5 42 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only 1 Set the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer to the frequency of the modulated signal Decrease the frequency span of the spectrum analyzer If necessary adjust the reference level of the spectrum analyzer so that the peak signal is displayed near the top graticule CENTER 50 000 MHz SPAN 5 000 MHz RES BW 30 kHz VBW 32 kHz SWP 20 nsec Figure 5 20 Setting the Center Frequency Span and Reference level NOTE The Gate Utility can be used to simplify the following steps See Chapter 6 for descriptions of the gate utility softkeys 5 43 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only 2 Set the sweep time to be 401 times greater than the pulse repetition interval For this example the pulse repetition interval is 280 ps so the sweep time is set to greater than 401 times 280 ys or 0 112 s For this example we are using a sweep time of 120 milliseconds Press SWEEP 120 ms PEAK LOG 18 dB SWEEPTIME 128 msec VA SB SC FC CORR CENTER 50 000 MHz SPAN 5 000 RES BW 38 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 120 Figure 5 21 Setting the Sweep Time 5 44 ENF TINE AUTO M
123. 6 Press AM ON OFF OFF to turn the measurement off Third Order Intermodulation Measurement TOD Use the TOI one button measurement to make quick and easy inter modulation measurements of microwave spectrum analyzers mixers or converters When the TOI measurement is turned on there must be four signals on the display two test signals and their two associated distortion products All of the signals must have peaks greater than the peak excursion value The default value for the peak excursion is 6 dB The two highest amplitude signals are assumed to be the test signals for the third order intercept measurement The spectrum analyzer computes and displays the third order intercept TOD of the displayed signals marking all four signals with arrows to confirm the correct signal selection The measurement updates at the end of every sweep which enables real time optimization of devices or systems under test The third order inter modulation is calculated as follows 2 x Amplsignal AL Ampl distortion product A Amplsignal B 2 where the frequency of distortion product A is TOI Freqdistortion producta 22 Freqsignal a T Freqsignal B Third Order Intercept Third order intercept is defined as the absolute power level at which the third order distortion products intercept the level of two equal level test signals If the distortion products are due to true third order distortion then the measurement result will be independe
124. 6 125 save current display 6 56 save current state memory card 6 137 state register 6 138 saved analyzer state 6 82 SAVE EDIT 6 125 SAVE LIMIT 6 126 save lock on MEM LOCKED 6 95 saving a display image on the memory card 3 24 saving a limit line table into analyzer memory 3 12 saving amplitude correction factors into analyzer memory 3 12 saving amplitude correction factors on the memory card 3 26 saving and recalling data from analyzer memory 3 8 15 saving and recalling data from the memory card 3 15 32 saving and recalling programs with a memory card 3 28 saving a program on the memory card 3 29 saving a state into analyzer memory 3 8 saving a state on the memory card 3 20 saving a trace into analyzer memory 3 10 saving a trace on the memory card 3 22 saving DLPs from analyzer memory to card 6 12 saving key definitions from analyzer memory to card 6 12 saving limit line tables on the memory card 3 26 saving to a memory card 6 146 saving to analyzer memory 6 147 SAV LOCK ON OFF 3 13 6 123 SCALE LOG LIN 6 126 screen annotation 2 13 16 on or off 6 16 screen characters 6 79 6 98 6 138 6 154 screen data output 6 45 screen graticule 6 80 screen title 6 36 characters 6 9 clearing 6 39 Index 26 RPG TITLE 6 123 screen title using an external keyboard 3 68 SECAM L 6 127 segment deletion 6 53 SELECT 1 2 3 4 6 127 SELECT AMPLITUD 3 44 3 63 6 127 SELECT DLT AMPL 3 45 6 127 SELECT FREQ 3 4
125. 721A cable TV RF video measurements personality are described in the HP 8597C Cable TV Analyzer Cable TV Measurements User s Guide 7 2 Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions REF Lvi gt ATTEN AUTO MAN SCALE LOG LIN INT AMP ON OFF MAXMXR EVI Amptd Units EXTERNAL PREAMPG 34 INPUT Z 500 752 Watts REF LVL OFFSET Previous Menu More 2 of 3 More 1 of 3 m After selecting this softkey pressing any digit O through 9 brings up the appropriate ampli tude terminotor menu ONE EXAMPLE OF HOW TO ACCESS THE TERMINATOR MENUS PRESS THIS 43 ACTIVE then PRESS ANY DIGIT i AMPL I TUDE SOFTKEY FUNCTION o ME 39 TERMINATOR Ei MENU THIS FOOTNOTE APPEARS IN MENU TREES TO EXPLAIN THIS PROCESS 34 After selecting this softkey pressing any digit O through 9 brings up the appropriate ompli tude terminator menu pulS2de 7 3 Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions AUTO COUPLE AUTO ALL RES BW AUTO MAN VID BW AUTO MAN ATTEN AUTO MAN SWP TIME AUTO MAN CF STEP AUTO MAN DEMOD ON OFF DEMOD AM FM SPEAKER ON OFF Demod 2 SQUELCH Track Gen Aux Conn Control FM GAIN Monitor TV DWELL TINE SRC PWR STP SIZE 2 FORMFEED gt PRINTER SRC PWR OFFSET 2 ALC MTR INT XTAL SWP CPLG SR SA 2 SRC PWR ON OFF 2 34 TRACKING PEAK MAN TRK ADJUST PWR SWP ON OFF SRC ATN MAN AUTO More 1 of 2 More 2 of 2 2 CHANNEL SELECT PICTURE ON OFF SOUND ON OF
126. 9 Aux Conn Control 6 19 AUX CTRL 6 19 AUX IF OUTPUT 2 9 auxiliary connector input 6 56 auxiliary interface connector 6 19 control line A 6 43 control line B 6 43 control line C 6 43 control line D 6 43 AUX INTERFACE 2 8 AUX VIDEO OUTPUT 2 9 available memory 6 29 B C 6 19 B lt gt C 6 19 B DL B 6 19 bandwidth measurement 5 59 bandwidth functions 6 2 1 bandwidth measurement 6 99 bandwidth ratio video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth 6 151 battery See analyzer battery memory card changing the battery 2 28 BAUD RATE 6 20 BINARY SPAN 6 4 6 20 black and white printing 6 81 BLANK A 6 20 BLANK B 6 20 BLANK C 6 20 BLANK CARD 3 18 6 20 built in tracking generator 6 147 BW 6 21 Index 5 C cable TV analyzer error messages 8 14 CAL 2 21 6 21 CAL AMPTD 1 13 2 22 6 21 CAL FETCH 2 22 6 21 CAL FREQ 1 13 2 22 6 22 CAL FREQ amp AMPTD 1 14 2 21 6 22 calibration 6 21 attenuator error factors 6 131 self calibration routines 2 21 CAL OUT 2 5 CAL STORE 1 15 2 22 6 22 CAL TIMEBASE 6 3 6 22 CAL TRK GEN 1 15 1 16 2 24 6 22 card changing the battery 2 28 inserting a memory card 2 27 Card Config 6 23 CARD DISPLAY 6 23 CARD DLP 6 24 CARD STATE 6 24 Card Trace 6 25 care memory 9 9 CATALOG ALL 6 25 CATALOG AMP COR 6 26 Catalog Card 3 18 6 26 CATALOG DISPLAY 6 28 CATALOG DLP 6 28 Catalog Internal 6 28 CATALOG LMT LINE 6 30 CATAL
127. 9320 Pruneridge Avenue 301 E Evelyn 1421 South Manhattan Ave 24 Inverness Place East Cupertino CA 95014 USA Mountain View CA 94041 Fullerton CA 92631 Englewood CO 80112 18001 752 0900 415 6942000 17141 999 6700 303 6495000 Georgia Illinois New Jersey Texas Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co 2000 South Park Place 5201 Tollview Drive 150 Green Pond Road 930 E Campbell Rd Atlanta GA 30339 Rolling Meadows IL 60008 Rockaway NJ 07866 Richardson TX 75061 14041 955 1500 708 255 9800 201 627 6400 214 231 6101 EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters France Germany Great Britain Hewlett Packard S A Hewlett Packard France Hewlett Packard GmbH Hewlett Packard Ltd 150 Route du Nant d Avril 1 Avenue Du Canada Hewlett Packard Strasse Eskdale Road Winnersh Trianglt 1217 Meyrin 2 Geneva Zone D Activite De Courtaboeuf 6380 Bad Homburg v d H Wokingham Berkshire RF115D Switzerland F 91947 Les Ulis Ce d e x Germany England 41 22 780 8111 France 149 61721 16 0 144 7341 696622 331169 82 60 60 INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters Australia Canada China dewlett Packard Company Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd China Hewlett Packard Company 3495 Deer Creek Rd 31 41 Joseph Street 17500 South Service Road 38 BeiSan Huan XI Road Palo Alto California 94304 1316 Blackburn Victoria 3130 Trans Canada Highway Shuang Yu Shu 415 857 5027 161 31 8952895 Kirkland Qu
128. ACE C Save state recall state Iregister number ENTER O to MAX REG RECALL Internal Trace TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C register number ENTER t rave limit line table Yest O to MAX REG SAVE Trace Intrnl LIMIT LINES register number ENTER recall trace recall limit line table O to MAX REG RECALL Internal Trace LIMIT LINES register number ENTER t save ampli Yest O to MAX REG SAVE Trace gt Intrnl correction AMP COR iregister number ENTER recall ampli el D to MAX REG RECALL Internal Trace correction AMP COR register number ENTER t e Registers 1 through 8 are available for the user to save a state State register 0 contains the current state of the analyzer state register 9 contains the previous state of the cable TV analyzer t The alternate method for recalling data uses the key sequence RECALL Catalog Internal CATALOG REGISTER use the step keys or knob to highlight the item to be recalled LOAD FILE t The screen title is displayed when cataloging the trace registers with CATALOG REGISTER The screen title is not recalled with the limit line tables or amplitude correction factors 3 14 Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card The memory card provides additional memory for saving instrument states traces display images limit line tables amplitude correction factors and programs Each HP 82215A battery backed RAM card provid
129. ACP The leakage of a transmitter into adjacent channels can be measured quickly and easily Enter the channel spacing and channel bandwidth and activate the adjacent channel power measurement The spectrum analyzer computes and displays the ACP ratio of both the lower and upper adjacent channels marking the higher of the two The absolute carrier power is read out and vertical lines on the display mark the channel bandwidth edges Selecting ACPGRAPH ON OFF ON computes a graph showing the adjacent channel power ratio for the selected channel as a function of channel spacing and disables the numerical adjacent channel power display Normally the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters are set automatically Parameter setting can be changed from automatic to manual control using PARAM AUTO MAN The following conditions must be maintained to make a valid rms measurement If these conditions are not met errors of up to 2 5 dB can occur for noise like signals e Video bandwidth is at least 10 times the resolution bandwidth e Detector mode is sample SP You can use DETECTOR PK SP NG to change the detector mode Resolution bandwidth is less than or equal to 100 kHz Video averaging is OFF Neither MAX HOLD nor MIN HOLD trace mode is selected A wider dynamic range is available using the ADJ GHAN POWER extd function This extended range is measured by taking two different sweeps with different reference levels and combining the trace
130. AK AUTO MAN Los 10 dB Vio ew AUTO MAN VIDEO sw 10 kHz of vew ReW RATIO VID AVG ON OFF WA SB Sc FC CORR EMI BW Menu CENTER 100 15 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz RES BW 100 kHz VBW 10 KHZ SWP 30 0 msec Figure 4 18 Decreasing Video Bandwidth 4 27 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring low level Signals Using Attenuation Video Bandwidth and Video Averaging Example If a signal level is very close to the noise floor video averaging is another way to make the signal more visible NOTE The time required to construct a full trace that is averaged to the desired degree is approximately the same when using either the video bandwidth or the video averaging technique The video bandwidth technique completes the averaging as a slow sweep is taken whereas the video averaging technique takes many sweeps to complete the average Characteristics of the signal being measured such as drift and duty cycle determine which technique is appropriate Video averaging is a digital process in which each trace point is averaged with the previous trace point average Selecting video averaging changes the detection mode from peak to sample The result is a sudden drop in the displayed noise level The sample mode displays the instantaneous value of the signal at the end of the time or frequency interval represented by each display point rather than the value of the peak during the interval Sample mode is not used to measure
131. AN SWEEP CONT soL Hz nsec RT Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only 3 Turn the gate on by pressing SWEEP GATE ON OFF so that ON is underlined Using an oscilloscope makes it easier to ensure that the gate occurs during the pulsed RF signal With GATE OUTPUT connected to the oscilloscope you can adjust the gate length and gate delay so that the gate occurs near the end of the pulse See Figure 5 22 fp running h 4 00 V div offset 2 062 V 1 000 1 de Zs 8 00 V div offset 750 0 mv 1 000 1 de Be 200 mV div offset 0 000 V 1 000 1 de 4 4 00 V div offset 0 000 V 1 000 1 de 50 0 us div Figure 5 22 Setting the Gate Delay and Gate length Using an Oscilloscope 5 45 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only I ltem Description of Items in Figure 5 22 Output from pulse generator 1 Output from pulse generator 2 Pulsed RF signal input to the spectrum analyzer Gate output from time gated capability Notice that the gate output is directly below signal If you do not have an oscilloscope it is very important to use the guidelines for determining gate length and gate delay See Setting the Gate Delay and Gate Length Properly following thi
132. AN 1 800 GHz RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHZ SWP AA 0 mser Figure 3 1 Marker Table Display 3 4 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Use the Marker Table to List All the Active Markers Example Use the marker table to measure the calibrator signal 1 Connect the CAL OUT signal to the cable TV analyzer s INPUT 75 0 Press RESET 2 Press PEAK seARcH _and NEXT PK RIGHT to place the marker 1 on the 300 MHz cal signal 3 Press MKR FCTN MK TABLE ON OFF ON to turn on the marker table function 4 Press SELECT 1 2 3 4 2 to select marker 2 Press MARKER OH OFF ON to activate marker 2 Use the NEXT PK RIGHT key or move the marker using the key pad or knob to place marker 2 on the next harmonic Repeat the process for markers 3 and 4 5 Make marker 2 readout time rather than frequency by pressing and pressing SELECT 1 2 3 4 until 2 is selected underlined Press More 1 of 2 MK READ F T I P T to select time for the marker readout 6 The marker table can be set to display the marker amplitudes relative to the display line Press MKR FCTN More 1 of 2 and TABLE ADL MRM key to underline the ADL This accesses the delta display line format The display line can be moved using the knob The delta display line format is only available when using the marker table function NOTE The marker table data can be printed by pressing the key The marker table cannot be saved or recalled 3 5 Use the Peak Table
133. Access exchanges the contents of the trace A register with the trace B register and puts trace A in view mode Front Panel Key Access TRACE 6 7 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions A B A ON OFF A amp A cC when ON is underlined subtracts the data in trace B from the measured data in trace A A minus sign appears between the trace A status and the trace B status in the screen annotation while the function is active To deactivate this function press A B A ON OFF so that OFF is underlined The A B A and B DL B functions are math functions Unlike operations on dBmV units math functions operate on measurement units Measurement units are used to format trace data for data within the graticule limits The displayed amplitude of each element falls on one of 8000 vertical points with the value of 8000 being equal to the reference level For log scale data each point is equal to 0 01 dB The peak of a signal equal to 39 dBmV or one division below the reference level is equal to 7000 measurement units 8000 1000 7000 In linear mode each point has a resolution of reference level in volts 8000 For example if trace A contains amplitude values of 39 dBmvV and trace B contains amplitude values of 9 dBmV the result of the A B A function would be 39 004 dBmvV if dBmV units were used Since measurement units are used for the A B A function
134. Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information Though coordinates of frequency and amplitude are used most often limit line data can also be entered in terms of time and amplitude Use the LIMITS FRQ TIME softkey to underline the desired choice of either frequency or time parameters Frequency is the default selection If TIME is selected SELECT TIME will replace SELECT FREQ in the Edit Limit menus This section provides an overview of limit lines a procedure for creating a sample upper limit line and descriptions of the limit line functions A procedure for creating an upper and a lower limit line is at the end of this section Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on a specific limit line function Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions Procedure for Creating an Upper Limit Line This procedure demonstrates how to create a sample upper limit line for the CAL OUT signal and activate testing Detailed descriptions of the limit line functions follow this procedure Press PRESET 2 Set the center frequency and span by pressing FREQUENCY 300 MHz and SPAN 500 MHz 3 Connect the cable TV analyzer s CAL OUT and INPUT 75 Q on the cable TV analyzer using an appropriate cable The calibration signal is used as the test signal for this demonstration NOTE If the amplitude units are anything other than dBmV at this time change the amplitude units to dBmV for this demon
135. C INTERNAL selected Editor DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Previous Menu EDIT LAST EDIT CAT APND CAT SAVE EDIT NEW EDIT Previous Menu 1 TEM TEM LIMIT LINES AMP COR Previous Menu CATALOG ALL CATALOG REGISTER CATALOG VARiABLS CATALOG PREFIX Change Prefix More 1 of 2 7 14 Editor DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Cotalog Previous Menu ABCDEF GHIJKL MNOPOR STUVWX CATALOG ON EVENT Exit Catalog More 2 of 2 OAD FILE DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Previous Menu EDIT LAST EDIT CAT APND CAT SAVE EDIT NEW EDIT Previous Menu ITEM ITEM Or YZ_ Spe Clear Hear ase vor 2 2104 OAS Za Edit Done More 2 of 2 CATALOG DLF _ ditor DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Previous Menu EDIT LAST EDIT CAT APND CAT SAVE EDIT NEW EDIT Previous Menu ITEM ITEM Spectrum Analyzer Mode FOR RECALLING AND SAVING TO MEMORY CARD thatis SAVE STATE gt CARD Trace gt Cord DISPLAY gt CARD ALL DLP gt CARD Catalog Card INTERNAL CARD TRACE A TRACE B TRACE C LIMIT LINES AMP COR Previous Menu CATALOG ALL CATALOG STATES CATALOG TRACES CATALOG PREF IX Chonge Prefix More 1 of 2 SGL SPAN SPAN ZOOM FULL SPAN ZERO SPAN LAST SPAN PEAK ZOOM with CARD selected LOAD FILE DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Previous Menu ABCOEF GHIJKL MNOPOR ST
136. C for recalling previously saved trace data into trace C or saving trace data from trace C Front Panel Key Access or SAVE_ 6 145 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Trace Card begins the process used to save trace data limit line tables or amplitude correction factors on the memory card Pressing Trace Card accesses a softkey menu that allows you to select the trace to be saved trace A trace B or trace C and accesses the LIMIT LINES and AMP COR softkeys To save a trace press TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C use the numeric keypad to enter a trace register number and press ENTER To save limit line tables or amplitude correction factors press LIMIT LINES or AMP COR use the numeric keypad to enter a trace register number and press ENTER If windows are being used only the trace of the active window will be saved If you want the file name of the stored data to contain a prefix press Change Prefix to enter a prefix before storing the data If the trace data was stored using a prefix the file name is t prefix register number If no prefix was available the data is stored under t register number File names for limit line tables and amplitude correction factors are treated the same way as file names for trace data except 1 or a is used instead of t If a screen title is present it is saved with the trace data The time and date that the dat
137. CE VIEW A TRACE A B C so that B is underlined CLEAR WRITE B 9 To view the second signal change the gate delay so that the gate output is under the second signal Since the second signal had a signal delay of approximately 85 ys we set the gate delay to 85 ys plus the pulse width 2 or 110 ps Press SWEEP Gate Control GATE DELAY 110 us to set the gate delay to 110 ys Using an oscilloscope can be helpful in placing the gate output during the pulsed signal See Figure 5 24 5 47 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only fp running 4 00 V div offset 2 062 V 1 000 1 de 8 00 V div offset 750 0 mv 1 000 1 de 200 m div offset 0 000 V 1 000 1 de 4 00 V div offset 0 000 V 1 000 1 de 50 0 ps div Figure 5 24 Placing the Gate Output During the Second Signal Description of Items in Figure 5 24 Output from pulse generator 1 Output from pulse generator 2 Pulsed RF signal input to the spectrum analyzer Gate output from time gated capability Notice that the gate output is directly below signal 2 10 Set the resolution bandwidth to a value that is greater than 2 divided by the gate delay 110 ys minus the signal delay 85 ws The resolution bandwidth should be set to greater than 2 divided by 25 ys or greater than 80 kHz Press BW RES BW 100
138. Cae GS amp dylan So 1 9 Power Cable a eee Gs dell Turning on the Analyzer for the First Time ie eae 1 13 Performing the Tracking Generator Self Calibration Routine hoes ys Ge Seng eee Seba ie Buea tele Printing or Plotting 2 ee E Printing Using an RS 232 Interface 117 Equipment Pit oR hy ate T 1 17 Interconnection and Printing Instructions 1 18 Plotting Using an RS 232 Interface 2 122 Equipment sth tec eth Whe a 1 22 Interconnection and Plotting Instructions 1 22 Printing Using an HP IB Interface 1 25 Equipment 2 BSP vag och Me 1 25 Interconnection and Printing Instructions 1 25 Plotting Using an HP IB Interface 1 80 Equipment ee ee 1 30 Interconnection and Plotting Instructions 1 80 Printing Using a Parallel Interface 2 1838 Equipment s 6 i Mea a gt aioe geld 1 33 Interconnection and Printing Instructions 1 33 Plotting to an HP LaserJet Printer L87 Equipment BAY Shih tao hs 1 37 Interconnection and Plotting Instructions 1 87 Printing after Plotting or Plotting after Printing 1 88 Electrostatic Discharge ber ee te Gin amp ad GSD Reducing Damage Caused by ESD So sh E den LG 1839 Contents 1 2 Getting Started What You ll Learn in this Chapter 2 2 Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer
139. Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions CATALOG CARD CATALOG DISPLAY CATALOG DLP Cat alog Internal displays a catalog of the items stored on the memory card while accessing the memory card configuration menu Front Panel Key Access CONFIG catalogs all of the display images that are on the memory card A display image can be recalled to the analyzer by using the CARD DISPLAY softkey Front Panel Key Access or catalogs all of the downloadable programs DLPs that are in analyzer memory or on the memory card Downloadable programs can be saved in analyzer memory by either loading in a downloadable program from the memory card or defining a function using remote programming commands FUNCDEF or ACTDEF Front Panel Key Access RECALL or accesses a menu that has the cataloging functions for analyzer memory CATALOG ALL CATALOG REGISTER CATALOG VARIABLS CATALOG PREFIX CATALOG DLP and CATALOG ON EVENT Each catalog function displays catalog information The catalog contains information about the data stored in internal memory See Figure 6 2 and Table 6 3 6 28 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions 16 29 47 it MAR 1992 REF dBm ATTEN 18 dB PEAK LOG 4B Editor DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX A SB Sc FC Exit CORR Catalog Previous Menu CENTER 1 450 GHz SPAN 2 900 GHz RES BW 3 8 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 58 0 msec RL Figure 6 2 Analyzer Memory Catal
140. E or POINT to specify the segment type The segment type determines how to connect the coordinate point of the current line segment with the coordinate point of the next line segment The segment type determines whether the line segment is horizontal vertical sloped or a single point The three segment types are 1 Flat draws a zero slope line between the coordinate point of the current segment and the coordinate point of the next segment producing limit line values equal in amplitude for all frequencies or times between the two points If the amplitude values of the two segments differ the limit line will step to the value of the second segment See Figure 3 7 2 Slope draws a straight line between the coordinate point of the current segment and the coordinate point of the next segment producing limit line values for all frequencies between the two points 3 Point specifies a limit value for the coordinate point It specifies a limit at a single frequency or time and for no other frequency time points For an upper limit line a point segment is indicated by a line drawn from the coordinate point vertically off the top of screen For a lower limit line a point segment is indicated by a line drawn from the coordinate point vertically off the bottom of screen The point segment type should be used as the last segment in the limit line table However if the last segment in the table is not specified as the point segment type an im
141. EFAULT COMFIG 6 51 DEFAULT SYNC 6 51 Define Coupling 6 52 Define Gate 6 52 Define Time 6 52 delay GATE DELAY 6 77 delaying sweep time gate utility 6 139 DELETE FILE 6 53 delete files from memory card 6 20 DELETE POINT 6 53 DELETE SEGMENT 6 53 delta display line markers 6 142 delta marker 4 18 6 89 Demod 5 23 6 53 DEMOD AM FM 5 23 6 54 DEMOD ON OFF 5 23 6 54 demodulating an AM or FM signal 5 23 demodulation 6 53 AM 6 54 continuous 5 24 dwell time 6 57 FM 6 54 FM gain 6 73 FM offset 6 73 FM span 6 74 on and off 6 54 speaker on off 6 135 squelch 6 136 deskjet 6 54 DESKJET 310 6 54 DESKJET 550C 6 54 Index 9 deskjet printer 6 54 detection mode negative peak 6 55 positive peak 6 55 sample 6 55 DETECTOR PK SP NG 6 55 determining gate delay 5 39 determining gate length 5 39 disable peak detector reset 6 57 display analog 6 14 cataloging 6 28 two windows 6 103 using windows 3 54 DISPLAY 6 55 DISPLAY CAL DATA 6 4 6 55 DISPLAY CNTL I 6 56 display compression due to monitor output format 2 14 6 141 display image saving and recalling 3 32 display line 6 57 DISPLAY CARD 6 56 display zone change span 6 156 find left peak 6 155 find right peak 6 156 move center 6 155 Dispose User Mem 6 56 distortion products 4 30 DLP 3 28 cataloging 6 28 editor 6 63 DLP editor function appending 6 16 display and edit item 6 58 edit
142. F Option 011 only After selecting this softkey pressing any digit through 9 brings up the appropriate ompli tude terminator menu RES BW AUTO MAN VID BW AUTO MAN VBW RBW RATIO 120 kHz EMI BW VID AVG ON OFF 9 kHz EMI BW 200 Hz EMI Bw 30 EMI BW Menu Previous Menu 30 Requires Option 130 PUul4 7 4 CAL FREQ amp AMPTD CAL FREQ CAL AMPTD CAL STORE More 1 of 4 DISPLAY CAL DATA DACS STP GAIN ZERO ANALYZER GAINS AUXB CONF TEST CAL FETCH CORRECT ON OFF CRT VERT POSITION CRT HORZ POSITION More 2 of 4 2v REF DETECTOR GND REF DETECTOR MAIN COIL DR FM COIL DRIVE FM SPAN More 1 Mare 4 of 4 2 Option 017 oniy More 2 RECALL AMP COR SAVE AMP COR Change Title AMP COR ON OFF Edit Amp Cor 6 For service use only Service Cal Service Diag DEFAULT CAL DATA CAL TRK GEN 2 VERIFY TIMESASE More 3 of 4 MAIN SPAN SWEEP RAMP SWEEP TIME DAC COARSE TUNE DAC BINARY SPAN More 3 STOR PWR ON UNITS EXECUTE TITLE Flatness Data CAL TIMEBASE SET ATTN ERROR FINE TUNE DAC X FINE TUNE DAC 10V REF DETECTOR 10V REF DETECTOR DROOP More 4 ABCDEF GHI JKL MNOPOR STUVWX YZ_ Spe Cleor More 1 of 2 SELECT POINT SELECT FREQ SELECT AMPLITUD DELETE POINT Edit Done PURGE AMP COR FREQ DIAG LOCK ON OFF FRQ DISC NORM OFF FM GAIN FM OFFSET RPG TITLE More 2 of 2 Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions EDIT
143. FFT functions e Second example uses the automatic FFT measurement NOTE After the FFT function is used the markers are still in FFT mode for use in evaluating data Turn off the FFT markers before attempting to use markers in the normal fashion Press FFT OFF in the FFT menu to turn off the markers and exit the FFT measurement 5 5 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function Example 1 Use the manual FFT measurement to look at 60 Hz AM modulation l a Connect a signal generator to the spectrum analyzer s INPUT 75 Q Adjust the signal generator to produce an AM signal with a 60 Hz modulation frequency Press rrequency and set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to the frequency of the modulated input signal Press SPAN 10 MHz Press rrequency again and center the signal on the spectrum analyzer display Press SPAN 1 MHz Press rrequency and center the signal on the spectrum analyzer display again Press BW 100 kHz Re center the signal if necessary Press SPAN 200 kHz re centering the signal again if it is necessary Press VID BW AUTO HAM 1 kHz The video bandwidth should be about ten times greater than the highest modulation frequency of interest for the best amplitude accuracy Press REF LVL and turn the knob to change the reference level placing the signal peak within the top division of the s
144. Front Panel Key Access keeps the active marker at the requested amplitude on the screen Once activated the marker remains at the amplitude selected by the step keys knob or numeric keypad even if the signal frequency is changed Pressing any digit O through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected units terminator menu The marker will be placed on the signal furthest left at that amplitude If no signal exists at that amplitude it will be placed above the highest signal amplitude or below the lowest trace element if it is below all trace elements When marker delta is active in addition to marker amplitude the behavior of the active marker is useful for measuring signal bandwidths For example place a marker 20 dB below the peak of a signal press MARKER A MARKER AMPTD The marker readout shows the 20 dB bandwidth Front Panel Key Access MARKER NORMAL MARKER ON MAX HOLD A Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions activates a single frequency marker at the center frequency on the active trace if an on screen marker is not already displayed If there is an on screen marker before the MARKER NORMAL function is enabled a frequency marker is enabled at the position of the first marker Use the data controls to position the marker Annotation in the active function block and in the upper right corner indicates the frequency and amplitude of the marker The marker stays on the trac
145. ION An HP IB operation was aborted due to an incorrect address or invalid operation Check that there is only one controller the cable TV analyzer connected to the printer or plotter U INVALID HP IB OPERATION REN TRUE The HP IB operation is not allowed This is usually caused by trying to print or plot when a controller is on the interface bus with the cable TV analyzer To use the cable TV analyzer print or plot functions you must disconnect any other controllers on the HP IB If you are using programming commands to print or plot you can use an HP BASIC command instead of disconnecting the controller See the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information U INVALID ITEM Indicates an invalid parameter has been used in a programming command U INVALID KEYLBL Indicates that the specified key label contains too many characters A key label is limited to 8 printable characters per label line U INVALID KEYNAME _ _ The specified key name is not allowed The key name may have conflicted with a cable TV analyzer programming command To avoid this problem use an underscore as the second character in the key name or avoid beginning the key name with the following pairs of letters LB OA OL TA TB TR MA MF TS OT and DR U INVALID OUTPUT FORMAT The output format is not valid See the appropriate programming command descrip
146. KA 350 0 MHz REF 48 8 dBmV AT 10 dB 20 79 dB MARKER PEAK LOG 10 dB MARKER MARKER 350 0 MHz MARKER 220 79 GB AMPTD MARKER 1 ON OFF More 1 of 2 CENTER 350 0 MHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 15 0 sec Figure 5 10 Measure the Rejection Range with Delta Markers Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Stimulus Response Measurements Tracking Generator Unleveled Condition When using the tracking generator the message TG UNLVL may appear The TG UNLVL message indicates that the tracking generator source power SRC PWR ON OFF could not be maintained at the user selected level during some portion of the sweep If the unleveled condition exists at the beginning of the sweep the message will be displayed immediately If the unleveled condition occurs after the sweep begins the message will be displayed after the sweep is completed A momentary unleveled condition may not be detected when the sweep time is small The message will be cleared after a sweep is completed with no unleveled conditions The unleveled condition may be caused by any of the following e Start frequency is too low or the stop frequency is too high The unleveled condition is likely to occur if the true frequency range exceeds the tracking generator frequency specification especially the low frequency specification The true frequency range being swept may b
147. N to activate the display line This display line marks the normalized reference position or the position where 0 dB insertion loss transmission measurements or 0 GB return loss reflection measurements will normally reside Using the knob results in a change in the position of the normalized trace within the range of the graticule Normalization eliminates the frequency response error of the test system When normalization is on trace math is being performed on the active trace The trace math performed is trace A minus trace B plus the display line with the result placed into trace A Remember that trace A contained the measurement trace trace B contained the stored calibration trace and DL display line represents the normalized reference position Note that the units of the reference level dB reflect this relative measurement 5 20 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Stimulus Response Measurements fo v REF 48 8 dBm AT 10 gB VID AVS ON OFF DETECTOR PK SP NG DISPLAY LINE 38 7 dB NORML IZE ON OFF NORMLIZE POSITION A lt gt B CENTER 350 0 MHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 15 0 sec Figure 5 9 Normalized Trace 9 To measure the rejection of the filter at a given frequency press MKR and enter the frequency For example enter 350 MHz The marker readout displays the rejection of the filter at 350 MHz see Figure 5 10 ip M
148. O Hz SPAN 0 Hz S BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 200 msec Figure 5 30 Gate On Description of Items in Figure 5 30 Represents the gate delay The gate is off during the gate delay Represents the gate length The gate is on and the HI SWEEP IN OUT signal is displayed Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only 4 To check the gate control function press_ SWEEP Gate Control GATE CTL EDGE LVL so that LVL level is underlined See Figure 5 31 44 49 11 JUL 30 1993 We REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 GB GTPOS EDGE POL POS NEG GATE CTL EDGE LVL GATE UTILITY Previous Menu CENTER O Hz SPAN O HZ RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHZ SWP 200 msec Figure 5 31 Using the level Gate Control When the GATE CTL EDGE LVL softkey function is set to edge triggering occurs at the edge of the trigger input When the GATE CTL EDGE LVL softkey function is set to level the gate is on whenever the trigger input is high Because the trigger input for this example is the HI SWEEP IN OUT signal and HI SWEEP IN OUT signal is high 5 V during every sweep the level of the signal on screen is high Notice that the GATE DELAY GATE TIME and EDGE POL MEG POS softkeys are blanked when the gate control is set to level When the gate control is set to level LVL the functions of gate delay gate
149. OCK ON OFF 10V REF DETECTOR 10V REF DETECTOR 2v REF DETECTOR ALC TEST Option 011 only ANALYZER GAINS AUXB BINARY SPAN COARSE TUNE DAC DACS DISPLAY CAL DATA DROOP FINE TUNE DAC FM COIL DRIVE FM GAIN 6 4 Service Diagnostic Functions continued FM OFFST FM SPAN FREQ DIAG FRQ DISC NORM OFF GND REF DETECTOR MAIN COIL DR MAIN SPAN STP GAIN ZERO SWEEP RAMP SWEEP TIME DAC X FINE TUNE DAC Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Service Functions 6 5 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions AM ON OFF determines the percent of amplitude modulation of the largest displayed signal and its two sidebands The sidebands are assumed to be entirely from amplitude modulation If there are differences in the sideband amplitude the larger value is used The measurement runs continuously re executing at the end of each sweep All three signals must be displayed The frequency spacing of the sideband signals must be the same within the span accuracy of the measurement All of the signals must be greater than the PEAK EXCURSION above the THRESHOLD The amplitude scale may be either linear or logarithmic Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER LOCK ON OFF turns off the analyzer phase locking The counter is turned off so frequency correction is no longer done at the start of each sweep Turning the phase locking off increases measurement speed but it decreases frequency accuracy This is a service di
150. OG ON EVENT 6 31 CATALOG PREFIX 6 33 CATALOG REGISTER 6 34 CATALOG STATES 6 34 CATALOG TRACES 6 34 CATALOG VARIABLS 6 35 CENTER FREQ 6 35 center frequency 6 35 window zone 6 155 center frequency step size 6 35 CF STEP AUTO MAN 6 35 change function values 2 10 change prefix edit done 6 59 Change Prefix 6 36 Change Title 6 36 changing windows 6 100 CHANNEL BANDWDTH 6 38 channel power Index 6 using 5 74 76 CHANNEL POWER 6 38 channel power measurement 5 67 CHANNEL SPACING 6 39 characters 6 9 6 79 6 138 6 154 check analyzer operation 6 44 checking the fuse 1 9 CISPR testing 6 63 Clear 6 39 clear display active function area 2 10 clearing the active function 6 80 CLEAR PARAM 6 39 CLEAR WRITE A 6 40 CLEAR WRITE B 6 41 CLEAR WRITE C 6 42 CNTL A 0 1 6 43 CNTL B 0 1 6 43 CNTL C 0 1 6 43 CNTL D 0 1 6 43 CNT RES AUTO MAN 4 9 6 43 COARSE TUNE DAC 6 4 6 44 commands dispose all 6 65 6 66 6 67 front panel execution 6 69 common measurements stimulus response 5 12 22 common preset conditions 6 1 13 comparing signals 4 18 confidence test 6 44 8 7 CONFIG 6 44 configuration plotter 6 109 printer 6 117 CONF TEST 6 44 8 7 connecting your cable TV analyzer to a printer or plotter 1 17 connector 10 MHz ref output 2 8 AUXB 6 19 aux IF output 2 9 aux video output 2 9 cal output 2 5 earphone 2 8 ext alc input 2 7 external keyboard 2 9 ext ref in 2 8
151. ON OFF 6 135 spectral density channel power 6 38 SPECTRUM ANALYZER 6 136 speed data transmission 6 20 split screen 6 103 SQUELCH 5 25 6 136 SRC ATN MAN AUTO 6 136 SRC PWR OFFSET 6 136 SRC PWR ON OFF 5 15 6 137 SRC PWR STP SIZE 6 137 standard timebase 6 22 start and stop frequencies 6 90 START FREQ 6 137 state of analyzer at power on 6 111 state registers locking 6 123 STATE CARD 6 137 STATE INTRNL 6 138 step keys 2 5 2 11 step size center frequency 6 35 step size coupling 6 17 stimulus response measurements 5 12 stimulus response mode 6 140 STOP FREQ 6 138 Index 28 stop frequency fft 6 72 store correction factors 6 22 storing display 6 56 storing the correction factors CAL STORE 1 15 STOR PWR ON UNITS 6 3 6 138 STP GAIN ZERO 6 5 6 138 STUVWX 6 138 subtract display line from trace B 6 19 subtract trace B from A 6 8 SWEEP 6 139 sweep control continuous 6 139 single 6 132 6 139 SWEEP CONT SGL 6 139 SWEEP DELAY gate utility 6 139 sweep modes 2 13 2 14 SWEEP OUTPUT 2 9 SWEEP RAMP 6 5 6 139 sweep time 6 140 sweep time coupling 6 17 gate utility 6 49 SWEEP TIME DAC 6 5 6 140 switch trace A and B 6 7 SWP CPLG SR SA 5 17 6 140 SWP TIME AUTO MAN 6 140 synchronization constants 6 51 SYNC NRM NTSC 6 141 SYNC NRM PAL 6 14 1 T table of markers 6 96 table of amplitude correction factors 6 13 table of signal peaks 6 109 TABLE ADL NRM
152. ON OFF MK TABLE ON OFF MK NOISE ON OFF TABLE ADL NRM MK PAUSE ON CNT RES AUTO MAN More 1 of 2 DSP LINE ON OFF More 2 of 2 put7c 7 9 Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Preset SPECTRUM SPECTRUM ANALYZER Config CABLE TV ANALYZER TV RECEIVER CHANNEL MEAS SYSTEM MEAS More 1 of 3 CHANNEL SELECT PIX amp SND ON OFF Prev Menu PEAK SEARCH MARKER gt CF or MARKER gt MID SCRN MARKERA NEXT PEAK NEXT PK RIGHT PK TABLE ON OFF NEXT PK LEFT PK SORT FRQ AMP More 1 of 2 PK MODE lt gt DL NRM OSP LINE ON OFF 16 Alternate softkey when the PEAK EXCURSN FFT function is selected More 2 of 2 7 10 PRESET SPECTRUM ANALYZER CABLE TV ANALYZER TV RECEIVER More 1 of 3 Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions gt pre SET SPECTRUM Config CHANNEL MEAS SYSTEM MEAS CHANNEL SELECT PIX amp SNO ON OFF Prev Menu 7 11 Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions FOR RECALLING AND SAVING TO ANALYZER MEMORY with INTERNAL selected that INTERNAL gt STATE Internal gt Trace Catalog Interna INTERNAL CARD 7 12 TRACE A TRACE B TRACE C LIMIT LINES AMP COR Previous Menu CATALOG ALL CATALOG REGISTER CATALOG VARI ABLS CATALOG PREF 1X Change Prefix More 1 of 2 Editor DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Fxit Catalog Previous Menu LOAD FILE DELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Previous Menu Edit
153. ORR ABC More a oe f Of 3 CENTER 100 0950 MHz SPAN 500 0 KHz RES BW 10 KHz VBW 10 KHz SWP 30 0 msec Figure 4 10 Viewing an Unstable Signal With Max Hold Clear Write and Min Hold 4 17 Comparing Signals Using Delta Markers Using the spectrum analyzer you can easily compare frequency and amplitude differences between signals such as radio or television signal spectra The spectrum analyzer s delta marker function lets you compare two signals when both appear on the screen at one time or when only one appears on the screen Example Measure the differences between two signals on the same display screen 1 Connect the spectrum analyzer s CAL OUT to the INPUT 75 Q Press PRESET The calibration signal and its harmonics appear on the display 2 Press peak search to place a marker at the highest peak on the display The NEXT PK RIGHT and NEXT PK LEFT softkeys move the marker from peak to peak Press NEXT PK RIGHT to move the marker to the 300 MHz calibration signal See Figure 4 11 The signal that appears at the left edge of the screen is the spectrum analyzer s local oscillator LO and represents 0 Hz 14 19 42 JUL 29 1993 Ca MKA 306 MHz REF 48 8 dBmV AT 10 dB 28 45 BMV en PEAK gt CF LOG 10 f dB MARKER MARKER 28 45 d mv 306 MHz NEXT PEAK NEXT PK RIGHT WA SB SC FC CORR NEXT PK EFT More 1 of 2 CENTER
154. P _222 STATE tLW_22 TRACE dLW_222 DLP dLw_20 DLP ILG_S LIMIT aTEMP_4 AMP re are EU eS E CENTER 27 08823 GHz SPAN 60 74 MHz RES BW 300 kHz V W 100 kHz SWP 20 msec pul5de Figure 6 1 Memory Card Catalog Information Table 6 2 Memory Card Catalog Information Description Volume Label A label to identify the memory card FORMAT CARD automatically assigns the volume label HP859X to the card size of the ory card 128 is the number of 256 byte blocks or indicates that the card is a 32 Kbyte memory card 128 blocks x 256 bytes Data Type icates the type of date trace state downloadable program DLP limit line LIMIT plitude factors AMP display image DSPLY The data type is determined by the letter t d lI a or i preceding the fi amp sd e filena Starting Address dicates the physical record number of the start of the file in the fi Time of Creation cates the time and date of file creation File name e letter preceding the file indicates the type of data of the file t trace data state data d program data downloadable program limit line a amplitude ors display image If the data was saved using a prefix the prefix follows the first acter in the file name An underscore and the register number follow the prefix Front Panel Key Access or SAVE_ File Length dicates number of records i le 6 27 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key
155. PLAY 3 Enter the register number that the state was saved under and then press ENTER 3 25 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card To Save Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors The procedure for saving limit line tables or amplitude correction factors is similar to saving trace data State and trace data is not recalled when the limit line tables or amplitude correction factors are recalled 1 Press DISPLAY or CONFIG Change Prefix to enter a new prefix or change the existing prefix If you do not specify a prefix the limit line table will be saved with a file name consisting of 1_ register number A table of amplitude correction factors will be saved with a file name consisting of a_ register number 2 When saving tables set up the table to be stored See Using the Limit Line Functions or Using Amplitude Correction Functions for more information about entering data 3 Press SAVE If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD Press Trace Card to access the menu with LIMIT LINES and AMP COR 4 Press either LIMIT LINES to save limit line tables or AMP COR to save amplitude correction factors REGISTER and PREFIX are displayed on the cable TV analyzer display 5 Use the numeric keypad to enter a register number and then press ENTER The data is saved with a file name consisting of a 1 for limit line tables
156. Panel Key Access allows you to purge all user state registers all user trace registers all mode registers the editor buffer Group delay normalization all DLP memory and all microprocessor stack data The stack pointer is set to its power up value No system globals are erased and the calibration data is preserved Pressing ERASE MEM ALL causes a message to appear on the analyzer screen If you are sure Press key again to purge data Press ERASE MEM ALL again if you want to dispose of all user memory Press any other softkey if you do not want to dispose of all user memory 6 65 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions NOTE ERASE MEM ALL ignores the state of the SAV LOCK So even if STATES and TRACES are locked they will still be erased by ERASE MEM ALL ERASE MEM CARD NOTE Front Panel Key Access CONFIG allows you to dispose of any data or programs stored on the memory card by formatting it This is the same as FORMAT CARD Press Dispose User Mem then press ERASE MEM CARD which causes the message to appear on the analyzer screen If you are sure Press key again to purge data Press ERASE MEM CARD againifyouwant to dispose of the CARD s memory Press any other softkey if you do not want to dispose of the CARD s memory Use DELETE FILE to selectively delete stored programs or variables from analyzer memory Front Panel Key Access CONFIG ERASE STATEALL NOTE Spe
157. RACE A TRACE B or TRACE C REGISTER and MAX REG are displayed on the cable TV analyzer display The number after MAX REG indicates the maximum register number that can be entered for trace storage in cable TV analyzer memory 6 Use the numeric keypad to enter a number from 0 to the maximum register number and then press ENTER Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from Analyzer Memory To Recall a Trace 1 Press RECALL If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL 2 Press Internal Trace This accesses a menu displaying TRACE A TRACE B TRACE C LIMIT LINES and AMP CDR 3 Press TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C to select the trace in which you want to place the trace data 4 Enter the register number under which the trace was stored 5 Press ENTER The recalled trace is placed in the view mode and the cable TV analyzer state is changed to the state that was saved Trace data can also be recalled by using the catalog 1 Press RECALL If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL 2 Press Catalog Internal CATALOG REGISTER Use the knob to highlight the number of the trace register to be retrieved The trace registers have a TR preceding the trace register number 3 Press LOAD FILE The recalled trace is placed into trace B and the cable TV analyzer state is changed to the state that was saved Using Spectrum Analyzer Fea
158. RACE B and TRACE C Press the softkey label of the trace that you want to save TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C REGISTER and PREFIX are displayed on the cable TV analyzer display Use the numeric keypad to enter a register number and then press ENTER The trace data is saved with a file name consisting of a t the current prefix an underscore _ and the register number The t denotes that the file contains trace data 3 22 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card To Recall a Trace 1 Press or RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 2 Press Catalog Card then CATALOG TRACES Use the knob to highlight the trace data to be retrieved 3 Press LOAD FILE The trace data is placed in trace B Trace data can also be recalled by specifying the prefix and the register number 1 Use Change Prefix to enter the prefix or use the existing prefix 2 Press RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 3 Press Card Trace to access the menu that displays TRACE A TRACE B and TRACE C 4 Select the trace in which you want the trace data stored by pressing TRACE A TRACE B or TRACE C 5 Enter the register number that the trace was saved under and then press ENTER The recalled trace is placed in view mode W 3 24 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory
159. S AUTO MAN softkey function is not affected by pressing AUTO ALL Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN makes the auxiliary interface control line A output high or low TTL Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL makes the auxiliary interface control line B output high or low TTL Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL makes the auxiliary interface control line C output high or low TTL Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL makes the auxiliary interface control line D output high or low TTL Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL 6 43 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions COARSE TUNE DAC CONF TEST CONT MEAS 6 44 displays the analog output of the YTO coarse tune DAC located on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL initiates a variety of tests to check the major functions of the analyzer The confidence test function checks that the video bandwidths change the noise floor level decreases as the resolution bandwidth narrows the step gains switch and the 3 dB bandwidths of the resolution bandwidths are correctly set CNF TEST PASS is displayed if the confidence test passes Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkey menu used for printer and plotter configurations the time and date display functions changing the current prefix memory card configuration functions disposing of user define
160. SC NORM OFF 6 74 FREQ OFFSET 6 75 frequency stop 6 138 FREQUENCY 2 4 2 17 6 75 frequency and amplitude self calibration routine 1 14 6 22 frequency demodulation 6 54 frequency offset 6 75 frequency self calibration 6 22 frequency span 6 135 front panel execution of programming commands 6 69 front panel features 2 3 6 front panel protective cover Option 040 9 4 FRQ DISC NORM OFF 6 5 functional check of time gated spectrum analyzer capability 5 56 function coupling 6 17 fuse 1 9 fuse holder 2 8 Index 13 G gain internal analyzer 6 16 gate coupling functions 6 52 using the gate utility 5 28 gate control 6 52 edge or level triggering 6 76 time gated capability 5 58 Gate Control 6 76 GATE CTL EDGE LVL 6 76 operation 5 58 gate definition 6 52 gate delay determining the gate delay 5 39 setting gate delay outside the Gate Utility 5 50 GATE DELAY 6 77 gate length determining the gate length 5 39 setting gate length outside the Gate Utility 5 50 GATE LENGTH 6 77 GATE ON OFF 6 78 GATE OUTPUT 2 8 GATE TRIGGER INPUT 2 7 gate utility exit 6 69 exiting 6 78 use of 5 28 5 30 GATE UTILITY 6 78 gate utility coupling 6 52 resolution bandwidth 6 49 sweep time 6 49 video bandwidth 6 49 GHIJKL 6 79 GND REF DETECTOR 6 5 6 80 graph markers 6 80 GRAT ON OFF 6 80 GRPH MKR ON OFF 6 80 guidelines for using time gated spectrum analyzer capability 5 39 H hardware error messages 8 14
161. Signals Example Use the peak table function to measure the calibrator signal and its harmonics l Connect the CAL OUT signal to the cable TV analyzer s INPUT 75 Q and press PRESET Press PEAK SEARCH More 1 of 2 and PK TABLE ON OFF ON to turn on the peak table display The displayed peaks are listed by amplitude with the highest amplitude signal listed first The table can be sorted by frequency instead of amplitude In this mode the lowest frequency peak is listed first with the others listed in order of increasing frequency Press PK SORT FRQ AMP to underline FRQ and list the signals by frequency The harmonics are numbered on the display in order of their listing in the peak table The table can be limited to list only the signals above a certain power level Change the peak table from the normal mode to the display line mode by pressing PK MODE lt gt DL NRM to underline gt DL The knob can then be used to move the display line to identify only the desired peaks above the display line Press PK MODE lt gt DL NRM again to underline lt DL and move the display line to identify only the peaks that fall below the display line NOTE The peak table data can be printed by pressing the key The peak table cannot be saved or recalled 3 7 Saving and Recalling Data from Analyzer Memory This section explains how to save and recall state trace limit line and amplitude correction factor data to a
162. Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Analyzer As a Receiver in Zero Frequency Span 3 To demodulate the AM press BW Increase the resolution bandwidth to include both sidebands of the signal within the passband of the spectrum analyzer 4 Next position the signal peak near the reference level and select a linear voltage display Press and change the reference level then press SCALE LOG LIN to underline LIN 5 To select zero span either press SPAN 0 Hz or press ZERO SPAN See Figure 4 26 If the modulation is a steady tone for example from a signal generator use video trigger to trigger on the waveform and stabilize the display Adjust the sweep time to change the horizontal scale Use markers and delta markers to measure time parameters of the waveform 14 30 26 AUG 19 1993 Be MKR A 3 0000 msec REF 500 1 mv AT 20 dB 1 00 X MARKER SMPL gt CF LIN aa NEXT PEAK NEXT PK RIGHT NEXT PK GER T More 1 of 2 CENTEA 399 9988 MHz SPAN 0 Hz RES BW 30 kHz VBW 30 kHz 5WP 5 00 msec Figure 4 26 Measuring Modulation In Zero Span Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode What You ll Learn in This Chapter Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode This chapter demonstrates spectrum analyzer measurement techniques with examples of typical applications each application focuses on different features The measurement procedu
163. TA is pressed the CAL FREQ and CAL AMPTD routines need to be run The CAL FREQ and CAL AMPTD must be run to ensure specifications The calibration results must then be saved by pressing CAL STORE See Chapter 8 for more information Front Panel Key Access DEFAULT CONFIG DEFAULT SYNC Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions resets the analyzer configuration to the state it was in when it was originally shipped from the factory and performs an instrument preset See Table 6 5 for the default user configuration values set by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG Table 6 5 Default Configuration Values Configuration Default Value Analyzer address Option 021 Copy device CRT position Horizontal and Verticali 10 48 Printer address Plotter address External preamo lo dB Save lock internal states or traces Off Printe black and white printer Print menu jn Plots per page Time date disolav on Date mode month day year format blank Analyzer state at power on instrument preset Front Panel Key Access CONFIG restores the factory default values of the horizontal and vertical synchronization constants for the rear panel MONITOR output CRT SYNC DEFAULT can be used to exit from the NTSC or PAL modes to return to the normal monitor output and use the default synchronization constants Front Panel Key Access CONFIG 6 51 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descrip
164. The number of sweeps can be entered using the numeric keypad Front Panel Key Access BW TRACE o MEAS USER 6 151 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions VID BW AUTO MAN NOTE changes the analyzer post detection filter from 30 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1 3 10 sequence For O ption 130 only Option 130 provides additional narrow resolution bandwidths of 30 Hz 100 Hz and 300 Hz As the video bandwidth is decreased the sweep time is increased to maintain amplitude calibration A mark appears next to VBW on the bottom of the analyzer display to indicate that it is not coupled To couple the video bandwidth press VID BW AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined The video bandwidth can be changed by using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad Coupling the video bandwidth function also couples the video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio function If you want to auto couple the video bandwidth to a nonstandard ratio you must set the video bandwidth to auto couple before setting the video bandwidth resolution bandwidth ratio Front Panel Key Access AUTO COUPLE or 6 152 VIDEO VIEW A VIEW B VIEW Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start if the detected RF envelope voltage rises to a level set by the display line When VIDEO is pressed the display line a
165. The HP C1405A Keyboard is an IBM AT compatible keyboard that can be connected to the external keyboard connector on the rear panel of the cable TV analyzer The external keyboard allows a convenient way to enter screen titles and remote programming commands directly into the cable TV analyzer or to access the softkey functions Detailed information on using the external keyboard can be found in the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide The remote interface provides the capability to control your cable TV analyzer from a computer that uses an RS 232 or HP IB Option 021 interface bus The function keys of the external keyboard control the cable TV analyzer as follows Table 3 8 External Keyboard Functions Description F1 F6 Softkeys It hhoaggh6 Gr baspecitive y o ft hkec curesnt aanalyzer menu Enter prefix mode Enter remote commands mode Accesses the FREQUENCY menu Accesses the SPAN menu Accesses the AMPLITUDE menu Retrieves the present screen title for editing ESC Accesses the enter title mode PRINT SCREEN Copies the analyzer screen display to the active copy device Accesses the DLP Editor and redefines F7 F12 3 65 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features External Keyboard Table 3 8 External Keyboard Functions continued Description DELETE Deletes the character over the cursor INSERT Toggles between the inser
166. U MEAS UNCAL The measurement is uncalibrated Check the sweep time span and bandwidth settings or press_ auto courte AUTO ALL U MEMORY OVERFLOW ERASE DLP MEM and reload This message indicates that too many user defined items functions variables key definitions or downloadable programs have been loaded into cable TV analyzer memory If this message appears use ERASE DLP MEM and then load the user defined item or downloadable program into cable TV analyzer memory U No card found Indicates that the memory card is not inserted U No points defined Indicates the specified limit line or amplitude correction function cannot be performed because no limit line segments or amplitude correction factors have been defined U OVEN COLD Indicates that the cable TV analyzer has been powered up for less than 5 minutes The actual temperature of the precision frequency oven is not measured M 8 24 If You Have a Problem Error Messages PARAMETER ERROR _ _ The specified parameter is not recognized by the cable TV analyzer See the appropriate programming command description to determine the correct parameters U PASSCODE NEEDED Indicates that the function cannot be accessed without the pass code U POS PK FAIL Indicates the positive peak detector has failed H REF UNLOCK Indicates that the frequency reference is not locked to the external reference input Check that the 10 MHz REF OUT connector is conn
167. UENCY 37 Hz and perform the CAL FREQ or CAL FREQ amp AMPTD self calibration routines This message also sets SRQ 110 U and H CAL SPAN SENS FAIL The self calibration span sensitivity routine failed This message also sets SRQ 110 H If You Have a Problem Error Messages CAL USING DEFAULT DATA Indicates that the calibration data is corrupt and the default correction factors are being used Interruption of the self calibration routines or an error can cause this problem M CAL ZERO FAIL The cable TV analyzer could not set up the tuning sensitivity of the main coil If this message appears press_lrrequency 37 Hz CAL Mare 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 DEFAULT CAL DATA and perform the CAL FREQ routine again H Cannot engage phase lock with current CAL FREQ data Indicates that the CAL FREQ routine needs to be performed before phase locking can be turned on U Cannot reach N dB points Indicates that the number of dB specified for the N dB PTS function is greater than the distance of the signal peak from the cable TV analyzer noise floor or peak threshold U Check trigger input Indicates that the cable TV analyzer needs an external trigger signal to use the time gating functions Before using the time gating functions you should ensure there is a trigger pulse connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector on the rear panel of cable TV analyzer and that the GATE OUTPUT is connected the EXT TRIG INPUT connec
168. UVWX YZ_ Spe Clear More 1 of 2 CATALOG OLP CATALOG AMP COR CATALOG LMT LINE CATALOG DISPLAY Exit Cotolog More 2 of 2 On lt gt 5 S2NT OETA Edit Done More 2 of 2 LOAD FILE DELETE FILE SELECT PREF 1X Exit Catalog Previous Menu Key Menus Functions PU128 7 15 Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions SWP TIME AUTO MAN SWEEP CONT SGL GATE ON OFF 13 Gate Controi 13 GATE DELAY 4 GATE LENGTH 4 EDGE POL POS NEG 14 GATE CTL EDGE LVL GATE UTILITY Previous Menu Define Time Define Gate Define Coup ing UPDATE TIMEFREQ EXIT UTILITY SWEEP DELAY T WINDOW SWP TIME T WINDOW RES BW TRIG MKR ON OFF Moin Menu GATE DELAY 4 GATE LENGTH 4 GATE ON OFF TRIG MKR ON OFF UPDATE TIMEFREQ Main Menu SWEEP DELAY T WINDOW SWP TIME ENTER REF EDGE ENTER WIDTH MARKER ON ENTER PRI DONE CLEAR PARAM Pulse Param CPL RBW ON OFF CPL VBW ON OFF CPL SWP ON OFF Main Menu SWEEP DELAY Previous Menu T WINDOW SWP TIME 13 Option 107 only MARKER ON 14 Appears only if GATE CTL edge ZERO MARKER EDGE is selected DONE with Trace A selected f TRACE CLEAR WRITE A MAX HOLD A 15 VIEW A VID AVG ON OFF BLANK A DETECTOR PK SP NG TRACE ABC NORML IZE ON OFF More ob cS NORMLIZE PosiTion A B gt A ON OFF B OL gt B A lt gt B More 2 of 3 as A gt C B gt C More 3 of 3 15 Changes to MIN HOLD C when trace C is selected
169. User s Guide HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Reference HP part number 08591 90104 Printed in USA March 1994 Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shah not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Regulatory Information The regulatory information is in the calibration guide for your analyzer Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1993 1994 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws 1400 Fountaingrove Parkway Santa Rosa CA 95403 1799 USA Warranty This Hewlett Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by HP Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buye
170. V and spectrum analyzer functions e Provides a quick reference for cable TV and spectrum analyzer softkeys HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide Describes analyzer operation via a remote controller computer Options Option 910 Additional User s Documentation Provides an additional copy of the user s guides the calibration guide and the quick reference guide Option 915 Assembly Level and Component Level Repair Service Guides Describes troubleshooting and repair of the spectrum analyzer Option 915 consists of two manuals HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Assembly Level Repair Service Guide describes adjustment and assembly level repair of the analyzer HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Component Level Repair Service Guide provides information for component level repair of the spectrum analyzer How to Order Manuals Each of the manuals listed above can be ordered individually To order contact your local HP Sales and Service Office Xi Contents l Preparing For Use What You ll Find in This Chapter 1 2 Introducing the HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer 1 2 Preparing Your Cable TV anaes for Use 1 4 Initial Inspection 1 5 Power Requirements 1 7 Setting the Line Voltage Selector Switch eo 1 8 Checking the Fuse
171. Z SP 1MHZ After is pressed the cable TV analyzer remains in command mode To return to the title entry mode press on the external keyboard To Enter a Prefix Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information 1 Press on the external keyboard to enter the mode for entering a prefix 2 Type in the prefix 3 Press on the external keyboard Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode What You ll Learn in This Chapter Making Basic Measurements Using Spec trum Analyzer Mode This chapter demonstrates basic spectrum analyzer measurements with examples of typical measurements each measurement focuses on different functions The measurement procedures covered in this chapter are listed below Resolving signals of equal amplitude using the resolution bandwidth function Resolving small signals hidden by large signals using the resolution bandwidth function Increasing the frequency readout resolution using the marker counter Decreasing the frequency span using the marker track function Tracking unstable signals using marker track and the maximum hold and minimum hold functions Comparing signals using delta markers Measuring low level signals using attenuation video bandwidth and video averaging Identifying distortion products using the RF attenuator and traces Using the spectrum analyzer as a receiver i
172. a service calibration function and is designed for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL returns the analyzer to the state it was in before the current catalog function was invoked It clears the catalog display and returns to a normal analyzer display Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE removes the screen annotation left after pressing SHOW OPTIOMS Front Panel Key Access CONFIG exits the gate utility returning to the gate control menu The analyzer is returned to normal operation The state of the analyzer becomes the state of the window that was active when exiting the gate utility Front Panel Key Access SWEEP Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions EXTERNAL EXTERNAL PREAMPG activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start when an external voltage connected to EXT TRIG INPUT on the rear panel passes through approximately 1 5 volts The external trigger signal must be a 0 V to 5 V TTL signal Front Panel Key Access adds a positive or negative preamplifier gain value which is subtracted from the displayed signal The EXTERNAL PREAMPG function is similar to the REF LVL OFFSET function however with the EXTERNAL PREAMPG function the attenuation may be changed depending on the preamplifier gain entered A preamplifier gain offset is used for measurements that require an external preamplifier or long cables The offset is subtracted from t
173. a was stored is appended to the screen title When comparing a trace displayed in view mode with a recalled trace it is possible to over write the displayed trace by recalling the trace data This can happen because the instrument state is saved and recalled with the trace data For example if you save trace A when it is in clear write mode place trace A in view mode then recall the trace data into trace B trace B will be placed in view mode but the trace mode of trace A is changed to clear write mode since the trace mode of trace A was clear write when it was saved To avoid this problem we change the trace mode of the traces to view or blank mode before saving the trace data Front Panel Key Access 6 146 Trace Intrnl Track Gen Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions accesses a softkey menu that allows you to select the item to be stored in analyzer memory the trace to be saved trace A trace B or trace C limit line tables or amplitude correction factors To save a trace select the trace to be saved enter the trace register number and press ENTER To save limit line tables or amplitude correction factors press LIMIT LINES to save limit line tables or AMP COR to save amplitude correction factors enter the trace register number and press ENTER Valid trace register numbers are 0 through the maximum register number The maximum register number is the number x
174. ability is operational perform the following steps 1 Connect the rear panel HIGH SWEEP IN OUT connector to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector with a short BNC calibration cable See Figure 5 29 EARPHONE TY TRIG GATE TRIG GATE OUTPUT INPUT Or EXT ALC INPUT SWEEP OUTPUT AUK bad MHz eouTeUT KEYBOARD Eheu O ION ITOR pul26c Figure 5 29 Rear Panel Connections for Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability 2 Press PRESET lrrequency 0 Hz SPAN ZERO SPAN 200 ms Gate Control GATE DELAY 60 ms GATE LENGTH 60 ms The GATE CTL EDGE LVL softkey should have EDGE underlined and EDGE POL POS NEG should have POS underlined Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only 3 Press Previous Menu GATE ON OFF so that ON is underlined See Figure 5 30 NOTE This procedure offers a qualitative functional check only Due to several factors the accuracy of the marker readout of the gate delay and gate length can vary by several milliseconds For more information about gate timing see the Characteristics in specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for your spectrum analyzer REF 10 0 dBm ATTEN 10 dB GTPQS LOG 10 dB GATE LENGTH 60 000 msec WA SB sc FC CORR CENTER
175. ac power source Failure to set the ac power input to the correct voltage could cause damage to the instrument when the ac power cable is plugged in No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers If this instrument is used in a manner not specified by Hewlett Packard Co the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired The instruction documentation symbol The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction in the manual viii HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Documentation Description The following guides are shipped with your HP 8591C cable TV analyzer HP 8590 E Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Calibration Guide Tells you how to test your spectrum analyzer to determine if the spectrum analyzer meets its specifications HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer User s Guides Cable TV Measurements e Tells you how to make cable TV measurements with your analyzer e Describes the cable TV analyzer mode features Spectrum Analyzer Reference e Tells you how to make measurements using the spectrum analyzer mode e Describes the spectrum analyzer mode features e Tells you what to do in case of a failure HP 85916 Cable TV Analyzer Getting Started and Quick Reference Guide e Describes how to make a simple measurement with your spectrum analyzer e Briefly describes the cable T
176. ace registers 6 123 LO feedthrough 4 18 log scale 6 126 lower limit line 3 41 editing 6 60 lower noise figure using internal preamplifier 3 3 low level signals 4 22 reducing attenuation 4 22 reducing resolution bandwidth 4 24 reducing video bandwidth 4 26 video averaging 4 28 MAIN COIL DR 6 5 6 87 Main Menu time gate utility 6 87 MAIN SPAN 6 5 6 87 making a measurement 2 17 19 MAN TRK ADJUST 5 19 6 88 manuals extra user s and calibration guide Option 910 9 6 installation see User s Guide 9 6 operation see User s Guide 9 6 verification see Calibration Guide 9 6 manual tracking adjustment 6 88 marker delta display line 6 142 Index 17 FFT 6 71 gate utility trigger 6 148 list of 6 96 menu of controls 6 98 menu of functions 6 98 selection 6 127 table 6 96 time gate utility 6 93 trace selection 6 97 zeroing delta marker in the gate utility 6 154 MARKER A 4 18 6 89 MARKER A SPAN 6 90 MARKER ALL OFF 6 92 MARKER AMPTD 6 92 marker counter 4 9 6 95 resolution 6 43 use with time gated capability 5 34 marker delta 4 18 marker functions 2 5 marker noise 6 96 use with time gated capability 5 34 MARKER NORMAL 2 19 6 93 MARKER ON 6 93 marker pause 6 96 dwell time 6 57 marker readout modes 6 96 MARKER AUTO FFT 6 90 MARKER CF 6 90 MARKER CF STEP 6 90 MARKER FFT STOP 6 91 MARKER MID SCRN 6 91 MARKER MINIMUM 6 91 MARKER PK PK 4 19
177. ade in the recall buffer Adding new data into the keyboard line deletes the oldest data automatically When in command mode the active line will append a semicolon to the keyboard entry if the line does not end with a semicolon and it is fewer than 243 characters long 3 67 CAUTION External Keyboard Installation To Enter a Screen Title Using Spectrum Analyzer Features External Keyboard Using the External Keyboard The following three example procedures demonstrate how to use an external keyboard to enter a screen title programming commands and a prefix However a brief procedure on installing your external keyboard is described first More detailed information on using the external keyboard is found in the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide The cable TV analyzer must be turned off before connecting an external keyboard to the cable TV analyzer Failure to do so may result in loss of factory installed correction constants 1 Turn off the cable TV analyzer 2 Connect the cable TV analyzer rear panel connector EXT KEYBOARD to the HP C1405A Option ABA Keyboard 3 Press LINE to turn the cable TV analyzer on 4 The external keyboard is now ready to use for entering a screen title programming commands or a prefix Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information
178. agnostic function and is for service use Front Panel Key Access 10V REF DETECTOR displays the output of the 10 V reference from the A7 Analog Interface assembly as a horizontal line at the top graticule This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL 10V REF DETECTOR displays the output of the 10 V reference from the A7 Analog Interface assembly as a horizontal line at the bottom graticule This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL 6 6 2v REF DETECTOR 9 kHz EMI BW 120 kHz EMI BW 200 Hz EMI BW A lt gt B Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions displays the output of the 2 V reference produced on the A16 Processor Video assembly as a horizontal line at the top graticule This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL allows a 6 dB resolution bandwidth of 9 kHz This bandwidth is useful when performing electromagnetic interference EMI measurements Front Panel Key Access allows a 6 dB resolution bandwidth of 120 kHz This bandwidth is useful when performing electromagnetic interference EMI measurements Front Panel Key Access For Option 130 only allows a 6 dB resolution bandwidth of 200 Hz This bandwidth is useful when performing electromagnetic interference EMI measurements Front Panel Key
179. aking a stimulus response measurement care must be taken to maximize the tracking adjustment of the tracking generator to ensure maximum available dynamic range Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL TRIG accesses softkeys that let you select the sweep mode and trigger mode Also see Screen Annotation in Chapter 1 NOTE With some delayed trigger functions for example external or TV triggering the softkey menu is not updated until after the trigger has occurred TRIG MKR Option 107 only ON OFF activates a marker which indicates the time from the gate trigger to the current marker position The trigger marker is in the tune domain window of the gate utility It is turned off when the menu is exited or if another active function is activated Front Panel Key Access SWEEP 6 148 TV LINE TV Standard TV SYNC NEG POS TV TRIG Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions selects the line number of the video picture field The values allowed are 1 to 1012 sets the TV line number to 17 Front Panel Key Access TRIG allows the analyzer to trigger on the standard video formats NTSC PAL PAL M or SECAM L Front Panel Key Access selects the polarity of the modulation of the video format NTSC uses the negative or positive modulation video format NTSC PAL and PAL M use negative modulation SECAM L uses positive modulation Front Panel Key Access provides sweep
180. alyzer can display the time domain and the frequency domain simultaneously using two separate windows The user is able to adjust the time position of the gate closure relative to the input signal using interactive graphic tools in the gate utility The gate position relative to the signal is clearly shown in the time domain window The spectral effects corresponding to an adjustment of the gate time position are displayed in the frequency domain window Tools are provided to aid the user in determining the best gate position and optimizing the spectrum analyzer settings for the input signal CENTER 908 088 MHz 8 Hz RES BW 1 6 MHz VBW 4 MHz asur To A msec CENTER 900 MHz SPAN 1 888 GHz RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHz WSWP 36 8 msec L Figure 5 15 Time Gate Utility Display 5 28 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Gate Utility to Simplify Time Gated Measurements Option 107 only Gate utility features include e Displays time and frequency domains simultaneously e Measures continuously e Interactively controls and displays the gate s position in time e Optimizes spectrum analyzer settings for pulsed RF signals automatically The gate utility provides tools to make pulsed RF measurements easy If the user enters the pulse width pulse repetition interval and gate length the gate utility will automatically optimize the resolution bandwidth sweep time and video bandwidth for these pulse parameters Cou
181. alyzers with digital displays refer to digital display have markers that can be used to measure the signal As a result measurement differences are stored in memory and the ambiguity of the display is eliminated from the measurement display range The calibrated range of the display for a particular display mode or scale factor Refer also to linear display log display and scale factor Glossary 7 displayed average noise level The noise level viewed on the analyzer s display after narrowing the video bandwidth setting enough to reduce the peak to peak noise fluctuations The resulting noise display is essentially a straight line Usually this term refers to the analyzer s own internally generated noise as a measure of sensitivity It is typically specified in dBm under conditions of minimum resolution bandwidth and minimum input attenuation DLP The abbreviation for downloadable program A single programming command or a sequence of programming commands used to perform specific operations DLPs can be made up of several functions variables and traces defined by the program creator The DLP can be downloaded from one electronic storage medium into another and executed without a controller drift The slow relative to sweep time change of signal position on the display as a result of a change in local oscillator frequency versus sweep voltage While analyzer drift may require periodic retuning it does not impair frequency res
182. amplitude values into a limit line table The frequency or time and amplitude values specify a coordinate point from which a limit line segment is drawn The coordinate point is the lowest frequency or time point of the line segment Limit lines are constructed from left to right To select a segment press SELECT SEGMENT enter the segment number you wish to specify then press a units key Up to 20 segments can be specified per limit line table Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY 6 129 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions SELECT TIME allows you to enter the time value for a limit line segment The time value is with respect to the analyzer sweep time A time value of zero is the start of the sweep which is the left edge of the graticule Enter the time value by using the data keys Change the time value by using the step keys or the knob Press to correct errors NOTE Limit line data is sorted in time order in the limit line table The sorting occurs after you have entered the time and at least one amplitude value Front Panel Key Access SELECT TYPE accesses the softkey menu used to select the limit line type of line Press FLAT to select a flat line press SLOPE to select a sloped line or press POINT to select a point Front Panel Key Access SELECT UPR AMPL allows you to enter the amplitude value for the upper limit line segment Enter the amplitude value for the selected frequ
183. amplitude correction factors on or off Front Panel Key Access activates the reference level function and accesses the amplitude menu The softkeys accessed when you press AMPLITUDE change reference level input attenuation vertical scale mixer level amplitude units input impedance and amplitude offset accesses the softkeys that change the amplitude units The amplitude units can be changed by pressing dBm dBmV dBuV Volts or Watts Front Panel Key Access 6 13 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions ANALOG ON OFF 6 14 turns on the analog display mode This is a digital implementation of an analog display combining the advantages of both types of displays The display is made up of 401 horizontal points or trace elements In the analog display mode each trace element can display from 1 to 40 dots or measurements Pressing ANALOG ON OFF makes dot density the active function The dot density function sets the desired number of measurements per trace element Each dot requires an additional analog to digital conversion for each trace element so the sweep time can limit the actual number of dots available Lengthening the sweep time can increase the actual dot density Markers and marker functions as well as the screen text and title capabilities of a digital display are available along with the analog type trace information Some functions are not available with analog
184. and blanks the display The stored trace may be either A B or C Glossary 3 broadband response A signal whose spectrum is wider than the resolution bandwidth of an analyzer and whose repetition frequency is lower than the bandwidth of the analyzer Notice that it is a combination of signal and receiver characteristics that determines when a signal is classified as broadband For refining incoming signal responses select narrower spans and bandwidths Refer also to narrowband response The following checks can help verify whether or not the response is broadband e Change the resolution bandwidth The displayed amplitude should change e Change the sweep time The spacing of the responses on the display should change as you change the sweep time e Change the span The spacing of the responses should not change They should be independent of frequency span e Change the video bandwidth If the video bandwidth is made narrower than the resolution bandwidth the displayed amplitude of the responses should decrease card reader See memory card channel power A measure of the total mean power contained within a specified bandwidth The measured power is the combination of all discrete signals modulation and noise within the bandwidth character set The set of elementary symbols These normally include both alpha and numeric codes plus punctuation or any other symbol which may be read stored or written and used for organizat
185. and sets the status byte to 0 The last state of the analyzer before it was switched off is recalled unless IP has been set by the POWER ON function 6 112 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Table 6 10 Model Specific Preset Conditions Center Start Frequency Frequency Frequency He 8591 20 ms lauto coupled Table 6 11 Common Preset Conditions oft Amplitude correction factors off Amplitude units default values Annotation and graticule display on Attenuation 10 dBlauto coupled Center frequency Refer to Table 6 10 CF step size 10 of span Coupled functions all set to AUTO Mass storage device card or internal INTERNAL Detector positive peak Display line level 2 5 graticule divisions below reference level display off Frequency offset 0 Hz Limit line testing Off LIMIHI and LIMILO cleared Log scale 10 dB division Marker counter Off Marker counter resolution auto coupled Markers Off Mixer level 39 dBmV Operating mode analyzer Reference level 49 dBmV in power on units Reference level offset 0 dB Reference level position top 8th graticule Resolution bandwidth 3 MHz auto coupled Span Refer to Table 6 10 6 113 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Table 6 11 Common Preset Conditions continued SRO mask octal 50 art Frequency Refer to Table 6 10 op Frequency Refer to Table 6 10 ate regi
186. and then use CATALOG PREFIX Prefixed items can be saved in analyzer memory by either loading in from a memory card or using remote programming commands to define them Front Panel Key Access _or SAVE_ Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions CATALOG REGISTER NOTE displays the status of state and trace registers in analyzer memory States 1 through 8 are displayed with the center frequency denoted by CF and span denoted by SP The status of trace registers 0 to the maximum number of traces is displayed also If a trace limit line tables or amplitude correction factors have been saved in the trace register the screen title denoted by TL is displayed otherwise UNUSED is displayed If the screen title length allows or if no title is saved with the trace the time and date are displayed To load the contents of the state or trace register into analyzer memory use the knob or step keys to select the register and press LOAD FILE The DELETE FILE key can be used to delete a state or trace register from analyzer memory Do not use LOAD FILE to load the contents of a trace register containing limit line tables or amplitude correction factors CATALOG STATES CATALOG TRACES Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE catalogs all of the states stored on the memory card Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE catalogs all of the traces stored on the memory card Front
187. ange measurement units Trace information is stored in trace arrays made up of measurement units The measurement unit range is restricted to integers between 32 768 and 32 767 In a logarithmic scale a measurement unit is one hundredth of a dBm or represented mathematically as value in dBm x 100 measurement units As an example 10 115 dBm x 100 1012 measurement units not 1011 5 Measurement units for linear trace information are from zero for the bottom of the display to 10 000 for the top of the display or the reference level memory A storage medium device or recording medium into which data can be stored and held until some later time and from which the entire original data may be retrieved memory card A small credit card shaped memory device that can store data or programs The programs are sometimes called personalities and give additional capabilities to your instrument Typically there is only one personality per memory card Refer also to personality Glossary 16 menu The analyzer functions that appear on the display and are selected by pressing front panel keys These selections may evoke a series of other related functions that establish groups called menus narrowband response A response measured under conditions in which there is only one spectral component at a time in the passband of an analyzer s resolution filter This condition occurs for continuous wave signals and repetitive signals
188. ansformed The FFT results which are being displayed are always in LOG scale The carrier appears at the left edge of the graticule with the modulation sidebands and any distortion appearing along the horizontal axis The amplitude relationships of all the signals are the same as they would be if the components were displayed with normal swept tuned operation in log mode 10 dB per division 5 4 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function If the FFT stop frequency is less than the highest harmonic of the AM modulation than the FFT results may include aliased signals That is it will include some signals that are being displayed at the wrong frequency The sweep time affects the sample rate and must be optimized to avoid aliasing The single and continuous FFT functions require a specific spectrum analyzer setup before they can be activated First an AM signal is demodulated in the time domain In order to do this the resolution bandwidth is widened to include the signal sidebands within the passband of the spectrum analyzer Next zero span is selected so that the spectrum analyzer operates as a fixed tuned receiver Tuning is centered around the AM carrier The MARKER AUTO FFT softkey activates the FFT function with very little preliminary setup required Two examples of using the FFT function are included in this section e First example uses the manual
189. are active their values can be changed with the knob step keys or number units keypad Set the center frequency to 300 MHz with the DATA keys by pressing 300 MHz The knob and step keys can also be used to set the center frequency 5 Set the span Press SPAN SPAN is now displayed in the active function block and the SPAN softkey label appears in inverse video to indicate it is the active function Reduce the span to 20 MHz by using the knob pressing the down key or pressing 20 Mhz 6 Set the amplitude 2 17 Getting Started Making a Measurement When the peak of a signal does not appear on the screen it may be necessary to adjust the amplitude level on the screen Press AMPLITUDE REF LEVEL 48 8 dBmV appears in the active function block The REF LVL softkey label appears in inverse video to indicate that reference level is the active function The reference level is the top graticule line on the display and is set to 48 8 dBmV Changing the value of the reference level changes the amplitude level of the top graticule line If desired use the reference level function to place the signal peak on the screen using the knob step keys or number units keypad Marker functions determine the frequency and amplitude of a signal Figure 2 5 demonstrates the relationship between center frequency and reference level The box in the figure represents the cable TV analyzer screen Changing the center frequency changes
190. area on a display where user selected characters are displayed These characters are selected from the front panel keys Glossary 26 TOI Third order intermodulation distortion occurs in a system where two signals are present The distortion products are a result of each signal mixing with the other s second harmonic If the two main signals are of equal power the two third order distortion products will also be of equal power As the power of the two main signals is increased by an equal amount the power of the distortion products will increase three times that amount Theoretically there is a power level at which the power of each distortion product equals the power of the two main signals Practically it may not be possible to reach this power level because of compression or limiting The Third Order Intercept TOI is defined as the power at which the third order distortion products equals the power of two equal level test signals trace A trace is made up of a series of data points containing frequency and amplitude information The series of data points is often referred to as an array Traces A B and C are the typical names of traces that analyzer displays The number of traces is specific to the instrument units Dimensions on the measured quantities Units usually refer to amplitude quantities because they can be changed In analyzers with microprocessors available units are dBm GB relative to 1 mW milliwatt dissipated
191. arker counter o Description nd trace B between trace A end trace B into trace A between trace B and the display line in trace B B end then displays it continuously C and then displays it continuously he frequency domain using en FFT end off weep at the marker for the defined of the dwell time h the h the h the een A end B is added tothe display line end put into trace A 2 aximum level et each point each sweep 2 aximum level et each point each sweep inimum level at each point each sweep sest to the marker to center screen and keeps it centered al peak turns on marker track and activates span y to the active trace ch adjusts tracking to peak the tracking generator signal ch digitally averages display signals and noise e trace A data when used after blanking trace A e trace B data e trace C data Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY 6 15 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions ANALYZER ADDRESS ANALYZER GAINS ANNOTATN ON OFF APND CAT ITEM Option 021 only allows you to set the HP IB address of the analyzer The analyzer address is set to 18 by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG Front Panel Key Access displays the current value of the gain for various functional blocks within the analyzer The gain values will vary depending on the current analyzer settings This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Refer to the
192. arker on the 300 MHz calibration signal Press rrequency 300 MHz SPAN 200 MHz and PEAK SEARCH 2 Press MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF ON and the signal will move to the center of the screen if it is not already positioned there note that the marker must be on the signal Because the marker track function automatically maintains the signal at the center of the screen you can reduce the span quickly for a closer look If the signal drifts off of the screen as you decrease the span use a wider frequency span 3 Press SPAN 200 kHz The span decreases in steps as automatic zoom is completed See Figure 4 7 You can also use the knob or step keys to decrease the span or use the PEAK ZOOM function under SPAN Press MK TRACK ON OFF again so that OFF is underlined to turn off the marker track function NOTE When you are finished with the example turn off the marker tracking function Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Decreasing the Frequency Span Using the Marker Track Function 13 46 30 JUL 29 1993 MKA TAK 300 0010 MHZ REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 dB 28 64 dBmv PEAK SPAN 200 0 kHz CENTEA 300 0015 MHz SPAN 200 0 kHz RES BW 3 0 kHz VBW 3 kHz SWP 100 msec Figure 4 7 After Zooming In on the Signal Tracking Unstable Signals Using Marker Track and the Maximum Hold and Minimum Hold Functions The marker track function is useful for t
193. as outputs for either 115 V or 230 V and runs on its own internal battery an external battery or on another 12 V dc source Typical operating time exceeds 1 hour for 100 watt continuous use at room temperature 9 7 Options and Accessories Accessories External Keyboard The HP C1405A Option ABA 003 keyboard is an IBM AT compatible keyboard that can be connected to the external keyboard connector of the rear panel of the cable TV analyzer Screen titles and remote programming commands can be entered easily with the external keyboard HP IB Cable For use with O ption 021 The HP 10833 HP IB cables interconnect HP IB devices and are available in four different lengths HP IB cables are used to connect printers plotters and controllers to a cable TV analyzer An HP IB to Centronics converter is available to allow your HP IB cable TV analyzer to use Centronics parallel printers These include the HP 922035 HP IB to Centronics converter for use in the U S and Canada and the HP 922035 HP IB to Centronics converter for international use 9 8 Options and Accessories Accessories Memory Cards Blank memory cards are available for the storage and transfer of data and programs Several different sizes of cards are available for use with the memory card reader See Table 9 1 Table 9 1 Model Number Size of Memory Card HP 85700A HP 85702A HP 85704A HP 85705A Plotter The HP ColorPro 7440A graphics plott
194. asurement procedures in this section explain how to use the time gate capability without the convenience of the Gate Utility The Gate Utility provides the user with simultaneous displays of the frequency and time domain to assist in setting up and manipulating the time gate See Using the Gate Utility To Simplify Time Gated Measurements for information about using the Gate Utility All the Gate Utility keys are listed under the key in the key menu in Chapter 7 Descriptions of the different Gate Utility functions are found in Chapter 6 This section provides the following information Introduces the time gated spectrum analyzer capability Explains how to view a pulsed RF signal Explains how to use the self calibration routines Explains how to perform a functional check of the time gated spectrum analyzer capability NOTE For more information about how to use the time gated spectrum analyzer capability with other types of signals see Product Note 8590 2 Also see the descriptions of individual functions in Chapter 6 5 33 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Introducing the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability As the spectrum analyzer takes a measurement sweep it displays a specific frequency as it sweeps across the frequency range of the spectrum analyzer Since signals can vary in tune the spectrum analyz
195. ated distortion For some analyzers changing the input attenuator settings changes the vertical position of the signal on the display which then changes the reference level accordingly In Hewlett Packard microprocessor controlled analyzers the IF gain is changed to compensate for changes in input attenuator settings Because of this the signals remain stationary on the display and the reference level is not changed input impedance The terminating impedance that the analyzer presents to the signal source The nominal impedance for RF and microwave analyzers is usually 500 For some systems such as cable TV 750 is standard The degree of mismatch between the nominal and actual input impedance is called the VSWR voltage standing wave ratio interface The point at which different parts of a system interact Also the point at which operators and instruments interact intermodulation distortion Undesired frequency components resulting from the interaction of two or more spectral components passing through a device having nonlinear behavior such as a mixer or an amplifier The undesired components are related to the fundamental components by sums and differences of the fundamentals and various harmonics The algorithm is fit fo 2x fit fo 2x fotfi 3x fr 2x fo and so on Glossary 13 limit line A test limit made up of a series of line segments positioned according to frequency and amplitude within the analyzer measurement range T
196. ation routine menus The last softkey on this menu labeled More 1 of 4 provides access to additional self calibration functions For more detailed information on the self calibration softkeys refer to Chapter 6 The self calibration routines add correction factors to internal circuitry The addition of the correction factors is required to meet frequency and amplitude specifications When the correction factors are added to internal circuitry CORR corrected appears on the left side of the screen Warm Up Time In order for the cable TV analyzer to meet its specifications allow the cable TV analyzer to warm up for 30 minutes after being turned on before attempting to make any calibrated measurements Be sure to calibrate the cable TV analyzer only after it has met operating temperature conditions The cable TV analyzer frequency and amplitude self calibration routines are initiated by the CAL FREQ amp AMPTD softkey in the menu located under the CAL key 1 To calibrate the instrument connect the cable TV analyzer CAL OUT to the INPUT 75 Q connector with an appropriate cable NOTE A low loss cable should be used for accurate calibration Use the 75 Q cable shipped with the cable TV analyzer Getting Started Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines 2 On the cable TV analyzer press and CAL FREQ amp AMPTD Cal signal not found will be displayed if CAL OUT is not connected to the cable TV analyzer input Th
197. ation routines have successfully completed press CAL STORE Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only 5 Press CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 Service Diag DISPLAY CAL DATA then NEXT PAGE 6 Verify that the number displayed for GATE in the lower left corner is between 0 98 and 1 0 See Figure 5 28 DISPLAY TUNING CAL BATA CAL 3080880000 Sweepsens 18M 0 600180907 ZERO 180578240 Sweepsens Wide 9 800062005 FAST 54025597 Main Coil Sens 897299635 MED 1065151772 FM Coilsens Er 951642036 SLOW 21294280 Wide Disc Err 2 662021637 STP GAIN PrOfst 44 Wadse slope 8 889589743 OACS TCXO 128 EYO a Slope 5E 10 ZERO Last Cal Freq ii 48 50 JUL 30 1993 Last Cal Amp 11 22 53 JUL 30 1993 ANALYZER FH DEMODULATION GAINS ZERO B SLOPE 16914 AUXB Narrow BH 4803 Wide BH 1739 GATE 1 000000000 Figure 5 28 Self Calibration Data Results If the number is not between 0 98 and 1 0 check that the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector is not connected to anything then repeat the previous steps of this procedure 7 Press PRESET 5 55 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Performing a Functional Check of the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Option 107 To check that the time gated spectrum analyzer cap
198. be viewed and copied Before recalling a display that was saved under a prefix other than the current prefix change the current prefix to the prefix used when the display was saved The intensity of some screen items may differ if the current analyzer state does not match the state of the recalled image This will not affect the analyzer ability to output a copy of the screen It is possible to have more functionality than just viewing and copying a recalled display image For example you can set the analyzer to the identical window configuration as when the display was saved Then recall the trace that corresponds to the display image This will restore the trace and state information Finally you can recall the display image At this point markers and display line can be used to examine the data If an attempt is made to update the trace data the display will be erased and redrawn to reflect the current instrument state Pressing LOAD FILE is an alternate way to load display image from the memory card into analyzer memory See Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card in Chapter 3 for more information Front Panel Key Access RECALL 6 23 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions CARD DLP CARD STATE 6 24 recalls into the analyzer memory a downloadable program DLP saved on the memory card Before recalling data that was saved under a prefix other than the current p
199. ber Numeric entries must be terminated with a units key The units keys change the active function in a manner prescribed by that function For example the units keys for frequency span are GHz MHz kHz and Hz whereas the units for reference level are GdBmvV dBmvV mv and wv NOTE If an entry from the number units keypad does not coincide with an allowed function value for example that of a 12 MHz bandwidth the cable TV analyzer defaults to the nearest allowable value The step keys allow discrete increases or decreases of the active function value The step size depends upon the cable TV analyzer measurement range or on a preset amount Each press results in a single step change For those parameters with fixed values the next value in a sequence is selected each time a step key is pressed Changes are predictable and can be set for some functions Out of range values or out of sequence values will not occur using these keys Fine Focus Control Getting Started Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer The fine focus control is located on the side of the cable TV analyzer Use the following procedure to adjust the fine focus control 1 Adjust the front panel intensity control for a comfortable viewing intensity 2 Use an adjustment tool or small screwdriver to access the fine focus adjustment See Figure 2 3 Adjust for a focused display FINE FOCUS ADJUSTMENT
200. c Figure 3 9 Analog Display Mode Example Use the analog display mode to look at the calibrator signal 1 Connect the CAL OUT signal to the cable TV analyzer s INPUT 75 Q Press PRESET FREQUENCY START FREQ 0 Hz STOP FREQ 1 5 GHz 2 Press and ANALOG ON OFF ON to turn on the analog display mode Use the knob step keys or the data entry keys to change the DOT DENSITY 3 Press to activate a marker and use the knob to move it 4 Press DISPLAY Then press ANALOG ON OFF to underline OFF to turn the analog display off NOTE Limit lines can be used to test data on an analog display but they cannot be displayed Learn About the Windows Display Windows display mode splits the cable TV analyzer display into two frequency or time displays When windows is first turned on the top window will contain an inactive copy of the previous display The lower window will be active and will display a subset of the frequency span of the upper window The span of the lower window will be indicated on the upper window by two vertical lines called zone markers The zone markers can be moved using the zone center and zone span softkeys to look at different portions of the upper window span The instrument state of the active window can be changed without affecting the state of the inactive window The state of the active window will be used as the state of the cable TV analyzer for sweeping and updating trace data
201. can be changed using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad Front Panel Key Access auto COUPLE or RPG TITLE SAV LOCK ON OFF NOTE Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions provides additional characters for the Change Title function Pressing RPG TITLE provides lowercase letters numbers Greek letters and punctuation symbols When RPG TITLE is pressed a character table appears on the screen To select a character turn the knob to position the cursor under the desired character and press the key The step keys move the cursor between rows When all characters have been entered press WINDOWS NEXT All other analyzer functions are unaccessible until the NEXT or key is pressed Front Panel Key Access CAL or locks all the current internal state and trace registers against further data storage when ON is underlined With the state and trace memory locked the STATE INTRNL and Trace Intrnil softkey functions are no longer accessible the MEM LOCKED softkey function is displayed instead Pressing DEFAULT CONFIG or sets SAV LOCK ON OFF to OFF When SAV LOCK ON OFF is set to ON none of the state registers 1 8 can be overwritten The analyzer automatically updates state register nine with the last state ERASE MEM ALL ignores the state of the SAV LOCK So even if STATES and TRACES are locked they will still be erased by ERASE MEM ALL Front Panel Key Access 6
202. card See Figure 2 8 The first number indicates the year the following two characters indicate the month and the following number indicates the week in the month that the memory card battery was installed For example 80C3 indicates the battery was installed in the third week in October in 1988 2 28 Procedure to Change the Memory Card Battery CAUTION Getting Started Memory Card Insertion and Battery Replacement pul2ic Figure 2 8 Memory Card Battery Date Code location The battery is located beside the card s write protect switch on the end opposite the connector The battery power enables the memory card s memory to retain data You can lose the data when the battery is removed Replace the battery while the card is installed in a powered up instrument 1 Locate the groove along the edge of the battery clip See Figure 2 9 2 Gently pry the battery clip out of the card The battery fits within this clip 3 Replace the battery making sure the plus sign on the battery is on the same side as the plus sign on the clip 4 Insert the battery clip into the memory card holding the clip as oriented in Figure 2 9 Face the open edge of the clip toward the write protect switch on the memory card 5 Write the date that the battery was replaced on the memory card label This will help you to remember when the battery should be replaced Getting Started Memory Card Insertion and Battery Repla
203. ce points about the marker the number depends on the type of analyzer are averaged and this average value is normalized to an equivalent value in a Hz noise power bandwidth The normalization process accounts for detection and bandwidth plus the effect of the log amplifier when we select the log display mode noise sidebands Modulation sidebands that indicate the short term instability of the local oscillator primarily the first local oscillator system of an analyzer The modulating signal is noise in the local oscillator circuit itself or in the local oscillator stabilizing circuit and the sidebands comprise a noise spectrum The mixing process transfers any local oscillator instability to the mixing products so the noise sidebands appear on any spectral component displayed on the analyzer far enough above the broadband noise floor Because the sidebands are noise their level relative to a spectral component is a function of resolution bandwidth Noise sidebands are typically specified in terms of dBc Hz amplitude in a 1 Hz bandwidth relative to the carrier at a given offset from the carrier the carrier being a spectral component viewed on the display nonvolatile memory Memory data that is retained in the absence of an ac power source This memory is typically retained with a battery Refer also to battery backed RAM occupied bandwidth A measure of the frequency bandwidth occupied by the carrier of a transmitter It is usually t
204. cement BATTERY CLIP GROOVE C WRITE PROTECT SWITCH BATTERY SLOT ou125 Figure 2 9 Memory Card Battery Replacement 2 30 Analyzer Battery Information The HP 8591C cable TV analyzers use a 3 6 V lithium battery to enable the cable TV analyzer memory to retain data The date when the battery was installed is on a label on the rear panel of the cable TV analyzer See Figure 2 10 The minimum life expectancy of the battery is 8 years at 25 C or 1 year at 55 C If you experience problems with the battery or the recommended time period for battery replacement has elapsed see How to Return Your Analyzer for Service in Chapter 8 If you wish to replace the battery yourself you can purchase the service documentation that provides all necessary test and maintenance information The battery is soldered onto the cable TV analyzer processor board You can order the service documentation for an HP 8591C cable TV analyzer through your HP Sales and Service office The documentation is described under Service Documentation Option 915 in Chapter 9 of this manual After replacing the cable TV analyzer battery write the date of battery replacement on the rear panel label BATTERY LIFE 8 YEARS AT 25 C A s 1 YEAR AT 55 C INSTALLED oul32e Figure 2 10 Rear Panel Battery Information label Using Spectrum Analyzer Features What You ll Learn in This Chapter Using Spectrum Analyzer Features
205. ces limit line tables amplitude correction factors can be recalled from analyzer memory When CARD is selected states traces limit line tables and amplitude correction factors display images and downloadable programs can be recalled from the memory card In addition pressing RECALL accesses the cataloging functions used to catalog the saved data that is in analyzer memory or on the memory card It also accesses the DLP editor utility recalls an amplitude correction factors table from the current mass storage device analyzer memory or memory card To verify the current mass storage device press RECALL AMP COR If MAX REG appears on the analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press or RECALL then INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device To recall an amplitude correction factors table enter the register number that the table was previously saved under then press ENTER When recalling an amplitude correction factors table from the memory card it may be necessary to change the current prefix to the prefix with which the table was stored Press Change Prefix to change the current prefix When saved in analyzer memory the register number is restricted to the range between O and the number x indicated by MAX REG x The screen title is not recalled with the amplitude correction factors table Front Pan
206. cillator distribution amplifier is not functioning properly H LOCK OFF Indicates slow YTO tuning This message may appear if the cable TV analyzer is using default correction factors If this message appears constantly perform the CAL FREQ routine to try to eliminate this message LOCK OFF appears briefly during the CAL FREQ routine during instrument preset or when the frequency value is changed this is normal and does not indicate a problem U and H Marker Count Reduce SPAN Indicates the resolution bandwidth to span ratio is too small to use the marker count function Check the span and resolution bandwidth settings U If You Have a Problem Error Messages Marker Count Widen RES BW Indicates that the current resolution bandwidth setting is too narrow to use with the marker counter function The marker counter function can be in narrow resolution bandwidths bandwidths that are less than 1 kHz with the following procedure 1 Place the marker on the desired signal 2 Increase the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz and verify the marker is on the signal peak 3 If the marker in on the signal peak the marker count function can be used in either the 1 kHz resolution bandwidth or the original narrow resolution bandwidth setting If the marker is not on the signal peak it should be moved to the signal peak and the marker counter function should not be used with a resolution bandwidth setting of less than 1 kHz
207. create amplitude correction data Disconnect any cable on the cable TV analyzer input 2 Set the center frequency to 300 MHz and the span to 500 MHz by pressing 300 500 3 Press CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 More 3 of 4 then Amp Cor to access the amplitude correction menus Press Edit Amp Cor to access the editing menus for amplitude correction factors 5 To clear any existing amplitude correction data press PURGE AMP COR two times consecutively Using Spectrum Analyzer Features learn How to Enter Amplitude Correction Factors NOTE After pressing PURGE AMP COR the first time the message If you are sure press key again to purge data will appear Pressing PURGE AMP COR a second time erases the amplitude correction data 6 Specify the first amplitude correction point by pressing the following keys SELECT FREQ 50 m 8 Gm 7 Specify the second amplitude correction point by pressing the following keys 250 6 NOTE Table entries can be edited if you make a mistake To edit an existing point use SELECT POINT to specify the point Then use SELECT FREQ or SELECT AMPLITUD to specify the entry that you wish to edit 8 Specify the third and fourth amplitude correction points by using the following key sequence 300 HED 11 GE 350 MHz 18 dmv Using Spectrum Analyzer Features learn How to Enter Amplitude Correction Factors
208. creen The signal peak must be below the reference level The signal amplitude moves up and down because the spectrum analyzer catches the signal at different points of modulated amplitude each time it sweeps Change the amplitude scale to linear by pressing_ ameuitupe and SCALE LOG LIN so that LIN is underlined The FFT will give incorrect results when the spectrum analyzer is in Log mode Press REF LVL and place the signal peak within the top division of the screen Press SPAN 0 Hz The spectrum analyzer now operates as a fixed tuned receiver 5 6 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function 9 Press MEAS USER FFT Menu and CONTINUS FFT The spectrum analyzer will now be taking FFTs continuously updating the measurement at the end of every sweep Press FFT STOP FREQ 250 Hz This sets the spectrum analyzer to include the fourth harmonic of the 60 Hz modulation signal on the screen 10 To confirm that the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth are correct for measuring the modulation amplitude use the following procedure a Press and use the knob to move the marker to the desired modulation signal In this example place the marker on the 60 Hz fundamental modulation signal b Press and decrease the resolution bandwidth using the J key until measured signal amplitude drops Then press f to increase the bandwidth until the sig
209. creen annotation When the span is equal to 0 Hz the displayed bandwidth is used Front Panel Key Access turns the AM or FM demodulation on and off If the analyzer is in a nonzero span a marker is placed at center screen if an on screen marker is not already present The marker pause is changed to equal the current dwell time value Demodulation takes place on any signal that is indicated by the marker position during the marker pause There is no change to the display during marker pause but the demodulation signal is present on the AUX VIDEO OUT Also see the SPEAKER ON OFF softkey description Pressing DEMOD ON OFF selects the sample peak detector for AM demodulation the FMV detector for FM demodulation If the analyzer is in zero span demodulation is done continuously with or without an on screen marker Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL selects the HP DeskJet 310 or 550C for color printing Use this function if you have one of these color printers This softkey can be accessed by pressing CONFIG then Set Colr Printer Front Panel Key Access CONFIG DETECTOR PK SP NG DISPLAY CAL DATA Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions selects between positive peak sample and negative peak detection When sample detection is selected SMPL appears in the upper left corner of the screen In sample mode the instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed in memo
210. cting the Frequency Press SELECT FREQ then enter a frequency value for the point Coordinate NOTE Only two entries per frequency are used If more points with the same frequency are entered only the first and last entries are used All other amplitude values are ignored See Figure 3 13 for an example of two entries at the same frequency NOTE When entering amplitude correction data the frequency and amplitude values will be listed as asterisks gt until new values are entered Once the frequency value is entered the segment is immediately sorted into the table according to this value Selecting the Amplitude The amplitude value is entered by pressing SELECT AMPLITUD entering an Coordinate amplitude value and pressing a units key NOTE Frequency or amplitude values that are not within range will be modified For example a frequency value of 3 GHz will be modified to 1 9 GHz 3 63 Completing Table Entry and Activating Amplitude Corrections Saving or Recalling Amplitude Correction Tables Using Spectrum Analyzer Features learn How to Enter Amplitude Correction Factors Pressing EDIT DONE blanks the amplitude correction table from the screen and accesses the menu with AMP COR ON OFF Pressing AMP COR ON OFF turns the amplitude corrections on and off Pressing Amp Cor under the DISPLAY key accesses SAVE AMP COR and RECALL AMP COR These softkey functions provide an easy way to save or recall current a
211. ction factors and then press PURGE AMP COR to clear the current amplitude correction factors table Front Panel Key Access clears the current limit line table from analyzer memory Pressing PURGE LIMITS displays the message If you are sure press key again to purge data Press PURGE LIMITS again if you wish to clear the current limit line table Press SAVE LIMIT to save the current limit line table and then press PURGE LIMITS to clear the current limit line table Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY PWRGRAPH ON OFF PWR SWP ON OFF Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions turns the channel power graph ON or OFF With the PWRGRAPH ON the channel powergraph is calculated and displayed and the numeric results are not displayed The value of the channel power is displayed at the selected marker frequency This graph function is used after doing a channel power measurement with the CHANNEL POWER softkey Front Panel Key Access option 011 only activates ON or deactivates OFF the power sweep function which sweeps the output power of the tracking generator over the selected power sweep range The value of the power sweep range is displayed in the active function block when PWR SWP ON OFF is turned on The available power sweep range is a function of the source attenuator setting For power sweeps press SRC ATN MAN AUTO until MAN is underlined so the analyzer source attenuator is manually
212. ctions can be used to manipulate the marker to indicate the location of the reference edge Pressing DONE returns to the previous menu and makes the current value of the marker the reference edge It also restores the time domain window to the state prior to any adjustments made during entry of the reference edge Front Panel Key Access SWEEP accesses the menu for entering the value of the pulse width Press MARKER ON to activate a delta marker The other menu functions can be used to manipulate the marker to indicate the pulse width value Pressing DONE returns to the previous menu and makes the current value of the marker the pulse width It also restores the time domain window to the state prior to any adjustments made during entry of the pulse width Front Panel Key Access SWEEP 6 64 ERASE DLP MEM NOTE Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions allows you to dispose of the DLPs all traces defined by TRDEF and all VAREF variables that are in analyzer memory Press Dispose User Mem then press ERASE DLP MEM which causes the message to appear on the analyzer screen If you are sure Press key again to purge data Press ERASE DLP MEM again if you want to dispose of the DLPs in memory Press any other softkey if you do not want to dispose of the DLPs in memory Use DHUETER HILE to selectively delete stored programs or variables from analyzer memory ERASE MEM ALL Front
213. ctrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions allows you to purge all the user state registers 1 through 9 Press Dispose User Mem then press ERASE STATEALL which causes the message to appear on the analyzer screen If you are sure Press key again to purge data Press ERASE STATEALL again if you want to dispose of the user state registers Press any other softkey if you do not want to dispose of user state registers e If SAVE LOCK ON OFF is set to ON this function is disabled e Use DELETE FILE to selectively delete stored programs or variables from analyzer memory ERASE TRACEALL Front Panel Key Access CONFIG allows you to purge all the user trace registers 0 through TRCMEM Press Dispose User Mem then press ERASE TRACEALL which causes the message to appear on the analyzer screen If you are sure Press key again to purge data Press ERASE TRACEALL again if you want to dispose of the user trace registers Press any other softkey if you do not want to dispose of user state registers 6 67 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions NOTE e If SAVE LOCK ON OFF is set to ON this function is disabled e Use DELETE FILE to selectively delete stored programs or variables from analyzer memory EP L 570 SML LRG EP MX80 SML LRG 6 68 Front Panel Key Access CONFIG sets the analyzer to be compatible with an Epson LQ 570 compatible printer Press
214. cy is selected It is labeled START TIME when time is selected The LIMITS FIX REL key selects the type of limit line There are two types of limit lines fixed and relative Fixed limit lines contain only absolute amplitude and frequency or time values Relative limit lines consist of frequency values that are referenced to the cable TV analyzer s center frequency and amplitude values that are relative to the analyzer s reference level The relative setting does not affect time values They always begin at the left edge of the graticule As an example fixed versus relative limit lines if a limit line is specified as fixed entering a limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz displays the limit line segment at 300 MHz If the same limit line table is specified as relative it is displayed relative to the cable TV analyzer s center frequency and reference level If the center frequency is at 1 2 GHz a relative limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz will display the limit line segment at 1 5 GHz If the amplitude component of a relative limit line segment is 10 dB and the cable TV analyzer s reference level is 15 dB then 10 dB is added to the reference level value and the amplitude component of the limit line will be at 25 dB RELATIVE is displayed in the limit line table when the limit line type is relative FIXED is displayed when the limit line type is fixed A limit line entered as fixed
215. cy range of the analyzer The zone markers will be displayed at the edges of the upper window when the zone is moved beyond the displayed frequency range Front Panel Key Access WINDOWS searches for the next frequency peak outside and to the left of the zone markers on the upper window trace and then moves the zone so that it is centered around the new peak The zone span is not changed The center frequency of the lower window changes to reflect the new zone center frequency The lower window will not be updated until it is made active If no peak is found the zone will not be moved A signal must have a 6 dB peak excursion to be identified as a peak signal The definition of a peak excursion can be changed by selecting PEAK EXCURSN while the upper window is active Pressing ZONE PK LEFT will have no effect if the upper window is in zero span Front Panel Key Access WINDOWS 6 155 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions PK RIGHT ZONE SPAN searches for the next frequency peak outside and to the right of the zone markers on the upper window trace and then moves the zone so that it is centered around the new peak The zone span is not changed The center frequency of the lower window changes to reflect the new zone center frequency The lower window will not be updated until it is made active If no peak is found the zone will not be moved A signal must have a 6 dB peak excursion to be iden
216. d the spectrum analyzer continues to provide a running average based on this set number 10 36 24 JUL 30 1993 4 MKR 100 15 MHZ REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 cB 4 75 dBmV SMPL ON OFF DETECTOR PK SP NG VIDEO AVG 25 NORML IZE ON OFF NORML IZE POSITION A lt gt B More E 2of3 CENTER 100 15 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz RES BW 100 KHz VBW 30 KHZ SWP 20 0 msec Figure 4 19 Using the Video Averaging Function 4 29 Identifying Distortion Products Using the RF Attenuator and Traces Distortion from the Analyzer High level input signals may cause spectrum analyzer distortion products that could mask the real distortion measured on the input signal Using trace B and the RF attenuator you can determine which signals if any are internally generated distortion products 15 38 14 AUG 26 1993 2 3EF 48 B dBmv AT 10 48 DEAK REF LVL ATTEN JAUTO MAN SCALE LOG LIN INT AMP ON OFF 4 ZENTER 400 0 MHZ SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 3 0 MHZ VBW 1 MHZ SWP 20 O msec Figure 4 20 Harmonic Distortion 4 30 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Made Identifying Distortion Products Using the RF Attenuator and Traces Example Using a signal from a signal generator determine whether the harmonic distortion products are generated by t
217. d by a complete and detailed description Brief descriptions for service functions have also been included in this chapter However for more detailed descriptions and information about the use of each function refer to the service guide for your instrument A listing of all service calibration and service diagnostic functions has been provided in the following Service Functions section All softkeys and their relationship to the front panel keys are shown in Chapter 7 6 2 Service Functions Two types of functions are available for service use only e Service calibration functions e Service diagnostic functions These service functions are designed for service use only However brief descriptions for each function are provided in this chapter For more detailed descriptions and information about the use of each function refer to the service guide Service documentation can be obtained by ordering Option 915 through your HP Sales and Service office Option 915 is described in more detail under Chapter 9 Options and Accessories in this manual Service Calibration Functions Service Cal accesses the following service calibration softkeys CAL TIMEBASE EDIT FLATNESS EXECUTE TITLE EXIT Flatness Data IDNUM INIT FLT SET ATTN ERROR STOR PWR ON UNITS 6 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Service Functions Service Diagnostic Functions Service Diag accesses the following diagnostic softkeys L
218. d by using the video bandwidth and video averaging functions as demonstrated in the third and fourth examples Example If a signal is very close to the noise floor reducing input attenuation brings the signal out of the noise Reducing the attenuation to 0 dB maximizes signal power in the spectrum analyzer 4 22 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring low level Signals Using Attenuation Video Bandwidth and Video Averaging NOTE The total power of all input signals at the spectrum analyzer input must not exceed the maximum power level for the spectrum analyzer Connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input Press PRESET Reduce the frequency range to view a low level signal of interest For example narrow the frequency span from 88 MHz to 108 MHz by pressing rrequency START FREQ 88 MHz STOP FREQ 108 MHz Place a marker on the low level signal of interest Press and use the knob to position the marker at the signal s peak Place the signal at center frequency by pressing then MARKER gt CF Reduce the span to 10 MHz Press SPAN and then use the step down key Q See Figure 4 15 74 42 14 JUL 29 1993 Va MKR 100 15 MHz REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 GB 50 dBmv PEAK SPAN 10 00 MHz CENTER 100 415 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz RES BW 100 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 20 0 msec Figure 4 15 low level Signal 4
219. d if positive video modulation is required Front Panel Key Access TRIG 6 105 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions PAL M PARAM AUTOMAN PEAK EXCURSN allows you to trigger on the PAL M video format PAL M alters the TV line number the analyzer triggers on internally the line number displayed by TV LINE does not change PAL M changes the video modulation to negative use TV SYNC NEG POS POS if positive video modulation is required Front Panel Key Access lets the user choose between automatically or manually setting the parameters used for the measurement functions under the Power Menu softkey Parameters such as span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth center frequency step size detector mode and sweep time are coupled so that they are automatically updated With AUTO underlined when channel bandwidth or channel spacing are changed the coupled parameters will be updated and another sweep will be taken and measured If MAN is underlined the user must set all of the parameters correctly Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER sets the minimum amplitude variation of signals that the marker can identify as a peak If a value of 10 dB is selected the marker moves only to peaks that rise and fall more than 10 dB above the threshold line or the noise floor of the display Pressing or turning on power resets the excursion to 6 dB and the threshold to 70 dB below the reference
220. d variables and programs from analyzer memory changing the analyzer address or the baud rate displaying the installed options on screen and changing the format of the MONITOR output Pressing will clear an SRQ error message from the screen Pressing after the analyzer has been placed in the remote mode places the analyzer in the local mode and enables front panel control During remote operation an R appears in the lower right corner of the screen indicating remote mode Pressing removes the R annotation from the lower right corner sets the functions in the Power Menu so that they make the measurement at the end of every sweep After a power measurement is activated pressing CONT MEAS or SWEEP CONT puts the analyzer into a continuous sweep mode and recalculates the results at the end of each sweep Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER CONTINUS FFT Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions initializes the fast Fourier transform FFT function puts the analyzer in continuous sweep and performs an FFT at the end of each sweep If the FFT function is already active it puts the analyzer in continuous sweep and performs FFTS After using the FFT function the display is in log mode The markers are put in the FFT mode for use in evaluating the data The signal being transformed is in trace A and the Fourier transform of the signal is in trace B Any information that was in trace B and C will be lost Pr
221. data The results are displayed in a 13 dB per division format The extended ACP function does not provide a continuous measurement mode Example Measure the adjacent channel power of a signal 1 Connect a signal to the spectrum analyzer s INPUT 75 Q 2 Press rrequency and enter the frequency of your input signal to place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency 3 Press AMPLITUDE_ and adjust the reference level to bring the signal near the top of the display 5 70 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements 4 Press MEAS USER and Power Menu to access the power measurement functions 5 Press Setup and CHANNEL BANDWDTH Enter the value for the channel bandwidth 6 Press CHANNEL SPACING Enter the value for the channel spacing The spectrum analyzer will use the last entered values for channel bandwidth and spacing if they are not entered 7 Press Previous Menu to return to the main power menu 8 Press ADJ CHAN POWER to activate the function Wp REF 15 0 dBmv AT 10 dB ie SMPL fano CHAN FOWEA MEAS Pwr 15 5 dBmv ow 48 0 0B i f up adio og A MNO bo 00 CONT Hh alt B Wena 6 00 MEAS AE oe tii l FREG il ACPGRAPH ON OFF Setup a aE Mil i PNA Meny CENTER 825 03000 MHz SPAN 79 47 kHz RES BW 1 0 KHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 300 msec Spevious Figure 5 36 Ad
222. e 4 3 Resolving Small Signals Hidden by Large Signals Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function 4 6 Increasing the Frequency Readout Resolution Using the Marker Counter Wik on Gk ae Bs aie gn oe ee 4 4 9 Decreasing the Frequency Span Using the Marker Track Function ssa 2 Pes we we ee Bee erly a 4 11 Tracking Unstable Signals Using Marker Track and the Maximum Hold and Minimum Hold Functions 4 13 Comparing Signals Using Delta Markers 4 18 Measuring Low Level Signals Using Attenuation Video Bandwidth and Video Averaging 4 22 Identifying Distortion Products Using the RF Attenuator ahd Traces i a ae CE Rye ok ee WR a a N N 4 30 Distortion from the Analyzer 4 30 Third Order Intermodulation Distortion 4 34 Using the Analyzer As a Receiver in Zero Frequency Span 4 37 5 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode What You ll Learn in This Chapter 5 2 Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function 5 3 Stimulus Response Measurements 5 12 What Are Stimulus Response Measurements 5 12 Using a Spectrum Analyzer With a Tracking Generator 5 14 Stepping through the Measurement 5 15 Tracking Generator Unleveled Condition 5 22 Demodulating and Listening to an AM or FM Signal 5 23 Triggering on a Selected Line of a Video Picture Field 5 26 Using the Gate Utility to Simplify Time Gated Measurements
223. e 6 4 See Figure 6 3 Table 6 4 CATALOG ON EVENT Display Description Programming Description of CATALOG ON EVENT Display Command ONCYCLE The number of seconds left until the event occurs followed by the umber of seconds ONCYCLE was set for ONDELYY CATALOG 0 EVENT displays either a positive number or egative number of seconds A positive number indicates the number of seconds left until the event occurs A negative number indicates the umber of seconds that has passed since the event occurred ONTIME The date finyear month and day format and the time in 24 hour ormat that ONTIME is set for Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE 6 32 CATALOG PREFIX Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions we REF dBm ATTEN 18 dB PEAK Jon EVENTS eee LOG UNDEFINED 1 0 ONSWP UNDEFI NEO dB TRMATH UNDEF INED ONCYCLE N 86244 SEC ON CYCLE OF 86400 SEC ONDELAY IN 125 SEC ONMKR ACTI UE ONSRQ UNDEFINED DELETE ONTIME AT DATE 981861 AT TIME 99 08 80 SELECT PREFX EXIT CATALOG PREV MENU CENTER 1 200 GHz SPAN 1 800 GHz RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 20 msec RT Figure 6 3 CATALOG ON EVENT Display catalogs all of the saved data that has the specified prefix that is either on the memory card or in analyzer memory The entire prefix does not have to be specified For example if you want to catalog all the Eles beginning with the prefix S specify S as the prefix
224. e MARKER NORMAL softkey read marker to accesses the softkeys used for the transfer of marker information directly into other functions accesses the marker function softkeys These softkeys can be used to access the marker table and to turn on marker functions for tracking the signal and counting its frequency Noise markers and the marker pause function are also accessed under MKR FCTN accesses the softkey menu for selecting screen title or prefix characters M through R Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or SAVE changes the softkey menus for the spectrum analyzer mode and other modes of operation when SPECTRUM ANALYZER located under and PRESET SPECTRUM are selected respectively Other modes are available using the downloadable measurement personalities The HP 8572 1A cable television measurements personality is an example of these modes Consult the documentation accompanying the personality for information about these other modes of operation N dB PTS ON OFF NEW EDIT Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions automatically places two markers at points N dB from the highest point on the highest displayed signal and determines the frequency difference between the two markers N dB is the active function and the value of N is set by the user The measurement defaults to 3 dB when it is first turned on The measurement runs continuously re ex
225. e OF 3 3 9 To Save a Trace ooa a a A aad Te ete SOE 3 10 To Recall a Trace 1 1 ee ee 3 11 To Save a Limit Line Table or Amplitude Correction Factors e eos t senei m eee sa 3 12 To Recall Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors pei acme 8H pat 3 13 To Protect Data From Being Overwritten EE Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card 3 15 Contents 2 Preparing the Memory Card for Use 2 3 17 To Enter a Prefix 2 tank 0 ea a acct amp oe See 3 19 To Save a State 3 OR ee a oe 8s etary 3220 To Recall a State 3 4 48 2 oie a ee ee 3 2 To Save a Trace ae et 4G ed oe Bite aA N 3 22 To Recall a Trace oaa ane eee eee 23 To Save a Display Image eae bia 324 To Recall a Display Image we 3 25 To Save Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction FaCtOTS C8 eon arg ea we ete ae Ea Aia Badass 3 26 To Recall Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors 4015 oreda 2g lt a a aes GS 3 27 Saving and Recalling Programs with a Memory Card 3 28 To Save a Program pin bur Seat dee To Recall a Program fe rea 0 Using Limit Line Functions Bou ea w 99533 Procedure for Creating an Upper Limit Line 3 34 Limit Line Functions eu on D239 Editing Creating or Viewing a Limit Line 3 39 Selecting the Type of Limit Line Table 3 40 Selecting the Limit Line Table Format 3 41 Selecting the Segment Number
226. e amplitude of one signal is compared with the amplitude of another regardless of the absolute amplitude of either relative amplitude accuracy The uncertainty of an amplitude measurement in which the amplitude of one signal is compared with the amplitude of another regardless of the absolute amplitude of either Distortion measurements are relative measurements Contributors to uncertainty include frequency response and display fidelity and changes of input attenuation IF gain scale factor and resolution bandwidth relative marker mode The active marker is positioned relative to the position of the reference marker Marker readout shows amplitude frequency or time differences between the two markers Glossary 21 residual FM The inherent short term frequency instability of an oscillator in the absence of any other modulation In the case of analyzers we usually expand the definition to include the case where the local oscillator is swept Residual FM is usually specified in peak to peak values because they are most easily measured on the display if they are visible at all residual responses These are discrete responses seen on an analyzer display although no input signal is applied resolution Refer to frequency resolution resolution bandwidth The ability of an analyzer to display adjacent responses discretely hertz hertz decibel down This term is used to identify the width of the resolution bandwidth filter of an analy
227. e assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access 6 139 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions SWEEP TIME DAC SWP CPLG SR SA SWP TIME AUTO MAN displays the output of the sweep time DAC SWP_DAC from the sweep ramp generator that is on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access Option 011 only selects stimulus response SR or spectrum analyzer SA auto coupled sweep time In stimulus response mode auto coupled sweep times are usually much faster for swept response measurements Stimulus response auto coupled sweep times are typically valid in stimulus response measurements when the system s frequency span is less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under test Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL selects the length of time in which the analyzer sweeps the displayed frequency span In all non zero frequency spans the sweep time varies from 20 milliseconds to 100 seconds In zero frequency span the fastest sweep time is 15 milliseconds Reducing the sweep time increases the rate of sweeps The sweep time can be changed using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad Provides sweep times from 20 ps to 20 ms in zero span Front Panel Key Access auto courte or SWEEP 6 140 SYNC NRM NTSC SYNC NRM PAL Spectrum Analyze
228. e at the horizontal screen position where it was left unless MK TRACK ON OFF MARKER AMPTD or a marker to softkey function such as MARKER CF MARKER REF LVL MARKER CF STEP MARKER A SPAN or MARKER MINIMUM is selected Pressing MARKER NORMAL turns off the marker delta function Front Panel Key Access activates a marker in the gate utility The MARKER ON key is accessed from within the pulse parameter entry menus in the gate utility If the reference edge parameter is being entered MARKER ON turns on a trigger marker For pulse width and pulse repetition interval entry it turns on a delta marker The delta marker will be activated at the defined reference edge if one is available Otherwise it will activate at mid screen Front Panel Key Access SWEEP maintains the maximum level for each trace point of trace A Updates each trace point if a new maximum level is detected in successive sweeps Front Panel Key Access TRACE 6 93 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions MAX HOLD B MAX MXR LVL MEAS OFF MEAS USER maintains the maximum level for each trace point of trace B Updates each trace point if a new maximum level is detected in successive sweeps Front Panel Key Access lets you change the maximum input mixer level in 10 dB steps from 39 dBmV to 51 dBmV The mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the attenuator setting As the
229. e coordinates from lower limit line table entries e The lower limit line table format is accessed by Edit Lower With the lower limit line table format the coordinates of only the lower limit line are displayed for editing upper limit line coordinates are not specified Even if upper limit line values exist or the values had been entered as an upper and lower limit line table the lower limit line values are treated as a separate table from the upper limit line values Lower limit line entries can have independent frequency and amplitude coordinates from upper limit line table entries 3 41 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions e The upper and lower limit line table format is accessed by Edit Up Low With the upper and lower limit line table format the upper and lower limit line coordinates can be entered at the same time the frequency or time upper amplitude lower amplitude and type are specified The frequency or time and upper amplitude comprise the coordinate point for the upper limit line the frequency or time and lower amplitude value comprise the coordinate point for the lower limit line It is not necessary to specify both an upper and lower amplitude component for every frequency component Three asterisks in the table indicate that an amplitude value has not been entered for the segment e The mid delta limit line table format is accessed by Edit Mid Delt Like the upper and lower limit line
230. e current mass storage device analyzer memory or memory card To verify the current mass storage device press SAVE AMP COR If MAX REG appears on the analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press or RECALL then INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device Press SAVE AMP COR enter a register number then press to save the current amplitude correction factors table in analyzer memory or on the memory card When saved on the memory card amplitude correction factors tables are stored with a the prefix and the register number entered When saved in analyzer memory the register number is saved in a trace register Trace register values are restricted to a range between O and the number x indicated by MAX REG x Front Panel Key Access Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information passes the text from the DLP editor memory through the parser to execute as analyzer commands Pressing SAVE EDIT is similar to outputting the text to the analyzer from an external controller If the text commands is a valid user defined function it passes through the parser and into the analyzer user memory It will replace an existing user defined function of the same name The DLP editor memory buffer remains intact when the analyzer is preset
231. e frequency and amplitude self calibration functions take approximately 5 minutes to finish 9 minutes with Option 130 at which time the internal adjustment data is in working RAM 3 To save this data in the area of cable TV analyzer memory that is saved when the cable TV analyzer is turned off press CAL STORE NOTE To interrupt the calibration routines started by CAL FREQ CAL AMPTD or CAL FREQ amp AMPTD press PRESET CAL More 1 of 4 and CAL FETCH CAL FETCH retrieves the previous correction factors Improperly interrupting the self calibration routines may result in corrupt correction factors If this occurs press CAL FREQ amp AMPTD to rerun the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines The frequency and amplitude self calibration functions can be done separately by using the CAL FREQ or CAL AMPTD softkeys instead of CAL FREQ amp AMPTD NOTE If the frequency calibration CAL FREQ and the amplitude calibration CAL AMPTD self calibration routines are used the frequency calibration should be performed before the amplitude calibration unless the frequency data is known to be accurate 2 22 Getting Started Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines The CAL FREQ softkey starts the frequency self calibration routine This routine adjusts the frequency sweep time and span accuracy in approximately 2 minutes The CAL AMPTD softkey starts the amplitude calibration routine This routine
232. e is selected Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER measures the power leakage into the adjacent channels and calculates the adjacent channel power ratio of both the upper and lower channels with respect to the reference channel ADJ CHAN POWER extd has an extended dynamic range compared with ADJ CHAM POWER The extended range is measured by taking two different sweeps with different reference levels and combining the trace data The displayed dynamic range is 104 dB and the log scale is set to 13 dB division Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions The total power of the channel is displayed The adjacent channel power ratios of both channels are also displayed and the larger number is marked with a A Vertical lines on the display indicate the six edges of the upper lower and reference channels being measured The measurement stops and the analyzer is returned to its prior state when other measurement functions are activated The center frequency must be set to the intended carrier frequency and the reference level set to optimize the displayed signal The channel bandwidth and channel spacing must be entered by the user If PARAM AUTO is selected so AUTO is underlined other analyzer settings will then be coupled and set automatically The adjacent channel power measurement is an rms measurement This means that the measurement of the total channel power and the adjacent channel power rati
233. e of the given component reference level offset included RELATIVE is displayed in the limit line table when the limit line type is relative FIXED is displayed when limit line type is fixed A limit line entered as fixed may be changed to relative and one entered as relative may be changed to fixed When changing between fixed and relative limit lines the frequency and amplitude values in the limit line table change so that the limit line remains in the same position for the current frequency and amplitude settings of the analyzer If a time and amplitude limit line is used the amplitude values change but the time values remain the same Front Panel Key Access LIMITS FRQ TIME LINE LMT DISP Y N AUTO Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions selects whether limit lines will be entered using frequency or sweep time to define the segments Limit lines can be created by the user to test trace data They can be specified as a table of limit line segments of amplitude versus frequency or of amplitude versus time Time values are evaluated with respect to the analyzer sweep time A time value of zero corresponds to the start of the sweep which is the left edge of the graticule Switching the limit line definition between frequency and time will erase the current limit line table The message If you are sure press key again to purge data will appear Press LIMITS FRQ TIME again to purge the
234. e peak excursion to be identified The default value for the peak excursion is 6 dB The N dB bandwidth measurement error is typically e about 2 of the span for spans lt 10 MHz e about 3 of the span for spans gt 10 MHz 1a 14 46 JUL 30 1993 4 MKR TAK 1 0 kHz REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 GB 37 67 dBmv CENTEA 1 5 KHz SPAN 200 0 kHz RES BW 9 0 KHz VBW 30 KHZ SWP 33 3 msec Figure 5 32 N dB Bandwidth Measurement Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode N dB Bandwidth Measurement Example Measure the 6 dB bandwidth of the spectrum analyzer s internal 9 kHz EMI bandwidth 1 On the spectrum analyzer press_ PRESET reax SEARCH MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF ON SPAN and enter 200 kHz 2 Select the 9 kHz EMI bandwidth by pressing BW EMI BW Menu and 9 kHz EMI BW 3 Press and N dB PTS ON OFF ON to activate the N dB bandwidth function 4 Read the measurement results in the upper left corner of the screen 5 The knob or the data entry keys can be used to change the N dB value from 3 dB to 6 dB 6 Press N dB PTS ON OFF OFF to turn the measurement off Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement Percent amplitude modulation can be measured quickly and easily using the one button AM function The signal and both its sidebands must be on the display The sidebands are assumed to be entirely from amplitude modulation The spectrum anal
235. e significantly different than the start or stop frequency annotations indicate depending on other spectrum analyzer settings especially the span see specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for your instrument For better frequency accuracy use a narrower span Tracking peak may be required use TRACKING PEAK Source attenuation may be set incorrectly select SRC ATN MAN AUTO AUTO for optimum setting e The source power may be set too high or too low use SRC PWR ON OFF to reset it e The source power sweep may be set too high resulting in an unleveled condition at the end of the sweep Use PWR SWP ON OFF to decrease the amplitude 5 22 Demodulating and Listening to an AM or FM Signal The functions listed in the menu under Demod allow you to demodulate and hear signal information displayed on the spectrum analyzer Simply place a marker on a signal of interest activate AM or FM demodulation and then listen Example 1 Connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input 2 Select a frequency range on the spectrum analyzer such as the range for FM radio broadcasts For example the freauencv range_for FM broadcasts in the United States is 88 MHz to 108 MHz Press PRESET FREQUENCY START FREQ 88 MHz STOP FREQ 108 MHz 3 Place a marker on the signal of interest by using PEAK SEARCH to place a marker on the highest amplitude signal or by pressing MARKER NORMAL and moving
236. e the third order intercept measurement function 5 Read the measurement results in the upper left corner of the screen 6 Press TOI ON OFF OFF to turn the measurement off 5 65 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Third Order Intermodulation Measurement TOI It is important to verify that the TOI being measured is coming from the device under test and not from the spectrum analyzer An easy way to do this is as follows 1 Set up the TOI measurement and turn it on 2 Press AMPLITUDE ATTEN AUTO MAN AUTO and increase the attenuation 10 dB by pressing f 3 If the displayed result of the TOI measurement remains constant then the value is the result of the device under test 4 If the displayed result of the TOI measurement decreases then the value is due to spectrum analyzer distortion and not the device under test In this case continue to increase the attenuator setting until the measurement result no longer changes as the attenuator is changed When the value remains constant the result is from the device under test Increasing the attenuator setting of the spectrum analyzer decreases the level of the signal internal to the spectrum analyzer and therefore decreases the distortion generated by the analyzer Refer to the characteristics information in specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for a graph of the typical distortion performance of the spectrum analyzer 5 66
237. e tracking error manually press AUX CTRL Track Gen and MAN TRK ADJUST then use the knob to adjust the trace for the highest amplitude To compensate for the tracking error automatically press AUX CTRL Track Gen then TRACKING PEAK w REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 dB SRC PWA DEAK ON OFF 06G ba TRACKING 4B f PEAK SRC TRACK ADJ ae PWR SWP ON OFF SRC ATN MAN AUTC More 1 of 2 CENTER 350 0O MHZ SPAN 500 0 MHz AES BW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 15 0 sec Figure 5 8 Manual Tracking Adjustment Compensates for Tracking Error Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Stimulus Response Measurements NOTE If the automatic tracking routine is activated in a narrow resolution bandwidth it usually is not necessary to use the tracking adjust again when increasing the resolution bandwidth 7 To make a transmission measurement accurately the frequency response of the test system must be known To measure the frequency response of the test system connect the cable but not the DUT from the tracking generator output to the spectrum analyzer input Press TRACE TRACE A B so B is underlined CLEAR WRITE B BLANK B The frequency response of the test system is now stored in trace B 8 To normalize reconnect the DUT to the spectrum analyzer Press TRACE More 1 of 3 NORMLIZE ON OFF until ON is underlined Press NORMLIZE POSITIO
238. eaning before operating this instrument The caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met CAUTION The warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met WARNING vii WARNING WARNING CAUTION WARNING WARNING Instruction Manual General Safety Considerations Before this instrument is switched on make sure it has been properly grounded through the protective conductor of the ac power cable to a socket outlet provided with protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor inside or outside the instrument or disconnection of the protective earth terminal can result in personal injury There are many points in the instrument which can if contacted cause personal injury Be extremely careful Any adjustments or service procedures that require operation of the instrument with protective covers removed should be performed only by trained service personnel Before this instrument is switched on make sure its primary power circuitry has been adapted to the voltage of the
239. easure the Rejection Range with Delta Markers Demodulation of an FM Signal 2 2 Continuous Demodulation of an FM Signal Triggering on an Odd Field of a Video Format Triggering on an Even Field of a Video Format Time Gate Utility Display 0 Viewing Time Sharing of a Frequency with an Oscilloscope Viewing Time Sharing of a Frequency with a Spectrum PUAN Z GCE is 24h Buz Gehl Gord ces ane she sth gerbe e ade Soe he Y Pulse Repetition Interval and Pulse Width with Two Signals Present a aa e e ih at tn te Stoning E E Contents 8 5 19 5 21 5 21 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 35 5 36 5 38 Contents Test Setup for Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability 5 41 Setting the Center Frequency Span and Reference Level 5 43 Setting the Sweep Time 5 44 Setting the Gate Delay and Gate Length Using an Oscilloscope 5 45 Using Time Gating to View Signal 02 2 5 47 Placing the Gate Output During the Second Signal 5 48 Viewing Both Signals with Time Gating 5 49 Gate Not Occurring During the Pulse 5 50 Gate is Occurring at the Beginning of the Pulse 5 51 Self Calibration Data Results 2 002 5 55 Rear Panel Connections for Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability gala er ff h OW ed ol 5 56 eGatesOn 4 Aa ho woth eine ut eee oe ee hs 5 57 Using the Level Gate Control 2 2
240. ebec H9J2X8 Hai Dian District Canada Beijing China 15141 697 4232 86 1 256 6888 Japan Singapore Taiwan Yokogawa Hewlett Packard Ltd Hewlett Packard Singapore Pte Ltd Hewlett Packard Taiwan 1 27 15 Yabe Sagamihara 1150 Depot Road 8th Floor H P Building Kanagawa 229 Japan Singapore 0410 337 Fu Hsing North Road 1814271 59 1311 65 273 7388 Taipei Taiwan 886 2 1 712 0404 8 11 CAUTION CAUTION Returning the Cable TV Analyzer for Service Use the information in this section if it is necessary to return the cable TV analyzer to Hewlett Packard If it becomes necessary to return your analyzer to a Hewlett Packard service center save any user defined functions or measurement personalities to a memory card It may be necessary for the service center to load diagnostic or measurement personalities into user memory which would over write existing programs or memory could be erased during repair Hewlett Packard cannot guarantee that the user memory will be preserved Refer to Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card in Chapter 3 of this guide Package the cable TV analyzer for shipment Use the following steps to package the cable TV analyzer for shipment to Hewlett Packard for service 1 Fill in a service tag available at the end of this chapter and attach it to the instrument Please be as specific as possible about the nature of the problem Send a copy of any or all of the following information e A
241. ecalled enter the trace register number and press ENTER If windows are being used only the trace of the active window can be recalled When recalling limit line tables or amplitude correction factors press LIMIT LINES or AMP COR respectively enter the trace register number and press ENTER Valid trace register numbers are O through the maximum register number The maximum register number is the number displayed after MAX REG during a save or recall operation If a screen title is present it is recalled with the trace data but not with the limit line table or the amplitude correction factors If the screen title does not exceed 34 characters the time and date when the data was stored will also be displayed INVALID SAVEREG is displayed if data has not been stored in the trace register Front Panel Key Access RECALL LAST SPAN Limit Lines LIMIT LINES LIMITS FIX REL Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions changes the analyzer frequency span to the previous span setting Front Panel Key Access accesses the limit line menus Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY When accessed by SAVE pressing LIMIT LINES stores the current limit line tables in analyzer memory or on the memory card When accessed by RECALL pressing LIMIT LINES recalls limit line tables from analyzer memory or the memory card See To Save a Limit Line Table or Amplitude Correction Factors or
242. ected to the EXT REF IN connector or when using an external reference that an external 10 MHz reference source of sufficient amplitude is connect to the EXT REF IN connector U and H Require 1 signal gt PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD Indicates that the N dB PTS routine cannot locate a signal that is high enough to measure The signal must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold level to measure U Require 3 signals gt PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD Indicates that the AM routine cannot locate three signals that are high enough to measure The signals must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold level to measure U Require 4 signals gt PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD Indicates that the TOI routine cannot locate four signals that are high enough to measure The signals must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold level to measure U Required option not installed Some cable TV analyzer functions require that an option be installed in the cable TV analyzer See the description for the function in Chapter 9 for more information about which option is required U RES BW NOISE FAIL Indicates the noise floor level is incorrect at the indicated bandwidth H RES BW SHAPE FAIL Indicates the 3 dB bandwidth is not within specifications H 8 25 If You Have a Problem Error Messages RFPRESELERROR Indicates that the preselector peak routine cannot be performed H RF
243. ecuting at the end of each sweep No other signal can appear on the display within N dB of the highest signal The measured signal cannot have more than one peak that is greater than or equal to N dB A signal must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold to be identified The setting for peak excursion may be increased from the 6 dB default value so that noise will not be identified as signals Increasing the value too much may cause a smaller signal to be missed or misinterpreted as part of a larger signal The amplitude scale may be either linear or logarithmic Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information starts the DLP editor function clearing the DLP editor memory to create a new item in the analyzer 2500 byte DLP editor memory The item will not be in the analyzer user memory until it is processed by the SAVE EDIT softkey The DLP editor memory buffer remains intact when the instrument is preset and when it is powered off Front Panel Key Access RECALL or Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions NEXT PEAK NEXT PK LEFT NEXT PK RIGHT switches the active window between the two displayed windows if the windows display mode has been turned on The active window is marked by solid lines If the zoom function has been used to expand an active wind
244. ed RF This example demonstrates how to use time gated spectrum analyzer capability to view two different pulsed RF signals The signals are at the same frequency but they interleave in time This example uses the time gate function without using the gate utility To use time gated spectrum analyzer capability to view the amplitude of a pulsed RF signal accurately the spectrum analyzer settings of the sweep time resolution bandwidth video bandwidth gate delay and gate length must be set correctly To set the spectrum analyzer settings correctly you must determine the pulse repetition interval pulse width and signal delay if any of the pulsed RF signal Figure 5 18 shows an example of two pulsed RF signals Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Figure 5 18 Pulse Repetition Interval and Pulse Width with Two Signals Present Item Description of Items in Figure 5 18 1 Pulse repetition interval PRI of signal 1 PRI is measured in time units PRI is equivalent to 1 PRF where PRF is the pulse repetition frequency Pulse repetition interval PRI of signal 2 Pulse width r of signal 1 Pulse width is also referred to es 7 taul Pulse width r of signal 2 Signal delay of signal 2 Notice that the signal delay is zero for signal 1 nn puu nN Gate trigger input for time
245. ed components are harmonically related to the original signal harmonic mixing The utilization of local oscillator harmonics generated in a mixer to extend the tuning range of an analyzer beyond the range achievable using just the local oscillator fundamental The mathematical algorithm is FIN Fro Fir Glossary 11 HP IB IF IF The abbreviation for Hewlett Packard Interface Bus It is a Hewlett Packard proprietary parallel interface that allows you to daisy chain more than one device to a port on a computer or instrument The abbreviation for intermediate frequency An IF frequency is a frequency to which a signal wave is shifted locally as an intermediate step in transmission or reception On analyzers this is the frequency resulting from conversion before demodulation gain IF attenuation A control that adjusts the vertical position of displayed signals without affecting the signal level at the input mixer When changed the value of the reference level is changed accordingly IF feedthrough A condition that results in a rise in amplitude of the baseline trace This occurs as a result of an input signal at the intermediate frequency IF passing through the input mixer This a usually only a potential problem on nonpreselected analyzers The entire baseline trace rises because the signal is always at the IF Mixing with the local oscillator is not required image response A displayed signal that is actuall
246. ed on by pressing MARKER ON OFF the MK TRACE AUTO ABC function always switches to AUTO and the marker is put on the trace that is selected by the AUTO mode Front Panel Key Access 6 88 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions MARKER A activates a second marker at the position of the first marker If no marker is present two markers appear at the center of the display The amplitude and frequency of the first marker is fixed and the second marker is under your control Annotation in the active function block and in the upper right corner of the screen indicates the frequency and amplitude differences between the two markers The display mode must not be changed between log and linear while using a delta marker NOTE If there are already four markers when MARKER A is pressed a nonactive marker disappears the active marker becomes a reference marker and the delta marker becomes the active marker Front Panel Key Access or PEAK searcu 6 89 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions MARKER A SPAN MARKER AUTO FFT MARKER CF MARKER CF STEP sets the start and stop frequencies to the values of the delta markers The start and stop frequencies will not be set if the delta marker is off Front Panel Key Access functions exactly like the CONTINUS FFT softkey if the spectrum analyzer is already in zero span If the analyzer is not
247. een the coordinate point of the current segment and the coordinate point of the next segment producing limit line values equal in amplitude for all frequencies between the two points If the amplitude values of the two segments differ the limit line steps to the frequency value of the second segment Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY provides access to the softkeys used for viewing or editing the flatness correction constants This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL displays the output of the FM coil driver produced on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access adjusts the FM deviation display The center graticule represents zero deviation The top graticule is the positive deviation set by FM GAIN The bottom graticule is the negative deviation set by FM GAIN The range for FM gain is from 10 kHz to 500 kHz The default value is 100 kHz Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL or CAL adjusts the horizontal trace for center screen with no modulation on the carrier This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access 6 73 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions FM SPAN FORMAT CARD FREE RUN FREQ DIAG FREQ DISC NORM OFF 6 74 displays the FM SPAN signal from the span dividers on the AT Analog Inte
248. el Key Access 6 120 RECALL LIMIT REF LVL Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions recalls limit line tables from the current mass storage device analyzer memory or memory card To verify the current mass storage device press RECALL LIMIT If MAX REG appears on the analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press or RECALL then INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device To recall a limit line enter the register number that the limit line tables was saved under then press ENTER When recalling a limit line from the memory card it may be necessary to change the current prefix to the prefix with which the limit line was stored Press Change Prefix to change the current prefix When saved in analyzer memory the register number is restricted to the range between 0 and the number x indicated by MAX REG x The screen title is not recalled with the limit line tables Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY allows the reference level to be changed This function is activated when is pressed The reference level is the amplitude power or voltage represented by the top graticule line on the screen Changing the value of the reference level changes the absolute amplitude level in dBmV of tle top graticule line Pressing any digit 0 through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected
249. en field 6 150 NTSC video format 6 102 odd field 6 150 PAL M video format 6 106 PAL video format 6 105 SECAM L video format 6 127 TV line number 6 149 TV Standard 6 149 TV sync 6 149 vertical interval 6 150 TV TRIG 5 26 6 149 TV TRIG EVEN FLD 5 27 6 150 TV triggering 5 26 TV TRIG ODD FLD 6 150 TV TRIG OUTPUT 2 7 TV TRIG VERT INT 6 150 T WINDOW RES BW 6 142 T WINDOW SWP TIME 6 142 two display windows 6 103 type of limit line 6 130 underscore character 6 154 units amplitude 6 13 unleveled condition tracking generator 5 22 UPDATE TIMEFREQ 6 150 upper and lower limit line 3 42 upper and lower limit lines 3 49 editing 6 62 upper limit line 3 41 user created error messages 8 14 User Menus 6 150 Index 32 using limit line functions 3 33 using the GATE CTL EDGE LVL 5 58 using the level gate control 5 58 using the self calibration routines with time gated capability 5 54 V OV 6 151 variable cataloging 6 25 VBW RBW RATIO 6 151 verification manual see Calibration Guide 9 6 vertical signal positioning 6 49 VHS video output 6 141 VID AVG ON OFF 6 151 VID BW AUTO MAN 6 152 VIDEO 6 153 video averaging 4 28 6 151 video bandwidth 6 152 video bandwidth coupling 6 17 gate utility 6 49 video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio 6 151 video picture field triggering on a selected line 5 26 VIEW A 6 153 VIEW B 6 153 VIEW C 6 153 VOL INTEN 2 5 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
250. ency or time by using the knob or data keys Press BK SP to correct errors Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY 6 130 Service Cal Service Diag SET ATTN ERROR Set B amp W Printer Set Colr Printer Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions accesses several service calibration functions The service calibration functions are designed for service use only More detailed descriptions of the service functions are available in the service documentation Service documentation can be obtained by ordering Option 915 through your HP Sales and Service office For a listing of all available service calibration functions refer to Service Functions at the beginning of this chapter Front Panel Key Access CAL accesses several service diagnostic functions The service diagnostic functions are designed for service use only More detailed descriptions of the service diagnostic functions are available in the service documentation Service documentation can be obtained by ordering Option 915 through your HP Sales and Service office For a listing of all available service diagnostic functions refer to Service Functions at the beginning of this chapter Front Panel Key Access CAL sets the calibration attenuator error factors this is not the same as the input attenuator This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL accesses the s
251. ency span functions Pressing SPAN allows the user to change the frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency The frequency span readout describes the total displayed frequency range to determine frequency span per horizontal graticule division divide the frequency span by 10 Front Panel Key Access finds the highest signal peak on screen If a marker is not already on the peak it places a marker on it turns on the marker track function and activates the span function Pressing SPAN ZOOM performs the routine similar to pressing the following keys _ reax SEARCH MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF ON and SPAN Front Panel Key Access turns the internal speaker on and off The volume from the speaker is controlled by the front volume control knob and FM GAIN when using FM demodulation There is no output from the speaker unless demodulation is turned on Pressing sets SPEARER ON OFF to ON Front Panel Key Access 6 135 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions SPECTRUM ANALYZER SQUELCH SRC ATN MANAUTO SRC PWR OFFSET sets the analyzer to the spectrum analyzer operating mode and accesses the PRESET SPECTRUM softkey function Front Panel Key Access MODE or PRESET adjusts the squelch level The squelch level mutes weak signals and passes strong signals The squelch level affects the audio output only If the internal speaker is on audio signals are not output unles
252. ency value via the front panel SELECT LWR AMPL SELECT MID AMPL 6 128 Front Panel Key Access or DISPLAY allows you to enter the amplitude value for the lower limit line segment Enter the amplitude value for the selected frequency or time by using the knob or data keys Press to correct errors Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY allows you to enter the middle amplitude value The middle amplitude value and the delta amplitude value create upper and lower limit line segments Enter the amplitude value for the selected frequency or time by using the knob or data keys Press to correct errors Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY SELECT POINT SELECT PREFIX SELECT SEGMENT Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions allows you to create or edit an amplitude correction factor data point Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the data keys then press ENTER Press BK SP to correct errors Front Panel Key Access CAL allows you to select an already existing prefix of a cataloged Ele and changes the current prefix to this selected prefix This provides a convenient method for saving and recalling data to and from the memory card and for cataloging by the prefix Use either the knob or step keys to select the file Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE allows you to create or edit a limit line segment Limit lines are created by entering frequency or time and
253. enus to dispose of the current limit line table Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY allows you to view or edit the lower limit line table Up to 20 entries are allowed for the lower limit line table With the lower limit line table format the coordinates for the lower limit line are specified but none are specified for the upper limit line Even if upper limit line values exist or the values had been entered as an upper and lower limit line table the lower limit line values are treated as a separate table from the upper limit line values The lower limit line entries can have independent frequency or time and amplitude coordinates from upper limit line table entries Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY Edit Mid Delt Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions allows you to view or edit the upper and lower limit line tables simultaneously These tables are edited by entering a middle amplitude value and an amplitude deviation Up to 20 entries are allowed for the upper and lower limit line tables Like the upper and lower limit line table format the mid delta limit line table format provides a means of specifying the upper and lower limit lines at the same time Unlike the upper and lower table format the amplitude values are specified as a middle amplitude value with a delta the upper and lower limit lines are drawn an equal positive and negative distance from the middle amplitude With the mid delta fo
254. er Calling HP Sales and Service Offices Before You Call Hewlett Packard Cheek the basics e uuest s Goeth a etek Boe a If you suspect the analyzer configuration is wrong If the display position is offset If the analyzer measurements appear inaccurate 5 37 5 40 5 50 5 59 5 60 5 62 5 64 5 67 5 68 5 70 5 74 6 3 6 4 6 5 Contents 5 If the error message FREQ UNCAL staysonscreen 8 7 If the calibration routines cannot be performed 8 8 If the calibration data is corrupt 8 8 If the display is scrambled 2 8 8 How to Call Hewlett Packard 2 8 10 Returning the Cable TV Analyzer for Service 8 12 Package the cable TV analyzer for shipment 8 12 Error Messages ny dws oe fo ek ce es ot of EK 8 14 9 Options and Accessories What You ll Find in This Chapter Options ir cork er 28 aaa coh rey Swe can WO ee B fos ae awd Tracking Generator Option 011 Carrying Case Color Tan Option 015 HP IB Interface Option 021 4 Front Panel Protective Cover Option 040 TV Receiver Video Tester Option 107 Noise Figure Card Option 119 Narrow Resolution Bandwidths Option 130 Rack Mount Kit without Handles Option 908 Rack Mount Kit With Handles Option 909 User s Guides and Calibration Guide Option 910 Service Documentat
255. er I ENTER characters e An alternate method for recalling a file uses the key sequence RECALL Catalog Card CATALOG ALL use the knob to highlight the desired file then LOAD FILE The screen title is part of the display image but is an image only It is not recalled es a title 3 31 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card Table 3 3 Save and Recall Functions Using Memory Card continued Operation Screen File Name Register Key Sequence Title Range Available recall display image Yest current prefix efix RECALL register egister lt 8CARD DISPLAY register aracters ENTER save limit line table lIcurrent prefix Prefix SAVE Trace Card register register lt 8 LIMIT LINES register aracters ENTER recall limit line llcurrent prefix Prefix RECALL table Iregister register lt 8 Card Trace aracters LIMIT LINES register 1 ENTER save amplitude alcurrent prefix Prefix SAVE Trace Card correction factors iregister register lt B AMP cor Ire gister ENTER acters recall amplitude alcurrent prefix efix RECALL correction factors register l ister lt 8 Card Trace AMP COR BURS iregister CENTER save OLP dicurrent prefix P r ef i SAVE ALL DLP CARD register ister lt 8 Iregister i ENTER ers dicurrent prefix Prefix RECALL CARD DLP register ister lt 8 register ENTER
256. er a frequency value or press SELECT TIME Time Coordinate Selecting the Amplitude Coordinate and enter a time value for the segment Regardless of the table format a frequency time coordinate must be specified NOTE Limit line coordinates may be entered in terms of either frequency and amplitude or time and amplitude Press LIMITS FRQ TIME until the desired choice of either frequency or time has be selected underlined If TIME has been selected as the limit line parameter SELECT TIME will replace SELECT FREQ in the Edit Limit menus In the previous procedure pressing SELECT AMPLITUD and then entering an amplitude value specified the amplitude coordinate for the upper limit line The limit line table formats dictate how the amplitude values are treated e With the upper limit line table format one amplitude component representing an upper limit line segment is specified per frequency time component The amplitude value is entered by pressing SELECT AMPLITUD entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key 3 44 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using Limit Line Functions With the lower limit line table format one amplitude component representing a lower limit line segment is specified per frequency time component The amplitude value is entered by pressing SELECT AMPLITUD entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key With the upper lower limit line table format two amplitude components
257. er adds a color plot capability to the cable TV analyzer for permanent records of important measurements The eight pen HP ColorPro plotter produces color plots with 0 025 mm 0 001 inch resolution on either 8 5 by 11 inch paper or transparency Elm The plotter can be ordered with HP IB or RS 232 interfaces to correspond to the interface option installed on the cable TV analyzer 9 9 Options and Accessories Printer The HP LaserJet series printers are also compatible as are the HP ThinkJet HP QuietJet and HP QuietJet Plus printers The HP 3630A PaintJet printer provides high resolution color printing The printers can be ordered with HP IB or RS 232 interfaces to correspond to the interface installed on the cable TV analyzer Rack Slide Kit This kit HP part number 1494 0060 provides the hardware to adapt rack mount kits Options 908 and 909 for mounting the cable TV analyzer on slides in an HP System II cabinet RS 232 Cable The HP 132426 is a 25 pin male to male RS 232 cable Transit Case The transit case HP part number 9211 5604 provides extra protection for your cable TV analyzer for frequent travel situations The HP transit case protects your instrument from hostile environments shock vibration moisture and impact while providing a secure enclosure for shipping Glossary Glossary absolute amplitude accuracy The degree of correctness or uncertainty expressed in either volts or dB power It incl
258. er can miss an event at one frequency because it is sweeping at a different frequency when the event occurs With the time gated spectrum analyzer capability the spectrum analyzer can provide a window of what is going on with a signal at any specific tune since the analyzer has the capability to selectively acquire data based on an external trigger signal The window represents a periodic timed event during which data acquisition is enabled The following figures demonstrate how the time gate can be used to view a signal For example you could have two signals at the same frequency in alternating tune slots so they can share a common system You can use an oscilloscope to determine whether there are two signals see Figure 5 16 However you could not use a standard spectrum analyzer since both signals would contribute to the displayed frequency spectrum By using the time gate functions you can use a spectrum analyzer to mask out one signal at a time and measure each of the two signals separately See Figure 5 17 NOTE When the time gated spectrum analyzer capability is enabled it interrupts the internal signal path of the spectrum analyzer so several spectrum analyzer functions may not be available under all conditions These conditions include marker noise MK BOISE ON OFF sample detection while in the frequency span mode and AM FM demodulation and TV sync trigger The marker counter function MK COUNT ON OFF is not d
259. er of the amplitude modulation sidebands AM 200210720 persistence See CRT persistence personality Applications available on a memory card or other electronic media that extends the capability of an instrument for specific uses Examples include digital radio personalities and cable TV personalities Glossary 19 phase noise Refer to noise sidebands position units The position unit describes the location of a point along the horizontal axis of a trace Position unit values of a trace begin on the left hand side of the graticule and increase to a predefined value specific to the analyzer model on the right hand side of the graticule positive peak The maximum instantaneous value of an incoming signal On digital displays each displayed point of the signal indicates the maximum value of the signal for that part of the frequency span or time interval represented by the point preamplifier An external low noise figure amplifier that improves system preamplifier analyzer sensitivity over that of the analyzer itself predefined trace Trace A B or C of an analyzer Refer also to trace preselector A tunable bandpass filter placed ahead of a frequency converter or mixer of an analyzer It tracks the appropriate mixing mode and passes signals of a desired frequency and reduces others Preselectors are typically used only above 2 GHz They essentially eliminate multiple and image responses and for certain signal conditi
260. er trace information It is available only on analyzers with digital displays Each point on the display is averaged independently and the average is computed based on the number of sweeps selected by the user The averaging algorithm applies a factor to the amplitude value of a given point on the current sweep 1 n where n is the number of the current sweep applies another factor to the previously stored average n I n and combines the two for a current average After the designated number of sweeps are completed the factors remain constant and the display becomes a running average video bandwidth The cut off frequency 3 dB point of an adjustable low pass filter in the video circuit When the video bandwidth is equal to or less than the resolution bandwidth the video circuit cannot fully respond to the more rapid fluctuations of the output of the envelope detector The result is a smoothing of the trace or a reduction in the peak to peak excursion of broadband signals such as noise and pulsed RF when viewed in broadband mode The degree of averaging or smoothing is a function of the ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth Glossary 28 video filter A post detection low pass Elter that determines the bandwidth of the video amplifier It is used to average or smooth a trace Refer also to video bandwidth windows display mode A display mode of the analyzers where the screen area is split into two separate dis
261. ernal keyboard is not included with the cable TV analyzer The external keyboard can be used to enter screen titles prefixes remote commands and writing simple DLP s Turn off the cable TV analyzer before connecting an external keyboard to the cable TV analyzer Failure to do so may result in loss of factory correction constants 19 SWEEP OUTPUT provides a voltage ramp proportional to the sweep and the cable TV analyzer span 0 V to 10 V Hold Key Knob Getting Started Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer Data Controls Data controls are used to change values for functions such as center frequency start frequency resolution bandwidth and marker position The data controls will change the active function in a manner prescribed by that function For example you can change center frequency in fine steps with the knob in discrete steps with the step keys or to an exact value with the number units keypad For example resolution bandwidth which can be set to discrete values only is changed to predetermined values with any of the data controls Deactivate functions with HOLD which is found under the key The active function readout is blanked indicating that no entry will be made inadvertently by using the knob step keys or keypad Pressing a function key re enables the data controls The knob allows continuous change of functions such as center frequency reference level and marker position It also changes the
262. es 3 26 saving states 6 137 saving to memory card 6 146 write protect switch 2 29 memory card reader 2 5 menu and softkey overview 2 16 menus 7 2 Index 19 message block 2 3 mid delta limit line editing amplitude 6 61 mid delta limit line format 3 42 MIN HOLD C 4 17 6 95 minimum hold 4 13 minimum to marker 6 91 mixer input level maximum 6 94 MK COUNT ON OFF 4 9 6 95 MK NOISE ON OFF 696 MK PAUSE ON OFF 6 96 MKR 2 19 6 98 MK READ FTT IP 6 96 MKR FCTN 6 98 MKR 6 98 MK TABLE ON OFF 6 96 MK TRACE AUTO ABC 6 97 MK TRACK ON OFF 4 13 6 97 MNOPQR 6 98 MODE 2 4 6 98 model specific preset conditions 6 113 MONITOR OUTPUT 2 8 display compression 2 14 6 141 move trace A into C 6 8 multipen plotter 6 47 N narrow resolution bandwidths Option 130 9 5 N GB bandwidth measurement 5 59 N dB PTS ON OFF 5 59 6 99 negative peak detection mode 6 55 NEW EDIT 6 99 NEXT 6 100 NEXT PEAK 6 100 NEXT PK LEFT 6 100 NEXT PK RIGHT 6 100 normalization 5 20 normal marker 6 93 NORMLIZE ON OFF 5 20 6 101 NORMLIZE POSITION 6 101 No User Menu 6 101 NTSC 6 102 NTSC video format 6 14 1 number units keypad 2 11 Index 20 O OCC BW POWER 6 102 OCCUPIED BANDWDTH 6 102 occupied bandwidth using 5 68 69 occupied power bandwidth measurement 5 67 ON 6 103 ONCYCLE command 6 31 ONDELAY command 6 31 ONEOS command 6 31 on event commands ONCYCLE 6 31 ONDELAY 6 31 ONEOS 6 31
263. es 128 kilobytes of memory Several different memory cards are available with up to 512 kilobytes of memory See Accessories in Chapter 9 Instrument states traces display images limit line tables amplitude correction factors and programs are easily retrievable without the need for an external controller to transfer data The process of saving and recalling data from the memory card is similar to saving and recalling data from the cable TV analyzer memory Due to the expanded capabilities of the memory card there are some important differences For example data is stored in cable TV analyzer memory as an item on the memory card data is stored as a logical interchange file LIF Memory card data can be stored and recalled using a prefix A prefix is an optional user defined label for states traces and programs The prefix becomes part of the file name If you do not specify a prefix the file name will be created without it Table 3 2 compares the save and recall operations of cable TV analyzer memory and the memory card Refer to Table 3 3 at the end of this section for a summary of saving and recalling data to and from cable TV analyzer memory Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card Table 3 2 Comparison of Analyzer Memory and Memory Card Operations Stored with a Prefix Restriction on Register Number Mass Data Storage Stored Device As Item nalyzer memor y
264. es a flat top filter response This implementation is a post detection Fourier transform and it cannot be used to resolve continuous wave or carrier signals When MEAS USER FFT Menu and SINGLE FFT are pressed sample detection mode is selected and a sweep is taken to obtain a sample of the input signal Then the spectrum analyzer executes a series of computations on the time data to produce the frequency domain results CONTINUS FFT can be used instead of SINGLE FFT and the spectrum analyzer will be put in continuous sweep mode with an FFT being performed at the end of each sweep 5 3 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function 15 13 56 AUG 19 1993 MKA 60 Hz REF 13 79 mV AT 10 dB 1 5207 mV MARKER gt AUTO FFT hx AM a4 l SINGLE FFT H RES BW 100 kHz CONTINUS FFT LL FFT STOP FREQ 4 FFT OFF coy FFT START O Hz FFT STOP 250 Hz RES BW 100 KHz VBW 1 KHZ SWP 800 msec Figure 5 1 FFT Annotation Some of the screen annotation is altered when the FFT function is active The left edge of the graticule is relabeled FFT START and represents 0 Hz relative to the carrier The right edge of the graticule is relabeled FFT STOP and is the maximum FFT frequency used in the transformation The annotation LIN in the upper left corner refers to the scale of the incoming data being tr
265. ess FFT OFF to return the analyzer to normal operation Refer to Chapter 5 Measuring Amplitude Modulation Using the Fast Fourier Transform Function for more information Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER initiates an output of the screen data without an external controller to a previously specified graphics printer or plotter Refer to Chapter 1 of this manual or the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for detailed information about printing and plotting The printer or plotter must have already been selected using and either Plot Conf ig for a plotter or Print Conf ig for a printer To obtain a print press CONFIG COPY DEV PRNT PLT so that PRNT is underlined then Print Conf ig Use BAUD RATE to change the baud rate of the analyzer if necessary For Option 021 use PRINTER ADDRESS to change the HP IB address of the printer if necessary If the analyzer is connected to an HP PaintJet printer and you want a color printout press PAINTJET PRINTER If the analyzer is connected to an HP PaintJet printer and you want a black and white printout press HP B amp W PRINTER More printer information can be found in the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C 6 45 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide and Chapter 1 of this manual If you want the softkey
266. ess rrequency and set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to the frequency of the modulated input signal Press SPAN 10 MHz Press Frequency to keep the signal on the spectrum analyzer display 3 Press MEAS USER FFT Menu and MARKER AUTO FFT This initiates the FFT function and activates a marker 5 9 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function 4 Use the knob to place the marker on the AM modulated signal and press MARKER AUTO FFT again The spectrum analyzer will perform the following steps a Save the present instrument state in state register 8 b Reduce the span to zoom in on the signal c Set the detector mode to sample d Set the scale to linear e Change the span to zero span f Start the continuous FFT function g Set the FFT stop frequency to 10 kHz mi Press FFT STOP FREQ 250 Hz This sets the spectrum analyzer to include the fourth harmonic of the 60 Hz modulation signal on the screen 6 To confirm that the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth are correct for measuring the modulation amplitude use the following procedure a Press and use the knob to move the marker to the desired modulation signal In this example place the marker on the 60 Hz fundamental modulation signal b Press and decrease the resolution bandwidth using the key until measured signal amplitude drops Then press to
267. ext trig input 2 9 gate output 2 8 gate trigger input 2 7 Index 7 hi sweep in out 2 9 HP IB interface 2 9 monitor output 2 8 sweep output 2 9 TV trig output 2 7 connector auxiliary interface 6 19 continuous sweep 6 139 CONTINUS FFT 6 45 CONT MBAS 6 44 control functions 2 5 control line A auxiliary interface 6 43 control line B auxiliary interface 6 43 control line C auxiliary interface 6 43 control line D auxiliary interface 6 43 controlling the gate GATE CTL EDGE LVL 6 76 GATE ON OFF 6 78 COPY 2 4 6 45 COPY DEV PRNT PLT 6 48 correction factors 2 21 2 23 6 48 data display 6 55 default 6 50 self calibration 6 2 1 storing 6 22 CORRECT ON OFF 2 23 6 48 coupled functions menu 6 18 coupled sweep time 6 140 coupling all functions 6 17 time gate utility 6 39 6 49 6 52 coupling video bandwidth 6 152 CPL RBW ON OFF 6 49 CPL SWP ON OFF 6 49 CPL VBW ON OFF 6 49 creating amplitude correction factors 3 58 creating limit lines 3 34 creating new programs 6 99 CRT HORZ POSITION 6 49 CRT VERT POSITION 6 49 Index 8 D DAC extra fine tune 6 154 fine tune 6 72 sweep time 6 140 DACS 6 4 6 50 data controls 2 10 data keys 2 5 2 11 data protection 3 13 data recall 6 120 data transmission speed 6 20 DATEMODEMDY DMY 6 50 dBm 6 50 dBmV 6 50 dBuV 6 50 deactivate function 2 10 deactivating the active function 6 80 DEFAULT CAL DATA 6 50 8 8 D
268. f degrades amplitude accuracy Correction factors must be on for the analyzer to meet its specified performance Front Panel Key Access CPL RBW ON OFF CPL SWP ON OFF CPL VBW ON OFF CRT HORZ POSITION CRT VERT POSITION Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions automatically selects the optimum resolution bandwidth for an unmodulated pulse if the pulse width has been entered If the pulse width has not been determined the resolution bandwidth will not be coupled to the pulse parameters and a warning message will occur If a resolution bandwidth is entered manually the coupling will be turned off Front Panel Key Access SWEEP automatically selects the optimum sweep time if the pulse repetition interval has been entered If the pulse repetition interval has not been determined the sweep time will not be coupled and an error message will occur If a sweep time is entered manually the coupling will be turned off Sweep time coupling only applies to the frequency domain window Front Panel Key Access SWEEP automatically selects the optimum video bandwidth if the gate length has been entered If the gate length has not been determined the video bandwidth will not be coupled to the gate length and an error message will occur If a gate length is entered manually the coupling will be turned off Front Panel Key Access SWEEP changes the horizontal position of the signal on the a
269. f operation the cable TV analyzer mode indicated by Cable TV ANALYZER and spectrum analyzer mode indicated by SPECTRUM ANALYZER and save and recall traces states limit line tables amplitude correction factors and programs to or from a memory card SAVE and also save and recall traces states limit line tables and amplitude correction factors to or from the cable TV analyzer memory NOTE If you wish to reset the cable TV analyzer configuration to the state it was in when it was originally shipped from the factory use DEFAULT CONFIG Refer to the DEFAULT CONFIG softkey description in Chapter 6 for more information 2 4 CAUTION Getting Started Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer 7 COPY prints or plots screen data Use CONFIG Plot Conf ig or Print Conf ig and COPY DEV PRNT PLT before using COPY See Chapter 6 for more details 8 CONTROL functions access menus that allow you to adjust the resolution bandwidth adjust the sweep time store and manipulate trace data and control the instrument display 9 MARKER functions control the markers read out frequencies and amplitudes along the cable TV analyzer trace automatically locate the signals of highest amplitude and keep a signal at the marker position in the center of the screen 10 WINDOWS keys turn on the windows display mode They allow switching between windows and control the zone span and location 11 DATA keys STEP keys and knob allow
270. f the FFT marker frequency is within the limitations of the available sweep times This puts the marker in the middle of the graticule When using the FFT function the MARKER MID SCRN softkey replaces the MARKER CF softkey in the PEAK SEARCH and MKR menus Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER MKR or PEAK SEARCH moves the active marker to the minimum detected amplitude value Front Panel Key Access Ends and displays the frequency and amplitude differences between the highest and lowest trace points Pressing MARKER PK PK performs the routine similar to pressing the following keys peak searcu MARKER A and MARKER MINIMUM Front Panel Key Access changes the analyzer settings so that the amplitude at the active marker becomes the reference level Front Panel Key Access 6 91 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions MARKER gt START MARKER STOP MARKER ALL OFF MARKER AMPTD changes the start frequency so that it is equal to the frequency of the active marker This moves the active marker to the left edge of the display Front Panel Key Access changes the stop frequency so that it is equal to the frequency of the active marker This moves the active marker to the right edge of the display Front Panel Key Access turns off all of the markers including markers used for marker track and demodulation Marker annotation is also removed
271. f the coupled function values remains at its current value when zero span is activated Video bandwidth is coupled to resolution bandwidth Sweep time is not coupled to any other function 4 37 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Analyzer As a Receiver in Zero Frequency Span Example View the modulation waveform of an AM signal in the time domain 1 To obtain an AM signal you can either connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input and tune to a commercial AM broadcast station or you can connect a source to the spectrum analyzer input and set the percent modulation of the source If a headset is used with the VIDEO OUT connector the spectrum analyzer will operate as a radio 2 First center and zoom in on the signal in the frequency domain See Decreasing the Frequency Span Using the Marker Track Function Be sure to turn off the marker track function since the marker track function must be off for zero span See Figure 4 25 14 26 54 AUG 19 1993 MKR TAK 399 9993 MHZ AEF 514 1 mv AT 20 GB 440 76 mV MARKER SMPL gt CF LIN MARKER a MARKER 399 9993 MHz NEXT 440 75 mv PEAK NEXT PK RIGHT WA SBI SC FS NEXT PK CORA LEFT More lof 2 CENTEA 400 0003 MHz SPAN 200 0 kHz RES BW 30 kHz VBW 30 khz SWP 20 Q msec Figure 4 25 Viewing an AM Signal 4 38 Making Basic Measurements Using
272. fe work station 1 40 exchange trace A and B 6 7 exchange trace B and C 6 19 execute a command front panel 6 69 EXECUTE TITLE 6 3 6 69 EXIT 6 69 Exit Catalog 6 69 EXIT SHOW 6 69 EXIT UTILITY 6 69 expanding a window 6 156 EXT ALC INPUT 2 7 EXTERNAL 6 70 external keyboard 3 65 9 8 prefix entry 3 69 programming command entry 3 69 screen title entry 3 68 external keyboard connector 2 9 external keyboard installation 3 68 external keyboard operation 3 68 69 EXTERNAL PREAMPG 6 70 EXT KEYBOARD 2 9 EXT REF IN 2 8 EXT TRIG INPUT 2 9 F fast Fourier transform stop frequency 6 72 fast Fourier transform function 5 3 6 71 features front panel 2 3 FFT markers 6 91 FFT compatibility 6 71 FFT display annotation 5 4 FFT marker frequency 6 91 FFT MARKERS 6 71 FFT measurement 5 3 6 45 6 134 automatic 5 9 manual 5 6 setup 5 5 5 6 Index 12 FFT Menu 6 71 FFT OFF 6 72 FFT STOP FREQ 6 72 fine focus control 2 12 FINE TUNE DAC 6 4 6 72 firmware date 1 13 fixed limit line type 6 83 fix tuned receiver 4 37 FLAT 3 46 6 73 flatness factory defaults 6 81 flatness correction constants 6 59 6 73 Flatness Data 6 3 6 73 FM COIL DRIVE 6 4 6 73 FM GAIN 5 25 6 4 6 73 FM OFFSET 6 5 6 73 FM SPAN 6 5 6 74 FORMAT CARD 3 18 6 74 format date 6 50 Fourier transform See also fast Fourier transform 6 71 Fourier transform measurement 6 71 FREE RUN 6 74 FREQ DIAG 6 5 6 74 FREQ DI
273. format The PAL format has less vertical resolution than the analyzer display The top of the analyzer display is compressed slightly so that all of the information can be fit into the vertical resolution available with the PAL format Front Panel Key Access CONFIG 6 141 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions T WINDOW RES BW T WINDOW SWP TIME TABLE ADLNRM Option 107 only changes the resolution bandwidth in the time domain window of the gate utility Front Panel Key Access Option 07 only changes the sweep time in the time domain window of the gate utility and re scales the gate markers Front Panel Key Access SWEEP switches the marker table between the normal marker formats and the delta display line format The marker information can be displayed in absolute amplitude and frequency It can also be displayed in delta amplitude and frequency using one marker as the reference These are normal marker modes Press the TABLE ADL NRM softkey to underline the ADL This accesses the delta display line format which is only available when using the marker table function This format displays the marker amplitudes relative to the display line Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN 6 142 THRESHLD ON OFF Time Date Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions sets a lower boundary to the active trace The threshold line clips signals tha
274. frequency or time by using the data keys Change an amplitude value by using the step keys or the knob Press to correct errors Front Panel Key Access or DISPLAY allows you to enter the delta amplitude value The middle amplitude value and the delta amplitude value create an upper and lower limit line segment Enter the delta amplitude value for the selected frequency or time by using the knob or data keys Press to correct errors The default value is 0 Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY_ 6 127 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions SELECT FREQ NOTE allows you to enter the frequency value for a limit line segment or for an amplitude correction point Enter the frequency value for the frequency by using the data keys Change the frequency value by using the step keys or the knob Press to correct errors A frequency coordinate must always be specified for either limit lines or amplitude correction factors Limit line data is sorted in frequency order in the limit line table The sorting occurs after you have entered the frequency and at least one amplitude value For amplitude correction factors only two entries with the same frequency are valid Only the first and last points of a series with the same frequency values are used the middle points are ignored Amplitude correction data is sorted in the table by frequency The sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequ
275. function is not available outine is not available urns off resolution BW coupling to pulse width ust be zero in the time domain window urns off sweep time coupling to PRI easurement function is not available urns off video BW coupling to gate length Front Panel Key Access SWEEP accesses the softkey menu used for selecting screen title or prefix characters G through L Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or SAVE Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions GND REF DETECTOR GRAT ON OFF GRPH MKR ON OFF HOLD displays the output of the analog ground reference produced on the A16 Processor Video assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL turns the screen graticule on and off This is helpful when alternative graphics are drawn on the screen through a remote controller and during plotting when a graticule is not required Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY turns the graph marker ON or OFF This softkey is available when ACPGRAPH is ON for ACP or ACP extended measurements or when PWRGRAPH is ON for channel power measurements For the ACPGRAPH the delta frequency ACP ratio and channel power are displayed at the marker position For the channel power graph the frequency and channel power are displayed at the marker position Front Panel Access Key MEAS USER deactivates the active function
276. ging the trace mode of trace C to clear write or minimum hold can change the trace mode of trace A and trace B If trace A or trace B is in clear write mode or maximum hold mode when trace C is changed to clear write or minimum hold the trace mode of trace A or trace B is changed to store blank The following table shows the trace mode of trace A or trace B before and after changing trace C to clear write or minimum hold trace mode Trace Mode of Trace A or B Trace Mode of Trace A or B Before After Clear write Store blank Store blank View Maximum hold View If you want to use trace A or trace B in the clear write or maximum hold mode and do not want trace C to blank it use minimumhold or view trace mode for trace C Front Panel Key Access TRACE CNT RES AUTO MAN CNTL A 0 1 CNTL B O f CNTL O t CNTL D 0 1 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions allows the resolution of the marker counter to be selected manually or auto coupled The marker counter has a resolution range of 10 Hz to 100 kHz The available resolution values are 1 Hz 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz and 100 kHz The 1 Hz marker counter resolution is not specified The resolution can be changed by using the step keys or by entering the resolution using the numeric keypad The marker counter resolution can be auto coupled to the span by pressing CNT RES AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined The CNT RE
277. h is set correctly Check that the line fuse is good Check that the cable TV analyzer is turned on Check that the light above is on indicating that the power supply is on Check that the other equipment cables and connectors are connected properly and operating correctly Check the equipment settings in the procedure that was being used when the problem occurred Check that the test being performed and the expected results are within the specifications and capabilities of the cable TV analyzer Refer to the HP 8590 E Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Calibration Guide Check the cable TV analyzer display for error messages Refer to Error Messages in this chapter Check operation by performing the verification procedures located in the HP 8590 E Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Calibration Guide Record all results in the performance test record Check the brightness with the intensity knob or adjust the focus as described in Chapter 2 if the display focus is poor 8 5 If You Have a Problem Before You Call Hewlett Packard If you suspect the analyzer configuration is wrong Reset the cable TV analyzer configuration to the state it was in when it was originally shipped from the factory using DEFAULT CONFIG Press the following keys More 1 of 3 DEFAULT CONFIG DEFAULT CONFIG Note that DEFAULT CONFIG requires a double key press See the softkey description fo
278. h the cable TV analyzer is originally shipped is included with the unit You can order additional ac power cables for use in different areas Table 1 3 lists the available ac power cables illustrates the plug configurations and identifies the geographic area in which each cable is appropriate 1 11 Preparing For Use Power Requirem ents Table 1 3 AC Power Cables Available CABLE PLUG CABLE CABLE FOR USE PLUG TYPE HP PART DESCRIPTION LENGTH COLOR IN COUNTRY NUMBER CM INCHES 250 8120 1351 Straight BS1363A 229 90 Mint Gray Great Britain 0 8120 1703 90 229 90 Mint Gray Cyprus Nigeria E Do o Singapore L N Zimbabwe A ti 7 250V 8120 1369 Straight NZSS198 ASC112 201 79 Groy raa 8120 0696 90 221 87 Gray New Zeaiand Mainland China 250V 8120 1689 Straight CEE7 Y11 201 79 Mint Gray East and West o Z Europe Central 201 79 Mint G 8120 1692 20 79 ro i African Republic United Arab Republic mm unpolorized in many notions 125V 8120 1348 Straight NEMA5 15P 203 80 Black Sates States 7 203 80 Black anada 8120 1538 90 Samana tO ae 8120 1378 Straight NEMAS 15P 203 80 Jade Gray eee ee il 8120 4753 Streight 230 90 ode Gray phili ipiaes 8120 1521 90 203 80 Jade Gray Saudia Arabia 8120 4754 90 230 90 Jade Gray Taiwon 8120 5182 Streight NEMAS 15P 200 78 Jade Gray Israel 8120 5181 90 200 78 Jade Gray 250V
279. happens you should decrease the span of the cable TV analyzer so that only the signal that you want to measure is displayed U If You Have a Problem Error Messages Trace A is not available Indicates that trace A is in the store blank mode and cannot be used for limit line testing Use CLEAR WRITE A or VIEW A to change trace A from the store blank mode to the clear write mode and then turn on limit line testing U UNDF KEY The softkey number is not recognized by the cable TV analyzer U USING DEFAULTS self cal needed Indicates that the current correction factors are the default correction factors and that the CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routine needs to be performed U Verify gate trigger input is disconnected before CAL AMPTD This message is meant to remind you that nothing should be connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector on the cable TV analyzer rear panel during the CAL AMPTD routine U VID BW FAIL Indicates the video bandwidths have failed H Waiting for gate input Indicates that the cable TV analyzer needs an external trigger signal to use the time gating functions Before using the time gating functions you should ensure there is a trigger pulse connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector on the rear panel of cable TV analyzer and that the GATE OUTPUT is connected the EXT TRIG INPUT connector If you do not want to use the time gating functions press PRESET U 8 28 Options and Accessories
280. he amplitude readout so that the displayed signal level represents the signal level at the input of the preamplifier The preamplifier gain offset is displayed at the top of the screen and is removed by entering zero The preamplifier gain offset is entered using the numeric keypad Press CAL STORE if you want the analyzer to use the current preamplifier gain offset when power is turned on Preamplifier gain offset is set to zero when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed The preamplifier gain value is not affected by an instrument preset Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE 6 70 FFT MARKERS FFT Menu Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions if the FFT mode is already active pressing FFT MARKERS only activates the FFT markers If the FFT mode is not active then the FFT marker will be activated and the FFT annotation will be displayed but an FFT will not be performed Pressing the 4 AM ON OFF key will give a valid value for the signal in trace B Press FFT OFF to return the analyzer to normal operation An FFT trace can be saved and recalled If a trace has been recalled FFT MARKERS can be used to activate the markers so that the trace can be evaluated Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER accesses the menu of keys to initiate and evaluate a Fourier transform of the analyzer displayed data Activating other analyzer functions will automatically exit the FFT function or will corrupt the display See Tab
281. he bandwidth that includes 99 of the total mean carrier power and is equivalent to 99 power bandwidth It is measured by determining the lower and upper frequency limits where 0 5 of the total mean carrier power is below the lower frequency limit and 0 5 is above the upper frequency limit Occasionally percentages other than 99 are specified Glossary 18 parameter units Standard units of measure which include the following Measured Unit Unit Parameter Name Abbreviation frequency hertz HZ power level decibel relative to milliwats dBm power ratio decibel dB voltage volt V time second s electrical current ampere A impedance resistance ohm Q peak detection mode The analyzer state where circuits calculate the peak value of a displayed signal This value is determined by evaluating a series of measured values from an active trace peak detector A detector that follows the peak or envelope of the signal applied to it The standard detector in an analyzer is typically a peak detector MIL STD EMI measurements usually call for peak detection Refer also to quasi peak detector and envelope detector percent amplitude modulation A measure of the amount of amplitude modulation on a signal The measurement value is a comparison of the power in the modulation signal to the power in the signal being modulated Percent amplitude modulation can be calculated as follows where dB is the ratio of the power of the signal to the pow
282. he resolution bandwidth until the distortion products are visible Press BW RES Bw and then use the step down key C to reduce the resolution bandwidth until the distortion products are visible For best dynamic range set the mixer input level to 30 dB and move the signal to the reference level press AMPLITUDE More 1 of 2 MAX mR LEVEL 30 ab The spectrum analyzer automatically sets the attenuation so that a signal at the reference level will be a maximum of 14 dBmV at the input mixer To measure a distortion product press peak search to place a marker on a source signal To activate the second marker press MARKER 4 Using the knob adjust the second marker to the peak of the distortion product that is beside the test tone The difference between the markers is displayed in the active function block To measure the other distortion product press PEAK search NEXT PEAK This places a marker on the next highest peak which in this case is the other source signal To measure the difference between this test tone and the second distortion product press MARKER A and use the knob to adjust the second marker to the peak of the second distortion product See Figure 4 24 4 35 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Identifying Distortion Products Using the RF Attenuator and Traces ioe 45 47 AUG 18 1993 MKA A 1 013 MHZ REF 441 dBmv AT 10 aR 61 71 dB PEAK 0G 10 J6
283. he spectrum analyzer _ Connect a signal generator to the spectrum analyzer s INPUT 75 Q Set the signal generator frequency to 200 MHz and the amplitude to 0 dBm Set the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer to 400 MHz and the span to 500 MHz press_trrequency 400 MHz 500 MHz The signal shown in Figure 4 20 produces harmonic distortion products in the spectrum analyzer s input mixer 2 Change the span to 200 MHz press SPAN 200 MHz 3 Change the attenuation to 0 dB press AMPLITUDE ATTEN AUTO MAN 0 dBmVJ To determine whether the harmonic distortion products are generated by the spectrum analyzer first save the screen data in trace B Press TRACE TRACE A B C until trace B is underlined then CLEAR WRITE B Allow the trace to update two sweeps and press VIEW B freak search MARKER A The spectrum analyzer display shows the stored data in trace B and the measured data in trace A Next increase the RF attenuation by 10 dB press AMPLITUDE ATTEN AUTO MAN and the step up key C _ once See Figure 4 21 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Identifying Distortion Products Using the RF Attenuator and Traces 15 36 04 AUG 26 1993 MKR AO Hz REF 38 8 daBmv AT 10 GB Boa aB REF LVL PEAK LOG 10 4B AUTO MAN SCALE LOG LIN INT AMP ON OFF WA VBI Sc Fg CORR More Z 1 of 2 CENTER 400
284. highest peak finding next 6 100 highest signal peak 6 135 HIGH SWEEP IN OUT 2 9 HOLD 2 10 6 80 horizontal signal positioning 6 49 how to call Hewlett Packard 8 10 HP 8591C cable TV analyzer key menus 7 3 17 Index 14 HP B amp amp W PRINTER 6 131 HP IB address 6 16 HP IB cable 9 8 HP IB interface connector 2 9 HP IB Option 021 9 3 HP PaintJet 6 105 identifying distortion products 4 30 identify the signal FFT 6 133 IDNUM 6 3 6 81 impact cover Option 040 9 4 impulse noise measurement 4 27 increase frequency readout resolution 4 9 informational messages 8 14 INIT FLT 6 3 6 81 initial inspection 1 5 INPUT 75 Q 2 5 input and output auxiliary control 6 19 input attenuation control 6 17 input impedance 6 8 1 INPUT Z 500 75Q 6 81 inserting a memory card 2 27 installation external keyboard 3 68 installation manual see User s Guide 9 6 instrument preset 6 112 instrument state 2 4 intensity control 2 5 interface connectors 2 9 intermodulation distortion third order 4 34 INTERNAL CARD 6 82 INTERNAL STATE 6 82 Internal Trace 6 82 K keyboard external keyboard functions 3 65 keyboard external 3 65 keyboard operation external 3 68 key functions external keyboard 3 65 key menus 7 2 knob 2 5 2 10 Index 15 L label softkey 2 4 laserjet plots 6 110 LAST SPAN 6 83 length GATE LENGTH 6 77 level triggering gate control 6 76 LIMIT FAIL 3 3
285. ied trace U INVALID STOP INDEX Indicates that the ending trace element specified for a range of trace elements is not within the trace range of the specified trace U INVALID STORE DEST The specified destination field is invalid U INVALID TRACE The specified trace is invalid U INVALID TRACE NAME The specified trace name is not allowed Use an underscore as the second character in the trace name or avoid beginning the trace name with the following pairs of letters LB OA OL TA TB TR MA MF TS OT and DR U 8 22 If You Have a Problem Error Messages INVALID TRACENAME __ Indicates the specified trace could not be saved because the trace name is not allowed To avoid this problem use an underscore as the second character in the trace name or avoid beginning the trace name with the following pairs of letters LB OA OL TA TB TR MA MF TS OT and DR U INVALID VALUE PARAMETER _ __ The specified value parameter is invalid U INVALID VARDEF _ The specified variable name is not allowed To avoid this problem use an underscore as the second character in the variable label or avoid beginning the variable label with the following pairs of letters LB OA OL TA TB TR MA MF TS OT and DR U INVALID WINDOW TYPE The specified window is invalid See the description for the TWNDOW programming command U LO UNLVL Indicates that the cable TV analyzer local os
286. ified service request is active Service requests are a form of informational message and are explained in HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide M STEP GAIN ATTN FAIL Indicates the step gain has failed H Stop at marker not available with negative detection Indicates that the marker counter cannot be used when negative peak detection is selected To use the marker counter turn off negative peak detection with DETECTOR PK SP NG U TABLE FULL Indicates the upper or lower table of limit lines contains the maximum number of entries allowed Additional entries to the table are ignored U TG SIGNAL NOT FOUND Indicates the tracking generator output signal cannot be found Check that the tracking generator output RF OUT 75 Q is connected to the cable TV analyzer input connector with an appropriate cable U TG UNLVL This message can indicate the following that the source power is set higher or lower than the cable TV analyzer can provide that the frequency span extends beyond the specified frequency range of the tracking generator or that the calibration data for the tracking generator is incorrect See Stimulus Response Measurements in Chapter 5 of this guide for more information U Too many signal with valid N dB points Indicates the N dB PTS function has located two or more signals that have amplitudes within the specified dB from the signal peak If this
287. imes necessary to keep track of several points on a signal trace Multiple markers are valuable for the measurement of component response such as filters in tracking generator swept measurements The multiple markers feature allows you to place up to four markers on a trace Using the marker table all the markers on the display are annotated in a window below the trace The information is updated at the end of each trace or whenever a marker is activated or updated Each marker can be independently set to read frequency sweep time inverse sweep time or period inverse frequency This allows you to measure pulse repetition rate rise and fall time and the period of a trace all at the same time The marker information can be displayed in absolute amplitude and frequency or it can be in delta amplitude and frequency using one marker as the reference The marker table can also be set to display the marker amplitudes relative to the display line This marker format is only available when using the marker table function V Ie U4 JUL 2Y 1993 MKA 1 202 GHz REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 d8 10 96 dBmv PEAK MARKER gt CF MARKER i NEXT PEAK NEXT PK RIGHT Marker Trace Type Freq Time Amplitude NEXT PK 4 A Freq 306 MHz 28 45 dBmY LEFT 2 A Freq 603 MHz 20 36 dBmv 3 A Freg 904 MHz 19 23 dBmV a A Freq 1202 MHz 10 93 dBmv Mong 1of2 CENTEA 900 MHz SP
288. imit line 7 The table defaults to fixed parameters the upper right corner of the table should be labeled FIXED If it is labeled RELATIVE press More of 2 Then press LIMITS FIX REL so that FIX is underlined LIMITS FIX REL specifies whether or not the limit line is relative to the cable TV analyzer s center frequency and reference level settings When time parameters are used the RELATIVE format only affects the amplitude part of the coordinate pairs The time parameters are always fixed beginning at the left edge of the graticule 8 Specify the first limit line segment to begin at 50 MHz and have an amplitude of 11 dBmV by using the following key sequence SELECT FREQ 50 MHz 11 FLAT Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions NOTE The coordinates for the second point must be entered before the first and limit line segment is displayed 9 Enter the second limit line segment by pressing the following keys 250 MHz 11 SLOPE NOTE Table entries can be edited if you make a mistake To edit an existing segment use SELECT SEGMENT to specify the segment Use SELECT FREQ SELECT AMPLITUD or SELECT TYPE to specify the column you wish to edit 10 Specify the third limit line segment by pressing the following keys 400 14 FLAT You may notice that the end coordinate of segment three is drawn to a point off the top of the cable TV analyzer display This assures that no trace data beyo
289. in zero span it activates a marker which must be placed on the signal that will have an FFT performed on it and MARKER AUTO FFT must be pressed again The resolution bandwidth setting must be wide enough to include the displayed modulation signals Refer to Chapter 5 Measuring Amplitude Modulation Using the Fast Fourier Transform for more information Press FFT OFF to return the analyzer to normal operation The analyzer state prior to pressing MARKER AUTO FFT can be recalled from register 8 Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER changes the analyzer settings so that the frequency at the marker becomes the center frequency Front Panel Key Access Or PEAK SEARCH changes the center frequency step size to match the value of the active marker Press rrequency then CF STEP AUTO MAN to view the step size If marker delta is active the step size will be set to the frequency difference between the markers Front Panel Key Access MARKER FFT STOP MARKER MID SCRN MARKER MINIMUM MARKER PK PK MARKER REF LVL Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions changes the FFT stop frequency to whatever the current value of the FFT marker frequency is within the limitations of the available sweep times This puts the marker on the right side of the graticule Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER changes the frequency at the middle of the FFT display to whatever the current value o
290. increase the bandwidth until the signal amplitude stops increasing and stays the same or until the maximum resolution bandwidth is reached Use the narrowest bandwidth that does not cause a change in the signal amplitude NOTE As the resolution bandwidth is stepped down the modulated signal must be recentered on the Spectrum analyzer display If this is not done the signal amplitude can decrease due to off tuning of the spectrum analyzer and not because of the resolution bandwidth chosen Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function For the best amplitude accuracy the resolution bandwidth should be about 10 times greater than the highest modulation frequency of interest For the 60 Hz fundamental a 1 kHz resolution bandwidth works well If harmonics are not a concern a 100 kHz resolution bandwidth can be used and it will provide a faster update rate c Press Bw VID BW AUTO MAN MAN and use the step keys to decrease the video bandwidth until the amplitude of the measured signal drops Then step the bandwidth up until the signal amplitude stops increasing or until the maximum video bandwidth is reached Use the narrowest video bandwidth that does not cause a change in the signal amplitude For the best amplitude accuracy the video bandwidth should be about 10 times greater than the highest modulation frequency of interest For the 60 Hz fundamenta
291. ine Functions Limit Line Functions This section describes the limit line functions in the order that they are usually used Pressing DISPLAY then Limit Lines accesses the softkey menus used for creating a limit line Press Edit Limit to edit an existing limit line table or If no limit line table currently exists this will allow you to create one If a limit line exists currently and you would like to purge it and create a new one press Edit Upper and Mare 1 of 2 Then press PURGE LIMITS two times to clear the existing limit line table and access the limit line editing menu NOTE After pressing PURGE LIMITS the first time the message If you are sure press key again to purge data will appear Pressing PURGE LIMITS a second time purges the limit line table PRESET turns limit line testing off if it is onl but does not clear an existing limit line table Selecting the Type of Limit Line Table Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions The LIMITS FRQ TIME key selects the type of limit line parameters Parameters can be entered as frequency amplitude coordinates or as time amplitude coordinates Use the LIMITS FRQ TIME key to underline the desired choice of either frequency or time parameters Frequency is the default selection If TIME is selected SELECT TIME will replace SELECT FREQ in the Edit Limit menus The second column of the limit line table is labeled START FREQ when frequen
292. ing 5 The printer usually resides at the first device address To enter address 1 for the printer press PRINTER ADDRESS 1 Hz 6 Select the configuration for your printer by pressing the appropriate key Note that the softkey is activated when the key title is underlined Set Colr Printer Press this key to print in color if the cable TV analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard color printer then select the appropriate printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page prior to formfeeding the page One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfeeding each printout NOTE To proceed with the three printouts per page format after printing one printout per page it is necessary to press PRINTER SETUP Pressing PRINTER SETUP resets the internal counter 1 27 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting Set B amp W Printer Press this key to print in black and white then press one of the following keys to select the appropriate printer mode e Press HP B amp W PRINTER if the cable TV analyzer is connected to a Hewlett Packard printer Selecting any Hewlett Packard printer results in three printouts per page prior to formfeeding the page One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfeeding each printout NOTE To proceed with the three printouts per page format after printing one printout per page it is necessary to press PRINTER SETUP Pressing PRINTER SETUP re
293. ing these keys will not affect the gate utility settings and graphics unless the utility is entered with the new settings Front Panel Key Access Option 107 only determines if the gate is enabled on the edge of the trigger input or on a threshold level of the input signal If the gate control is set to EDGE the edge of the input signal triggers the timer for the gate delay When the gate control is set to LVL the gate follows the positive level of the signal connected to GATE TRIGGER INPUT When the gate control is set to level the functions of gate delay and gate length no longer apply and therefore the GATE DELAY GATE LENGTH and EDGE POL POS NEG softkeys are blanked The gate utility does not allow level triggering The gate will automatically be set to edge trigger on entry to the gate utility Front Panel Key Access SWEEP 6 76 GATE DELAY GATE LENGTH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Option 07 onLy sets the duration of the delay after an edge trigger before the gate switch closes The gate delay can be set from 1 ps to 65 535 ms in 1 pS steps If the GATE DELAY softkey is accessed outside of the time gate utility it turns off the gate markers but does not affect the gate utility settings When the gate utility is entered the current value of the gate delay will be used The GATE DELAY softkey can be accessed from within the gate utility under the Define Gate menu
294. inter results in three printouts per page prior to formfeeding the page One printout per page can be achieved by manually formfeeding each printout NOTE To proceed with the three printouts per page format after printing one printout per page it is necessary to press PRINTER SETUP Pressing PRINTER SETUP resets the internal counter e Press EP MX80 SML LRG if the cable TV analyzer is connected to a MX 80 Epson or other compatible B pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will print two printouts to a page and will print softkey labels if desired See step 8 Pressing this key to underline LRG will print only one printout to a page and will not print the softkey labels Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting e Press EP LQ570 SML LRG if the cable TV analyzer is connected to a LQ 570 Epson or other compatible 24 pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will print two printouts to a page and will print softkey labels if desired See step 8 Pressing this key to underline LRG will print only one printout to a page and will not print the softkey labels 8 If you want the softkey labels to be printed with the cable TV analyzer display printout press PRT MENU ON OFF so that ON is underlined Note that this function does not work when EP MX80 LRG or EP LQ570 LRG is pressed 9 Press Previous Menu COPY DEV PRMT PLT PRNT should be underlined then COPY 1 21 Preparing For U
295. ion Option 915 CCESSOTIES ia e eh oe Gy ae pa Bee A ela RE Bridgesss 4230 aes amp 4 eer Se Ae ee AC Power Source ann Ha eee Se ae Se External Keyboard 0 0 G04 a a Ge a HEBAIBY Gable iat ack it eee ey A ee er ae Mea el Ge Memory Cards rossos e 4 whe ee Re ee Plotteri fe ee a te Ao ea a A Eee de B Bh Premier te te Pie k be dee ss Spare See ES 9 10 Rack Slide Kit wie 3 ae boo ae tela a i wo Hake be 9 10 RS 232 Cable ev eat ee Boe ae ek ee Suk te Seo a 9 10 Transit Cases si oso e Ye a ea Yee Soe BOE Re 9 10 i 1 i i 1 J 1 D i 4 WWM MWMONNAMMMUNOF HP WWW WD Glossary Index Contents 6 Figures l 1 HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer 2 en 1 2 1 2 Setting the Line Voltage Selector Switch 1 8 1 3 Checking the Line Fuse 2 2022 1 9 l 4 Reference Connector o a ew a ee a 1 13 1 5 Example of a Static Safe Work Station 2 02 2 1 40 2 1 Front Panel Feature Overview 2 3 2 2 Rear Panel Feature Overview 2 7 2 3 Adjusting the Fine Focus 2 12 2 4 Screen Annotation ao bee ce he a ee WR ew en cab 2 13 2 5 Relationship between Frequency and Amplitude 2 18 2 6 Reading the Amplitude and Frequency 2 20 2 7 Inserting the Memory Card 0 2 27 2 8 Memory Card Battery Date Code Location 2 29 2 9 Memory Card Battery Replacement 2 30 2 10 Rear Panel Battery Informat
296. ion control or representation of data Glossary 4 CISPR The acronym for the Comit International Special des Perturbations Radio electriques International Special Committee on Radio Interference or the International Commercial EMC Advisory Committee clear write mode This is an analyzer function that clears the specified trace A B or C from the display then sweeps updates the trace each time trigger conditions are met When trigger conditions are met the new input signal data is displayed then cleared and the process begins again conducted emissions Unwanted signals coupled onto the power or signal lines by a particular device command A set of instructions that are translated into instrument actions The actions are usually made up of individual steps that together can execute an operation Generally for analyzers it is a sequence of code that controls some operation of an analyzer These codes can be keyed in via a controller or computer Refer also to function continuous sweep mode The analyzer condition where traces are automatically updated each time trigger conditions are met CORR Annotation indicating a corrected measurement condition exists It appears when correction factors are being applied to measurement results If the CORR message is not displayed the measurements may not meet specifications Glossary 5 correction factor The factor by which a measurement reading must be multiplied to cor
297. ion Label 2 31 3 1 Marker Table Display 0 0 048 3 4 3 2 Peak Table Display tj ca 4a Be a a 3 6 3 3 Inserting the Memory Card o a a a 3 17 3 4 Typical Limit Line Display 3 35 3 5 The Completed Limit Line Table 2 3 38 3 6 Limit Line Segments 008 3 43 3 7 Segment Types 2 2 ee 3 47 3 8 Upper and Lower Limit Line Testing 3 51 3 9 Analog Display Mode 04 3 53 3 10 Windows Display Mode 3 54 3 11 Amplitude Correction Display 002002 3 57 3 12 Completed Amplitude Correction Table 3 60 3 13 Amplitude Correction Points 3 62 4 1 Set Up for Obtaining Two Signals 02022 4 4 4 2 Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude 2 2 4 5 4 3 Resolution Bandwidth Requirements for Resolving Small Signals eet hecho a den eet ara Shed Tae pega N 4 6 4 4 Signal Resolution with a 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth 4 7 4 5 Signal Resolution with a 30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth 4 8 4 6 Using the Marker Counter 2 0 0002002 4 10 4 7 After Zooming In on the Signal 2 2 2 4 12 4 8 Using Marker Tracking to Track an Unstable Signal 4 15 Contents 7 Contents 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 Viewing
298. ird Order Intermodulation Distortion Two tone third order inter modulation distortion is a common problem in communication systems When two signals are present in a system they can mix with the second harmonics generated and create third order inter modulation distortion products which are located close to the original signals These distortion products are generated by system components such as amplifiers and mixers Example Test a device for third order inter modulation This example uses two sources one set to 300 MHz and the other to approximately 301 MHz Other source frequencies may be substituted but try to maintain a frequency separation of approximately 1 MHz 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 23 FILTER LOWPASS FILTER Figure 4 23 Third Order Intermodulation Equipment Setup 4 34 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Identifying Distortion Products Using the RF Attenuator and Traces Set one source to 300 MHz and the other source to 301 MHz for a frequency separation of 1 MHz Set the sources equal in amplitude in this example the sources are set to 44 dBmV Tune both signals onto the screen by setting the center frequency between 300 and 301 MHz Then using the knob center the two signals on the display Reduce the frequency span to 5 MHz for a span wide enough to include the distortion products on the screen To be sure the distortion products are resolved reduce t
299. irectly affected by the operation of the time gated spectrum analyzer capability but many signals that are appropriate for time gating far example pulsed RF signals will not be counted correctly by the marker counter function Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only First signal When the time gate will be actively viewing the second signal When the time gate will be actively viewing the first signal Second signal Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Ip REF 10 0 dim ATTEN 10 dB GTPOS a 10 dB SWEEPT IME 1 1 0 sec VA VB we FC CORR CENTER 50 000 MHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RES BW 100 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 1 0 sec Figure 5 17 Viewing Time Sharing of a Frequency with a Spectrum Analyzer Description of Items in Figure 5 17 Trace display without the time gate function on Trace display of the finstt siggad withh the time gate on Trace display off tthe sodi siall witth the time gate on 5 36 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability to View Puls
300. isplay The state of the last active window will become the instrument state when the windows display is turned off Front Panel Key Access WINDOWS ION displays the output of the YTO extra fine tune DAC FM TUNE that is on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL accesses the softkey menu used for selecting the characters Y Z underscore _ space or for clearing the screen title Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or zeros the value of the delta marker to establish a new reference The ZERO MARKER softkey is in the pulse parameter entry menus of the gate utility Front Panel Key Access SWEEP changes the frequency span to zero and turns off marker track if it is on Front Panel Key Access 6 154 ZONE CENTER ZONE PK LEFT Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions allows the zone markers to be moved in frequency without changing the zone span The zone markers are vertical lines marking the zone on the upper window They correspond with the frequency range displayed in the lower window As the zone markers are moved the center frequency of the lower window is changed but the lower window will not be updated unless it is active The zone can be moved beyond the frequency range that is being displayed in the upper window Its movement is limited to the frequen
301. ite mode The second letter is A representing trace A The trace B trace mode is SB indicating trace B B is in the store blank mode S The trace mode annotation for trace C is displayed under the trace mode annotation of trace A In Figure 2 4 the trace C trace mode is SC indicating trace C C is in the store blank mode S Refer to Table 2 1 for the screen annotation codes for trace trigger and sweep modes The WINDOWS display mode splits the screen into two separate displays Only one of these displays is active at a time The currently active window will have a solid line around the graticule rather than a broken line The complete annotation is not available for each window because of space limitations The display will be compressed slightly when using the PAL or NTSC format for the MONITOR OUTPUT instead of the normal format The PAL and NTSC formats have less vertical resolution than the cable TV analyzer display The top and bottom of the cable TV analyzer display are compressed slightly so that all of the information can be fit into the size required by the MONITOR OUTPUT Table 2 1 Screen Annotation for Trace Trigger and Sweep Modes Trace Mode Trigger Mod Sweep Mode W clear write traces A B C F freerun C continuous M maximum hold traces A B L line S single sweep V view traces A B C V video S store blank traces A B C E external M minimum h
302. itial spectrum analyzer settings when measuring a signal without signal delay NOTE Refer to the guidelines in Table 5 1 when measuring a signal with signal delay 5 51 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only To use Table 5 4 and Table 5 5 e Determine the pulse width of the signal you want to measure then use Table 5 4 to determine the gate delay resolution bandwidth gate length and video bandwidth spectrum analyzer settings e Determine the pulse repetition rate of the signal then use Table 5 5 to determine the spectrum analyzer s sweep time setting NOTE The peak detection mode is recommended for making gated measurements Table 5 4 Gate Delay Resolution Bandwidth Gate length and Video Bandwidth Settings Pulse width 7 Resolution Video Bandwidth Bandwidth 1 Mkz 1 MHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 10 kHz 0 kHz 0 kHz 0 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz kHz 1 kHz kHz kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 5 kHz 33 ms 1 kHz When using the short gate delays you may notice the gate delay time jitter by 1 ys This jitter is due to the spectrum analyzer s 1 MHz gate clock and it does not indicate a problem 5 52 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 1
303. itions a card reader is not installed the memory card is write protected check the position of the switch on the memory card the memory card is a read only memory ROM card or a memory card has not been inserted INVALID CHECKSUM USTATE The user defined state does not follow the expected format U INVALID COMPARE OPERATOR An IF THEN or REPEAT UNTIL routine is improperly constructed Specifically the IF or UNTIL operands are incorrect U INVALID DET FM or TV option only Indicates that the selected detector cannot be used until the appropriate option is installed in the cable TV analyzer U INVALID ENTER FORMAT The enter format is not valid See the appropriate programming command description to determine the correct format U INVALID lt file name gt NOT FOUND Indicates that the specified file could not be loaded into cable TV analyzer memory or purged from memory because the file name cannot be found U INVALID FILENAME Indicates the specified file name is invalid A file name is invalid if there is no file name specified if the first letter of the file name is not alphabetic or if the specified file type does not match the type of file See the description SAVRCLW or STOR programming command for more information U If You Have a Problem Error Messages INVALID FILE NO ROOM Indicates that there is insufficient space available on the memory card to store the data U INVALID HP IB ADRS OPERAT
304. its for the 5 V supply when using the AUX INTERFACE connector Exceeding the current limits may result in loss of factory correction constants Do not use the AUX INTERFACE as a video monitor interface Damage to the video monitor will result 2 8 CAUTION 12 16 17 18 Getting Started Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer AUX INTERFACE provides a nine pin D subminiature connector for control of external devices Refer to the specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for a more detailed description Interface connectors interfaces for RS 232 standard and HP IB Option 021 interface buses that support remote instrument operation and direct plotting or printing of screen data AUX IF OUTPUT is a 50 Q 2 1 4 MHz IF output that is the down converted signal of the RF input of the cable TV analyzer Amplitude correction factors are not applied to this signal AUX VIDEO OUTPUT provides detected video output before the analog to digital conversion proportional to vertical deflection of the trace Output is from 0 V to 1 V Amplitude correction factors are not applied to this signal EXT TRIG INPUT TTL accepts the positive edge of an external voltage input that triggers the cable TV analyzer internal sweep source HIGH SWEEP IN OUT TTL indicates when the cable TV analyzer is sweeping or can be grounded to stop sweeping EXT KEYBOARD connector is provided with the interface connector The ext
305. ix menu Edit Done erases the prefix from the analyzer screen and restores the previous menu Use Edit Done when prefix characters have all been entered Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or SAVE can be accessed through the limit line menu Pressing EDIT DONE erases the limit line table from the analyzer screen and restores the menu accessed by the Limit Lines softkey Use EDIT DONE when all the limit line values have been entered Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY allows flatness correction constants to be viewed or modified This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access 6 59 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions EDIT LAST Edit Limit Edit Lower Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information starts the DLP editor function and allows the most recent item that was being edited in the DLP editor buffer to be accessed again The item will not be in the analyzer user memory until it is processed by the SAVE EDIT softkey The DLP editor memory remains intact when the instrument is preset and when it is powered off Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE allows you to edit the current limit line tables by accessing Edit Upper Edit Lower Edit Up Low and Edit Mid Delt Use PURGE LIMITS under any of the above edit m
306. jacent Channel Power 9 To use the extended Adjacent Channel Power function press Previous Menu then press ADJ CHAN POWER extd Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements vn REF 15 0 dBmv AT 10 dB SINGLE MEAS CONT SWEEP CENTER FREQ ACPGRAPH ON OFF Setup Previous Menu CENTER B25 03000 MHz SPAN 79 47 KHz RES BW 1 0 KHZ VBW 10 KHZ SwP 300 msec Figure 5 37 Adjacent Channel Power Extended 10 A graph of the adjacent channel power ratio as a function of channel spacing can be calculated and displayed by pressing ACPGRAPH ON OFF so ON is underlined The numerical ACP results are not displayed The top graticule line represents an ACP ratio of 0 dB and the horizontal center represents a channel spacing of zero hertz 4 MKA A 30 00 kHz JEF 15 0 dBmv AT 10 dB 749 70 UB e INGLE 3MPL fanu CHAN Power fexta 34 5 dBmv MEAS 06 if 13 ay Py B CTE J it llh HT SWEEP MARKER A i 30 00 kHz CENTER 49 70 dB Fue G ACPGRAPH ON OFF JA SB ICIES I GAPH MKA CORRI ON OFF ae Menu JENTER 829 03000 MHz SPAN 79 47 kHz AES BW 1 0 KHZ VBW 10 KHZ SWP 300 msec Figure 5 38 Adjacent Channel Power Graph 5 72 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Power Measurement Functions to make T
307. k the fuse insert the tip of a screwdriver in the slot at the middle of the container and pry gently to extend the container NOTE The fuse container is attached ta the line module it cannot he removed The fuse closest to the cable TV analyzer is the fuse in use If the fuse is defective or missing install a new fuse in the proper position and reinsert the fuse container 1 10 WARNING Preparing For Use Power Requirements Power Cable The cable TV analyzer is equipped with a three wire power cable in accordance with international safety standards When connected to an appropriate power line outlet this cable grounds the instrument cabinet Failure to ground the cable TV analyzer properly can result in personal injury Before turning on the cable TV analyzer you must connect its protective earth terminals to the protective conductor of the main power cable Insert the main power cable plug only into a socket outlet that has a protective earth contact DO NOT defeat the earth grounding protection by using an extension cable power cable or autotransformer without a protective ground conductor If you are using an autotransformer make sure its common terminal is connected to the protective earth contact of the power source outlet socket Various power cables are available to connect the cable TV analyzer to the types of ac power outlets unique to specific geographic areas The cable appropriate for the area to whic
308. keys CATALOG ALL CATALOG STATES CATALOG TRACES CATALOG PREFIX CATALOG DLP CATALOG AMP COR CATALOG LMT LINE or CATALOG DISPLAY accesses LOAD FILE When cataloging analyzer memory using CATALOG REGISTER press LOAD FILE to recall the contents of a state or trace register into analyzer memory To use the LOAD FILE function use the step keys to view sections of the directory use the knob to select a file then press LOAD FILE Trace data is loaded into trace B See the softkey descriptions for CATALOG CARD and CATALOG REGISTER Use of the LOAD FILE softkey is not recommended for recalling limit line tables or amplitude correction factors stored in analyzer memory Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE_ MAIN COIL DR Main Menu MAIN SPAN Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Pressing CONFIG LOCAL after the analyzer has been placed in the remote mode places the analyzer in the local mode and enables front panel control During remote operation R appears in the lower right corner of the screen indicating remote and talk A T or L may appear during remote operation indicating talk or listen Pressing the key removes the R symbol in the lower right corner Front Panel Key Access CONFIG displays the output produced by the main coil driver on the AT Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only
309. keys that control the bandwidth functions RES BW AUTO MAN VID BW AUTO MAN VBW RBW RATIO VID AVG ON OFF and the EMI BW Menu Also see the RES BW AUTO MAN softkey description CAL accesses the softkey menus used for the self calibration service diagnostics and service calibration functions For more information about self calibrating the analyzer see Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines in Chapter 2 CAL AMPTD initiates an amplitude self calibration routine Connect CAL OUT to the analyzer input before pressing CAL AMPTD Remove the cable from the rear panel GATE INPUT before starting the self calibration routine NOTE If the frequency calibration and amplitude calibration self calibration routines are both used the CAL FREQ softkey function should always be initiated before the CAL AMPTD softkey function Front Panel Key Access CAL CAL FETCH retrieves stored self calibration correction factors from the last calibration saved using CAL STORE Front Panel Key Access 6 21 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions CAL FREQ CAL FREQ amp AMPTD CAL STORE CAL TIMEBASE CAL TRK GEN 6 22 initiates a frequency self calibration routine Connect CAL OUT to the analyzer input before pressing CAL FREQ Remove the cable from the rear panel GATE INPUT before starting the self calibration routine Front Panel Key Access initiates both the freq
310. l a 1 kHz video bandwidth works well 7 Press and AM ON OFF so that ON is underlined The spectrum analyzer reads out the percent AM of the largest modulation frequency An arrow indicates the signal being measured See Figure 5 1 This measurement does not include all of the harmonics of the modulating signal NOTE e The percent AM function will not run if the SIGNAL CLIPPED error message is being displayed Increase the reference level until the error message goes away e To return to the spectrum analyzer state prior to running the FFT function press the FFT OFF softkey This turns off the FFT function Press RECALL INTERNAL STATE and 8 to recall the state from state register 8 e When the FFT measurement is active pressing the key will cycle between the MEAS USER and FFT menus Stimulus Response Measurements NOTE This application should only be performed using an HP 8591C cable TV analyzer equipped with Option 011 What Are Stimulus Response Measurements Stimulus response measurements require a source to stimulate a device under test DUT a receiver to analyze the frequency response characteristics of the DUT and for return loss measurements a directional coupler Characterization of a DUT can be made in terms of its transmission or reflection parameters Examples of transmission measurements include flatness and rejection A reflection measurement is return loss A spectrum analyzer combined with a
311. l assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access accesses the softkey menu used for selecting screen title or prefix characters S through X Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or SAVE SWEEP SWEEP CONT SGL SWEEP DELAY SWEEP Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions accesses the sweep time menu and accesses the sweep time softkey functions SWP TIME AUTO MAN and SWEEP CONT SGL The key also accesses the GATE ON OFF softkey which turns on the gate function and the Gate Control softkey which accesses the gate menus switches the analyzer between the continuous sweep mode and the single sweep mode If the analyzer is in single sweep mode SGL is underlined Press to enable a sweep when in single sweep mode When continuous sweep mode is in use one sweep follows another as soon as it is triggered Pressing PRESET turning the power on and pressing PRESET SPECTRUM all select continuous sweep Front Panel Key Access SWEEP or TRIG Option 107 on ly delays the start of sweep with respect to the gate trigger edge in the time domain window of the gate utility The time segment being displayed can be shifted up to 65 msec after the gate trigger edge in 1 psec increments Front Panel Key Access SWEEP displays the RAMP signal from the sweep ramp generator that is located on the A7 Analog Interfac
312. last item 6 60 DONE 6 57 double display 6 103 downloadable programs 3 28 DROOP 6 4 6 57 DSP LINE ON OFF 6 57 DWELL TIME 6 57 Index 10 E earphone connector 2 8 EDGE POL POS NEG 6 58 edge triggering time gate utility 6 58 edge triggering gate control 6 76 Edit Amp Cor 3 61 6 58 EDIT CAT ITEM 6 58 Edit Done 6 59 EDIT DONE 3 38 3 48 3 60 3 64 6 59 EDIT FLATNESS 6 3 6 59 editing DLPs 6 63 editing amplitude corrections 3 59 editing limit lines 3 37 EDIT LAST 6 60 Edit Limit 3 39 6 60 Edit Lower 3 41 6 60 Edit Lower limit line format 3 44 Edit Mid Delt 3 41 6 6 1 Edit Mid Delt limit line format 3 45 Editor 6 63 Edit Up Low 3 41 6 62 Edit Up Low limit line format 3 45 Edit Upper 3 36 3 41 6 62 Edit Upper limit line format 3 44 EDIT UPR LWR 6 62 electrostatic discharge 1 39 EMI bandwidth 120 kHz 6 7 200 Hz 6 7 9 kHz 6 7 EMI BW Menu 6 63 ENTER 6 63 entering a prefix 3 19 ENTER PRI 6 63 ENTER REF EDGE 6 64 ENTER WIDTH 6 64 epson format 6 68 EPSON LARGE 6 131 epson 1q570 6 68 epson mx80 6 68 epson printer 6 68 EPSON SMALL 6 131 ERASE ALL 6 65 ERASE CARD 6 66 ERASE DLP 6 65 ERASE DLP MEM 6 65 ERASE MEM ALL 6 65 ERASE MEM CARD 6 66 Index 11 ERASE STATE 6 67 ERASE STATEALL 6 67 ERASE TRACE 6 67 ERASE TRACEALL 6 67 erase user programs and variables 6 56 ESD 1 39 reducing damage caused by ESD 1 39 static safe accessories 1 40 static sa
313. le 6 6 Table 6 6 Compatibility of FFT With Other Functions Function Compatibility Info Catalog functions corrupts the display DLP Editor corrupts the display arker Table exits FFT dB Points measurement exits FFT Peak Table exits FFT Power Menu measurementssexits FFT Show Options corrupts the display Time Gate functions exits FFT TOI measurement exits FFT Windows exits FFT Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER 6 71 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions FFT OFF exits the FFT mode and menus returning the analyzer to normal operation Front Panel Key Access FFT STOP FREQ allows the user to enter the stop frequency for the desired FFT span This sets the analyzer sweep time by the relationship FFT stop freq 400 sweep time x 2 NOTE When using the FFT stop frequency function the knob and step key increments are not optimal for positioning the signal To use the knob or step keys to position the signal select sweep time as the active function Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER FINE TUNE DAC displays the output of the YTO fine tune DAC which is produced on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access 6 72 FLAT Flatness Data FM COIL DRIVE FM GAIN FM OFFSET Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions draws a zero slope line betw
314. le TV Analyzer Calibration Guide o HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Getting ipped wi yzer Started and Quick Reference Guide this book e HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectr 5 ipped wi yzer Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Ana Programmer s Guide e HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectr ipped with analyzer Option 915 on y Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Assembly level Repair Service Guide e HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum ipped with analyzer Option 915 onfy Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Component level Repair Service Guide Contact your nearest sales and service center for current part number 1 6 CAUTION Power Requirements The cable TV analyzer is a portable instrument and requires no physical installation other than connection to a power source Do not connect ac power until you have verified that the line voltage is correct the proper fuse is installed and the line voltage selector switch is properly positioned as described in the following paragraphs Damage to the equipment could result Table 1 2 Power Requirements Characteristic 118 V Requirement Input voltage 90 V to 132 V rms 198 V to 264 V rms Frequency 47 Hz to 440 Hz 47 Hz to 66 Hz Power lt 500 VA lt 180 W lt 500 VA lt 180 W 230 V Requirement 1 7 Preparing For Use Power Requirements Setting the Line Voltage Selector Switch
315. le detector is activated Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN stops the analyzer sweep at the marker position for the duration of the dwell time The dwell time can be set from 2 milliseconds to 100 seconds Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN selects the marker readout to be displayed in signal frequency sweep time the inverse of the sweep time or the period which is the inverse of the frequency When the instrument is in zero span the frequency type readout cannot be selected Front Panel Key Access provides a list of the four available markers which is updated at the end of each sweep or when a marker is used The marker data can be displayed in different formats It can be in absolute or delta frequency and amplitude formats There is also a delta display line format which can be accessed using the TABLE ADL NRM softkey The marker table is not saved with the and RECALL keys Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN MK TRACE AUTO ABC MK TRACK ON OFF Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions assigns a marker to a trace Pressing MK TRACE AUTO ABC will activate a marker on trace A if there are no markers turned on If a marker is currently active press MK TRACE AUTO ABC until A B or C are underlined The active marker will be moved to the selected trace Selecting the AUTO mode will move the marker to the trace that is automatically selected The selection order is to first look for a
316. led in your analyzer the instrument model number of the analyzer the last five digits of the analyzer serial number and the firmware revision Pressing SHOW OPTIONS changes the softkey label to EXIT SHOW Press EXIT SHOW to erase the SHOW OPTIONS function information Pressing SHOW OPTIONS displays the individual option numbers Front Panel Key Access activates an FFT marker that must be put on a signal to verify that it is not being displayed at the wrong frequency due to aliasing Once the marker is on the signal press SIGNAL ID again to initiate the signal identification function The signal should move half of a division to the right for 2 seconds A marker will be put at the frequency that the signal should move to If the marker appears on the signal when it is shifted then the frequency readout of the signal is correct Sweep time limitations may alter or stop the function from executing If the marker or the signal is less than half of a division from the right side of the display before SIGNAL ID is pressed then the routine may not function correctly and a warning message can be displayed Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER 6 133 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions SINGLE FFT SINGLE ME AS initializes the fast Fourier transform FFT function If the analyzer is in single sweep mode an FFT is performed on trace A without taking a new sweep If the analyzer is in conti
317. lem Error Messages CAL NBW 200 Hz notch amp failed Indicates that the 200 Hz resolution bandwidth is not the correct shape for the calibration routine H CAL NBW 200 Hz notch failed Indicates that the 200 Hz resolution bandwidth is not the correct shape for the calibration routine H CAL NBW 200 Hz width failed Indicates that the 200 Hz resolution bandwidth is not the correct bandwidth for the calibration routine H CAL NBW gain failed Indicates that one of the resolution bandwidths is not the correct amplitude for the calibration routine H CAL NBW width failed Indicates that one of the resolution bandwidths is not the correct width for the calibration routine H CAL PASSCODE NEEDED Indicates that the function cannot be accessed without the pass code For the DEFAULT CAL DATA function the pass code is setting the center frequency of the cable TV analyzer to 37 Hz M CAL RES BW AMPL FAIL The relative insertion loss of the resolution bandwidth is incorrect This message also sets SRQ 110 H CAL SIGNAL NOT FOUND Indicates the calibration signal CAL OUT cannot be found Check that the CAL OUT and the cable TV analyzer input connectors are connected with an appropriate cable If the calibration signal is connected to the cable TV analyzer input but cannot be found press FREQUENCY 37 Hz CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 DEFAULT CAL DATA If the calibration signal still cannot be found press FREQ
318. line files or amplitude correction factor files Before recalling a trace limit line file or amplitude correction factors file that was saved under a prefix other than the current prefix change the current prefix to the prefix used when the data was saved If windows are being used only the trace of the active window can be recalled Pressing LOAD FILE is an alternate way to load trace data but not recommended for recalling limit line files or amplitude correction factor files from the memory card into analyzer memory See Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card in Chapter 3 for more information Front Panel Key Access RECALL catalogs all the programs and variables stored in analyzer memory in bytes along with the remaining memory available in bytes Press CATALOG REGISTER to catalog states traces limit line tables and amplitude correction factors saved in analyzer memory Pressing CATALOG ALL catalogs all traces states amplitude correction factors programs display images and limit line tables stored on the memory card when cataloging the memory card Front Panel Key Access or SAVE_ 6 25 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions CATALOG AMP COR Cat alog Card catalogs the amplitude correction factor tiles that are on the memory card Use the CATALOG REGISTER softkey to catalog amplitude factors saved in analyzer memory amplitude correction factors saved in ana
319. ll notify you of the cost of the repair after examining the instrument See Calling HP Sales and Service Offices and How to Call Hewlett Packard for more information 8 3 Before You Call Hewlett Packard Before calling Hewlett Packard or returning the cable TV analyzer for service please make the checks listed in Check the basics If you still have a problem please read the warranty printed at the front of this guide If your cable TV analyzer is covered by a separate maintenance agreement please be familiar with its terms Hewlett Packard offers several maintenance plans to service your cable TV analyzer after warranty expiration Call your HP Sales and Service Office for full details If you want to service the cable TV analyzer yourself after warranty expiration contact your HP Sales and Service Office to obtain the most current test and maintenance information 8 4 If You Have a Problem Before You Call Hewlett Packard Check the basics In general a problem can be caused by a hardware failure a software error or a user error Often problems may be solved by repeating what was being done when the problem occurred A few minutes spent in performing these simple checks may eliminate time spent waiting for instrument repair QO D Check that the cable TV analyzer is plugged into the proper ac power source Check that the line socket has power Check that the rear panel voltage selector switc
320. lowing cable TV analyzer keys More 1 of 3 More 2 of 3 DEFAULT CAL DATA 3 Perform the CAL FREQ and CAL AMPTD routines or the CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routine Be sure CAL OUT is connected to the cable TV analyzer input NOTE If the CAL OUT signal cannot be found press Frequency 37 before performing the CAL FREQ or CAL FREQ amp AMPTD 4 Set the display position by using the steps in If the display position is offset 5 Press CAL CAL STORE NOTE Some user configurations may need to be reset DEFAULT CAL DATA can only be accessed by entering a center frequency of 37 Hz The center frequency 37 Hz acts as a pass code for DEFAULT CAL DATA If You Have a Problem Before You Call Hewlett Packard How to Call Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard has Sales and Service offices around the world to provide you with complete support for your cable TV analyzer To obtain servicing information or to order replacement parts contact the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office listed in Table 8 1 In any correspondence or telephone conversations refer to the instrument by its model number and full serial number 8 10 If You Have a Problem Before You Call Hewlett Packard Table 8 1 Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices US FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters California Northern California Southern Colorado Hewlett Packard Company Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co 1
321. lyzer memory are stored in trace registers Amplitude correction factors are saved with an a before the memory card file name Amplitude factors can be saved in analyzer memory by either loading in amplitude correction factors from a memory card defining amplitude correction factors using a remote programming command AMPCOR or using EDIT AMP COR See Entering Amplitude Correction Factors in Chapter 3 for more information Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE accesses a menu with the cataloging functions for the memory card CATALOG ALL CATALOG STATES CATALOG TRACES CATALOG PREFIX CATALOG DLP CATALOG AMP COR CATALOG LMT LINE and CATALOG DISPLAY Each catalog function displays catalog information and accesses a menu containing LOAD FILE and DELETE FILE The catalog contains information about the items stored on the memory card See Figure 6 1 and Table 6 2 Use the step keys to view different sections of the directory and the knob to select a file Press LOAD FILE to load the selected file into analyzer memory Press DELETE FILE to delete the selected file from the memory card Unlike saving to the internal memory data is saved as a file on the memory card The files stored on the memory card are in the logical interchange format LIF 6 26 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions STATE TRACE s AAAAA_21 STATE _22 STATE s11 STATE dPROG DLP d0o0_5 DL
322. mation to ensure that the memory card is inserted correctly Improper insertion causes error messages to occur but generally does not damage the card or instrument Care must be taken however not to force the card into place The cards are easy to insert when installed properly 1 Locate the arrow printed on the card s label 2 Insert the card with its arrow matching the raised arrow on the bezel around the card insertion slot See Figure 2 7 pu122c Figure 2 7 Inserting the Memory Card 3 Press the card into the slot When correctly inserted about 19 mm 0 75 in of the card is exposed from the slot 2 27 Getting Started Memory Card Insertion and Battery Replacement Changing the Memory Card Battery It is recommended that the memory card battery be changed every 2 years The battery is a lithium commercial CMOS type battery part number CR 2016 or HP part number 1420 0383 NOTE The minimum lifetime of the battery under ordinary conditions is more than 2 years The date that the memory card battery was installed is either engraved on the side of the memory card or written on a label on the memory card If the memory card does not have a label with the date that the battery was installed use the date code engraved on side of the memory card The date code engraved on the memory card consists of numbers and letters engraved in the black plastic on the side of the memory
323. me is optimized when the pulse repetition interval is entered and coupled Press Define Coupling Then press Pulse Param to enter the pulse parameters This activates the time domain window and turns off the time gate If pulse parameters have previously been entered the values will be displayed 13 Use the ENTER REF EDGE ENTER WIDTN and ENTER PRI softkeys to enter the pulse parameters These parameter entry tools allow pulse parameters to be entered using a marker or through the keypad Press Previous Menu to return to the coupling menu 14 Press CPL RBW ON OFF ON to turn on the resolution bandwidth coupling Press CPL VBW ON OFF ON and CPL SWP ON OFF ON to turn on the video bandwidth and sweep time coupling 15 Press Main Menu and look at the signal in the time domain window 16 Press UPDATE TIMEFREQ so that FREQ is underlined or press NEXT to activate the frequency window instead of the time domain window If the gate was not on when the user left the frequency window it may be necessary to press Define Gate and GATE ON OFF ON to turn the gate on again NOTE If the gate menus are exited without turning the gate utility off by pressing another front panel key press the SWEEP key twice to return to the last gate utility menu used Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only Note that Option 107 is required to perform this application The me
324. mit line tables SAVE LIMIT saves the current limit line tables in the current mass storage device either cable TV analyzer memory or a memory card To determine the current mass storage device press SAVE LIMIT If MAX REG appears on the cable TV analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Enter a register number then press to save the current limit line table in the current mass storage location RECALL LIMIT recalls limit line tables from the current mass storage device either cable TV analyzer memory or a memory card To determine the current mass storage device press RECALL LIMIT If MAX REG appears on the cable TV analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device To recall a limit line enter the register number that the limit line table was saved under then press ENTER When recalling a limit line from the memory card it is necessary that the current prefix matches the prefix that the limit line was stored with Use Change Prefix to change the current prefix 3 48 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using Limit Line Functions Procedure for Creating an Upper and Lower Limit Line This is a basic procedure for creating a sample of upper and lower limit lines The CAL OUT signal is used for the test signal l 2 Press PRESET Since thi
325. mit lines are constructed from left to right The segment is defined by its beginning point See Figure 3 6 NOTE Up to 20 segments can be specified for an upper or lower limit line table When entering a limit line segment the frequency time and amplitude values will be listed as asterisks xxx until new values are entered The new segment will be listed last until both the frequency for time and the amplitude values have been entered Once the frequency time and an amplitude value are entered the segment will be sorted into the limit line table according to frequency or time DSP LINE ON OFF Change Title Limit CENTER 300 8 MHZ SPAN 288 8 MHZ i RES BW 3 8 MHz VBW 308 kHz SWP 28 0 msec Figure 3 6 Limit line Segments 3 43 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions Description of Items in Figure 3 6 Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts the first segment First segment Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts the second segment Second segment Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts the third segment Third segment Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts the fourth segment Fourth segment Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts the fifth segment Fifth segment Frequency and amplitude coordinate that starts the sixth segment l 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 Selecting the Frequency or Press SELECT FREQ then ent
326. mory Card 3 Press the card into the slot When correctly inserted about 19 mm 0 75 in of the card is exposed 3 17 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card 4 If this is a new memory card it must be formatted before use Since formatting a card deletes any data stored on the memory card catalog the card before using the format card function if you suspect the memory card might contain data To format a new card press CONFIG More 1 of 3 Card Config FORMAT CARD The message If you are sure press key again to purge data appears on the cable TV analyzer screen Press FORMAT CARD again FORMAT CARD requires a double key press To catalog a memory card press CONFIG More 1 of 3 Card Config Catalog Card Catalog Card either displays any existing data that is on the memory card if the memory card has been formatted or displays INVALID CARD DIRECTORY if the card has not been formatted Use BLANK CARD if you wish to delete the files from the memory card Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card To Enter a Prefix Memory card data can be stored and recalled using a prefix To enter a prefix press DISPLAY or CONFIG Change Prefix Pressing Change Prefix accesses a menu containing the letters of the alphabet the underscore symbol _ the number symbol a space and the clear function To select a character press the
327. mplitude correction tables SAVE AMP COR saves the current amplitude correction table in the current mass storage device cable TV analyzer memory or memory card To determine the current mass storage device press SAVE AMP COR If MAX REG appears on the cable TV analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press SAVE or RECALL INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device Press SAVE AMP COR enter a register number then press ENTER to save the current amplitude correction table in cable TV analyzer memory or on the memory card RECALL AMP COR recalls amplitude correction tables from the current mass storage device cable TV analyzer memory or memory card To determine the current mass storage device press RECALL AMP COR If MAX REG appears on the cable TV analyzer display the current mass storage device is analyzer memory If PREFIX is displayed the memory card is the mass storage device Press or RECALL INTERNAL CARD to change the current mass storage device When recalling an amplitude correction table from the memory card it is necessary that the current prefix match the prefix that the table was originally stored with Use Change Prefix to change the current prefix To recall an amplitude correction table enter the register number that the table was saved under then press ENTER 3 64 External Keyboard
328. mum level is detected in successive sweeps Front Panel Key Access turns on the marker counter when ON is underlined If no marker is active before MK COUNT ON OFF is pressed a marker is activated at center screen Press MK COUNT ON OFF so that OFF is underlined to turn the marker counter off Press CNT RES AUTO MAN to change the marker counter resolution to an uncoupled value An may appear in the upper right of the display along with the message Marker Count The ratio of the resolution bandwidth to span must be greater than 0 01 for the marker count function to work properly Reduce Span appears on screen if the bandwidth to span ratio is less than 0 01 If Option 130 narrow resolution bandwidth is not installed the marker count function is limited to resolution bandwidths gt 300 Hz Widen RES BW indicates that the resolution bandwidth must be increased The function will count the largest signal is a 300 Hz bandwidth even if a narrower bandwidth setting is used Front Panel Key Access MKR FCTN Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions MK NOISE ON DFF MK PAUSE ON OFF MK READ F TIP MK TABLE ON OFF reads out the average noise level referenced to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth at the marker position If no marker is present a marker appears at the center of the screen The root mean square noise level normalized to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth is read out The samp
329. mvV Slope 20 ial sen 20 dBmV Slope 20 dBmvV Slope 20 dBmV Slope 20 re 20 Bet Flat 20 dBmvV Point NOTE When entering a limit line segment the frequency and amplitude values will be listed as asterisks gt gt until new values are entered The new segment will be listed last until both the frequency and amplitude values have been entered Once the frequency and at least one amplitude value are entered the segment will be sorted into the limit line table according to frequency Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions To edit an existing segment use SELECT SEGMENT to specify the segment Then use SELECT FREQ SELECT AMPLITUD or SELECT TYPE to specify the column that you wish to edit 11 Press More 1 of 2 then EDIT DONE when all values have been entered into the limit line table 12 Press LMT TEST ON OFF so that ON is underlined LIMIT PASS is displayed on the cable TV analyzer screen if the measurement sweep is within the limit lines LIMIT FAIL is displayed if the measurement sweep is not within the limit lines 14 29 41 JUL 29 1993 Ua REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 dB rr RECALL PEAK LIMIT PASS LIMIT dB SAVE LIMIT Change T Title LMT DISP Y N AUTO WA SB 5C FC LMT TEST CORA ON OFF Edit Limit CENTER 300 00 MHz SPAN 50 00 MHz RES BW 3 0 MHZ VBW 1 MHz SWP 20 0 msec Fig
330. n zero frequency span To find descriptions of specific spectrum analyzer functions refer to Chapter 6 Key Descriptions 4 2 Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function In responding to a continuous wave signal a swept tuned spectrum analyzer traces out the shape of the spectrum analyzer s intermediate frequency IF filters As we change the filter bandwidth we change the width of the displayed response If a wide filter is used and two equal amplitude input signals are close enough in frequency then the two signals appear as one Thus signal resolution is determined by the IF filters inside the spectrum analyzer The resolution bandwidth RES BW function selects an IF filter setting for a measurement Resolution bandwidth is defined as the 3 dB bandwidth of the filter The 3 dB bandwidth tells us how close together equal amplitude signals can be and still be distinguished from each other Generally to resolve two signals of equal amplitude the resolution bandwidth must be less than or equal to the frequency separation of the two signals If the bandwidth is equal to the separation a dip of approximately 3 dB is seen between the peaks of the two equal signals and it is clear that more than one signal is present See Figure 4 2 In order to keep the spectrum analyzer calibrated sweep time is automatically set to a value that is inversely proportional to the square of the resoluti
331. nal spurious response The undesired responses that appear on an analyzer display as a result of the input signal Internally generated distortion products are spurious responses as are image and multiple responses These can be either harmonic responses or nonharmonic responses Harmonic responses are second third fourth and so on harmonics of the input signal Nonharmonic responses are intermodulation and residual responses state register The area of user memory in the analyzer where measurement results and associated analyzer settings are stored step The increment of change that results when you press the front panel step keys 4 and or by program commands stimulus response mode The operating state that allows an analyzer to make measurements similar to those of a network analysis measurement system Analyzers with this ability use tracking generator functions The tracking generator may be an external instrument stand alone tracking generators or designed into the analyzer hardware Measurement results are displayed in a relative amplitude scale resulting from a variation plus or minus from a reference normalized value stored in a trace stop start frequency Terms used in association with the stop and start points of the frequency measurement range Together they determine the span of the measurement range Glossary 25 sweep time The time it takes the local oscillator to tune across the selected span
332. nal amplitude stops increasing and stays the same or until the maximum resolution bandwidth is reached Use the narrowest bandwidth that does not cause a change in the signal amplitude NOTE As the resolution bandwidth is stepped down the modulated signal must be recentered in the filter bandwidth This is a zero span display To center the signal select rrequency and adjust the center frequency to maximize the amplitude of the trace If this is not done the signal amplitude can decrease due to off tuning of the spectrum analyzer and not because of the resolution bandwidth chosen For the best amplitude accuracy the resolution bandwidth should be about 10 times greater than the highest modulation frequency of interest For the 60 Hz fundamental a 1 kHz resolution bandwidth works well If harmonics are not a concern a 100 kHz resolution bandwidth can be used and it will provide a faster update rate 5 7 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function Press BW VID BW AUTO MAN MAN and use the step keys to decrease the video bandwidth until the amplitude of the measured signal drops Then step the bandwidth up until the signal amplitude stops increasing or until the maximum video bandwidth is reached Use the narrowest video bandwidth that does not cause a change in the signal amplitude For the best amplitude accuracy the video bandwid
333. nalyzer display Press CAL STORE if you want the analyzer to use this position permanently so that it is not lost when the power is turned off Front Panel Key Access changes the vertical position of the signal on the analyzer display Press CAL STORE if you want the analyzer to use this position permanently so that it is not lost when the power is turned off Front Panel Key Access CAL Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions DACS DATEMODE MDY DMY dBmV dBuV DEFAULT CAL DATA 6 50 changes the DAC numbers of the span DAC YTO coarse tune DAC YTO fine tune and YTO FM tune DAC located on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access changes the display of the date from a month day year format to a day month year format It is set to a month day year format by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG Front Panel Key Access CONFIG changes the amplitude units to dBm for the current setting log or linear Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE changes the amplitude units to dBmV for the current setting log or linear Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE changes the amplitude units to dBuV for the current setting log or linear Front Panel Key Access_ ametitupe accesses the factory default correction factors A special pass code is required for use If the message Self cal needed appears when DEFAULT GAL DA
334. nalyzer memory 6 Use the numeric keypad to enter a number from 0 to the maximum register number and then press ENTER Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from Analyzer Memory To Recall Limit Line Tables or Amplitude Correction Factors p Press RECALL If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL 2 Press Internal Trace This accesses a menu with LIMIT LINES and AMP COR 3 Press either LIMIT LINES to recall a limit line table or AMP COR to recall amplitude correction factors 4 Enter the register number under which the data was stored 5 Press ENTER To Protect Data From Being Overwritten If you want to protect all state trace limit line and amplitude correction data from being overwritten press SAVE then SAV LOCK ON OFF so that ON is underlined Table 3 1 summarizes the functions when saving and recalling data to and from cable TV analyzer memory NOTE This feature does not protect state trace limit line and amplitude correction data from ERASE MEM ALL Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from Analyzer Memory Table 3 1 Summary of Save and Recall Operations Analyzer Memory Operation Screen Register Key Sequence Title Range Available SAVE STATE INTRNL register number 1 to 8 RECALL INTERNAL STATE register number save trace Yes O to MAX AEG SAVE Trace Intrnl TRACE A TRACE B or TR
335. nce the resolution bandwidth must be less than or equal to the frequency separation of the two signals a resolution bandwidth of 100 kHz must be used Change the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz by pressing 100 kHz Two signals are now visible as in Figure 4 2 Use the knob or step keys to further reduce the resolution bandwidth and better resolve the signals 4 4 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function 14 15 00 AUG 18 1993 d REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 cB PEAK AUTO MAN LOG 10 dB VIO BW AUTO MAN RES BW 100 kHz VBw RBW RATIO VID AVG ON OFF CENTER 300 000 MHz SPAN 2 000 MHz RES BW 100 KHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 20 0 msec Figure 4 2 Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude As the resolution bandwidth is decreased resolution of the individual signals is improved and the sweep time is increased For fastest measurement times use the widest possible resolution bandwidth Under preset conditions the resolution bandwidth is coupled or linked to span Since the resolution bandwidth has been changed from the coupled value a mark appears next to RES BW in the lower left corner of the screen indicating that the resolution bandwidth is uncoupled Also see the AUTO courte key description in Chapter 6 NOTE To resolve two signals of equal amplitude with
336. nd complete marker functions Glossary 2 analog display A display where the trace data is generated by deflecting the electron beam to match the signal amplitude as it sweeps across the screen The refresh rate of the trace data is equal to the analyzer sweep rate Refer also to CRT persistence ASCII The acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange It is an eight part code 7 bits plus parity check used for data information interchange An ASCII value is a specific combination of bits ranging from 0 to 255 that represent characters in machine language that computers and controllers can understand attenuation A general term used to denote a decrease of signal magnitude in transmission from one point to another Attenuation may be expressed as a scalar ratio of the input to the output magnitude in decibels bandwidth selectivity This is a measure of the analyzer s ability to resolve signals unequal in amplitude It is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB bandwidth for a given resolution filter IF Bandwidth selectivity tells us how steep the filter skirts are Bandwidth selectivity is sometimes called shape factor battery backed RAM Random access memory RAM data retained by a battery RAM memory cards can contain data that is maintained with a battery Refer also to nonvolatile memory blank mode This is an analyzer function that stores any active trace in the analyzer s reserved memory
337. nd from cable TV analyzer memory You can use STATE INTRNL to store up to eight states in analyzer memory and Trace Intrnl to store many traces limit line tables and amplitude correction factors Saving state data saves the cable TV analyzer settings but not the trace data Saving trace data saves the trace data and the state data Limit line data and amplitude correction factors are stored in trace registers but state and trace data are not recalled with the limit line data or the amplitude correction factors States traces limit line tables and amplitude correction factors are saved in cable TV analvzer memory even if the instrument is turned off or PRESET is pressed Refer to the Catalog Internal softkey description in Chapter 6 for more information about cataloging cable TV analyzer memory Refer to Table 3 1 at the end of this section for a summary of saving and recalling data to and from cable TV analyzer memory To Save a State 1 Set up the cable TV analyzer settings to be saved 2 Press AVE If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL Selecting INTERNAL selects the cable TV analyzer memory as the mass storage device 3 Press STATE INTRNL SAVE REG is displayed on the cable TV analyzer display 4 Enter a number from one to eight using the numeric keypad and the state is saved automatically 3 8 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from Analyzer Memory
338. nd the end of the limit line will cause the test to fail 11 Specify the fourth limit line segment by pressing the following keys 600 14 POINT Since the limit line in this procedure has only four segments specified the frequency value of segment four the last segment is set to 600 MHz which is greater than the stop frequency of the display Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions 09826946 JUL 29 1993 REF 48 8 dBmV AT 10 dB set B amp W PEAK Printer LOG aay i 7 FIXED set Colr SEG START FREQ UPPERAMP TYPE as cssssssseseserseensecsen Printer FREQ 600 000000 MHz PERNIS 1 50 00 MHz 11 80 dV FLAT 2 250 0 MHz 11 0 d amp aV SLOPE PRT MENU 3 400 8 MHz 14 0 dBQyo FLAT ON OFF WA s 4 600 0 MHz 8 i SC F 5 ENE erare EE E a etl ete Moh PRINTER COR k y X SETUP Previous Menu CENTER 308 8 MHz SPAN 588 0 MHZ RES BW 3 8 MHz VBW MHz SWP 20 8 msec T Figure 3 5 The Completed limit line Table 12 Press More 1 of 2 then EDIT DONE when all the segments have been entered 13 Press LMT TEST ON OFF so that ON is underlined This turns the limit testing on For example LIMIT FAIL is displayed because the calibration signal exceeds the limit line 14 Disconnect the CAL OUT from the cable TV analyzer INPUT 75 Q LIMIT PASS is displayed since no signal exceeds the limit line 3 38 Editing Creating or Viewing a Limit Line Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit l
339. nel LINE switch to turn it on 6 Execute the self calibration routines after allowing the cable TV analyzer to warm up for 30 minutes Chapter 2 includes guidelines on how often the routines should be performed 7 Connect CAL OUT to INPUT 75 Q Check that the rear panel 1OMHz OUTPUT is connected to EXT REF IN 8 Press CAL then CAL FREQ amp AMPTD to perform the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines Press CAL STOKE when the routine is finished 9 For tracking generator Option 011 connect the RF OUT 75 Q to the INPUT 75 Q then press More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 and CAL TRK GEN to run the self calibration routine Press and CAL STORE when the routine is finished 1 4 Initial Inspection Inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged keep it until you have verified that the contents are complete and you have tested the cable TV analyzer mechanically and electrically Table l 1 contains the accessories shipped with the cable TV analyzer If the contents are incomplete or if the cable TV analyzer does not pass the verification tests in the calibration guide notify the nearest Hewlett Packard office If the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress also notify the carrier Keep the shipping materials for the carrier s inspection The HP office will arrange for repair or replacement without waiting for a claim settlement
340. nes will be common to both windows 3 56 Learn How to Enter Amplitude Correction Factors This section provides an overview of amplitude correction a procedure for creating amplitude correction data and descriptions of the amplitude correction functions Refer to Key Descriptions in Chapter 6 for more information on a specific amplitude correction function Amplitude corrections provide an easy way to adjust trace data with a set of amplitude and frequency parameters while the cable TV analyzer is sweeping the measurement range Every measurement sweep of data is adjusted by the amplitude correction values When using the amplitude correction functions an A is displayed at the left hand side of the graticule edge 42 58 18 AUG 18 1993 tir 48 8 dBmV AT 10 dB E A K CENTER Biy 83 AR Hz VBW 1 MHZ SPANS A Mz r Figure 3 11 Amplitude Correction Display item Descrintion of items in Figure 3 11 1 Indicates amplitude correction factors are on 2 Amplitude corrections ON 3 Amolituda corrections OFF 3 57 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features learn How to Enter Amplitude Correction Factors Procedure for Creating Amplitude Correction Factors This procedure demonstrates how to create and activate amplitude correction data Detailed descriptions of the amplitude correction functions follow this procedure 1 Press PRESET NOTE A signal is not used in this procedure for demonstrating how to
341. nge the HP IB address of the printer The printer address is set to 1 by pressing DEFAULT CONFIG Front Panel Key Access resets the printer sets the printer to 60 lines per page and skips line perforations This function enables you to obtain up to three printouts per page The printer paper should be at the top of the form before using this function The PRINTER SETUP function may not work with printers that are not recommended see Chapter 9 for recommended printers Front Panel Key Access CONFIG allows the softkey labels to be printed along with the analyzer display This function operates when the copy key is used in a print configuration The PRT MENU function is set to ON when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed Front Panel Key Access CONFIG 6 117 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Pulse Param PURGE AMP COR PURGE LIMITS 6 118 accesses the gate utility menus for entering the pulse parameters reference edge pulse width and pulse repetition interval If pulse parameters have previously been entered pressing Pulse Param causes a list of the current values to be displayed Front Panel Key Access SWEEP clears the current amplitude correction factors table Pressing PURGE AMP COR displays the message If you are sure press key againtopurge data Pressing PURGE AMP COR a second time clears the amplitude correction data Press SAVE AMP amp OR to save amplitude corre
342. nly switches between the time domain and frequency domain windows in the gate utility The window is updated to reflect the current state when it is activated The WINDOWS key will also switch between the windows Front Panel Key Access SWEEP accesses a menu available for your use for user defined programs and key functions Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER 6 150 VBW RBW RATIO VID AVG ON OFF Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions changes the amplitude units to V for the current setting log or linear Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE selects the ratio between the video and resolution bandwidths If signal responses near the noise level are visually masked by the noise the ratio can be set to less than 1 to smooth this noise The knob and step keys change the ratio in a 1 3 10 sequence Pressing PRESET and AUTO ALL sets the ratio to 0 300 X The ratio can be changed using the step keys or the knob Front Panel Key Access initiates a digital averaging routine that averages displayed signals and noise This function does not affect the sweep time bandwidth or other analog characteristics of the analyzer Annotation on the left side of the screen indicates the current number of sweeps averaged The default number of sweeps is 100 Increasing the number of sweeps smooths the trace To turn off the video averaging function press VID AVG ON OFF so that OFF is underlined
343. ns the mixing products to the analyzer s IF input FFT The abbreviation for fast Fourier transform It is a mathematical operation performed on a time domain signal to yield the individual spectral components that constitute the signal in the frequency domain Refer also to spectrum firmware An assembly made up of hardware and instruction code that are integrated to form a functional set which cannot be altered during normal operation The instruction code permanently installed in the circuitry of the instrument is classified as ROM read only memory The firmware determines the operating characteristics of the instrument or equipment Each firmware version is identified by a revision code number or date code flatness The displayed amplitude variation corresponding to the tuned frequency range of the analyzer Flatness of 1 dB indicates that maximum and minimum values of the analyzer s frequency response are less than 2 dB apart Glossary 9 Fourier transform See FFT frequency accuracy The uncertainty with which the frequency of a signal or spectral component is indicated either in an absolute sense or relative to some other signal or spectral component Absolute and relative frequency accuracies are specified independently frequency range The range over of frequencies which the analyzer performance is specified The maximum frequency range of many microwave analyzers can be extended with the application of external
344. nt display image press DISPLAY CARD use the numeric keypad to enter a number and press ENTER If you want the file name of the stored data to contain a prefix press Change Prefix to enter a prefix before storing the data If the display image was stored using a prefix the file name for the display image consists of i preEx register number If no prefix was specified the file name is i register number Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY CNTL I displays the status of the auxiliary connector input control line I on the analyzer screen high 1 or low 0 in TTL Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL Dispose User Mem accesses the softkeys ERASE MEM CARD ERASE DLP MEM ERASE STATEALL ERASE TRACEALL and ERASE MEM ALL which are used to erase the user programs and variables that are in analyzer memory NOTE Use DELETE FILE to selectively delete stored programs or variables from analyzer memory Front Panel Key Access CONFIG DONE DROOP DSP LINE ON OFF DWELL TIME Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions exits the pulse parameter entry menus in the gate utility assigning the current marker value to be the value of the parameter being entered Pressing DONE also restores the sweep delay and sweep time of the time domain window to the values that existed prior to any adjustments made during pulse parameter entry Front Panel Key Access SWEEP disables the
345. nt of the level of the test signals The measurement algorithm used by TOI ON OFF see above equation corrects for the two test signals being different amplitudes The result is a calculated value for the two test signals being equal amplitude and is independent of the absolute level of either test signal In order to minimize the measurement error it is best to keep the test signals as close as possible to the same level and to the top of the screen The TOI measurement accuracy assuming the measured signals are near the top of the display is typically about 1 8 dB 5 64 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Third Order Intermodulation Measurement TOI 4 REF 48 8 dBmV AT 40 ap PEAK rae TOI i 72 1 gB V dB N dB PTS ON OFF AM ON OFF TOI ON OFF CENTER 300 500 MHz SPAN 5 000 MHz RES BW 3 0 kHz VBW 3 kHz SWP 1 67 sec Figure 5 34 Third Order Intermodulation Measurement Example Use the TOI function to make a measurement 1 Press PRESET Connect two equal amplitude signals with different frequencies to the spectrum analyzer s INPUT 75 Q 2 Press rrequency and enter the frequency of one of your input signals to place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency 3 Press SPAN Change the span until only the two signals and their two distortion products appear on the display 4 Press and TOI ON OFF ON to activat
346. nuous sweep it is put in single sweep a sweep is taken and the FFT is performed If the analyzer is already in the FFT mode it is put in single sweep a sweep is taken and an FFT is performed Pressing SINGLE FFT again or pressing will take another sweep and perform an FFT After using the FFT function the display is in log mode The markers are put in the FFT mode for use in evaluating the data The signal being transformed is in trace A and the Fourier transform of the signal is in trace B Any information that was in trace B and C will be lost Press FFT OFF to return the analyzer to normal operation Refer to Chapter 5 Measuring Amplitude Modulation Using the Fast Fourier Transform Function for more information Front Panel Key Access IMEAS USER sets the functions in the Power Menu so that they make the measurement on a single sweep After a power measurement is activated pressing SINGLE MEAS or SGL SWP initiates a sweep and recalculates the measurement results Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER 6 134 SLOPE or SPAN SPAN ZOOM SPEAKER ON OFF Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions draws a straight line between the coordinate point of the current segment and the coordinate point of the next segment producing limit line values for all frequencies between the two points Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY activates the SPAN function and accesses the frequ
347. ny error messages that appeared on the cable TV analyzer display e A completed Performance Test record Located in the calibration guide e Any other specific data on the performance of the cable TV analyzer Cable TV analyzer damage can result from using packaging materials other than those specified Never use styrene pellets in any shape as packaging materials They do not adequately cushion the instrument or prevent it from shifting in the carton Styrene pellets cause equipment damage by generating static electricity and by lodging in the cable TV analyzer fan 2 Use the original packaging materials or a strong shipping container that is made of double walled corrugated cardboard with 159 kg 350 Ib bursting strength The carton must be both large enough and strong enough to accommodate the cable TV analyzer and allow at least 3 to 4 inches on all sides of the cable TV analyzer for packing material If You Have a Problem Returning the Cable TV Analyzer for Service If you have a front panel cover install it on the instrument if not protect the front panel with cardboard Surround the instrument with at least 3 to 4 inches of packing material or enough to prevent the instrument from moving in the carton If packing foam is not available the best alternative is SD 240 Air Cap from Sealed Air Corporation Commerce CA 90001 Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet covered with 1 1 4 inch air filled bubbles Use the pink Air Cap
348. o 108 MHz Set the spectrum analyzer center frequency for 100 MHz with a span of 20 MHz an attenuator setting of 0 dB and reference level setting of approximately 9 dBmV Your circumstances may be slightly different depending on building shielding and proximity to transmitters 1 Connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input 2 Press PRESET FREQUENCY 100 mnz SPAN 20 MHz NOTE Use a different signal frequency if no signal is available at 100 MHz in your area 3 Press AMPLITUDE 9 GdBmv ATTEN AUTO NAN 0 GdBmv 4 Press SPAN SPAN ZOOM 500 kHz Notice that the signal has been held in the center of the display NOTE If the signal you selected drifts too quickly for the spectrum analyzer to keep up with use a wider span Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Tracking Unstable Signals Using Marker Track and the Maximum Hold and Minimum Hold Functions 5 The signal frequency drift can be read from the screen if both the marker track and marker delta functions are active Press MKR MARKER A MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF the marker readout indicates the change in frequency and amplitude as the signal drifts See Figure 4 8 13 56 04 JUL 29 1993 a MKA A TRK 15 3 kHz REF 14 8 dBmv AT O GB 1 79 dB MK TRACK PEAK ON OFF MK COUNT ON OFF MARKER A MK TABLE ON OFF MK NOISE ON OFF MK PAUSE W ON OFF More 1 of 2
349. o include two signals If the lower window is active you will notice that the span changes corresponding to the changes in the zone marked on the upper window If the lower window is not active press WINDOWS NEXT to make it active 5 Press ZONE PK RIGHT and ZONE PK LEFT and observe the movement of the zone and the changes in the lower window Using Spectrum Analyzer Features learn About the Windows Display 6 Press WINDOWS ZOOM Now a full sized display of the lower window will be displayed Notice the increase in the displayed annotation 7 Pressing WINDOWS NEXT activates the upper window A full sized display of it will be shown and the inactive lower window will not be displayed Press WINDOWS again to activate the lower window and display it again Notice that the zone markers can be used to tell which window is active and being displayed while in the zoom state 8 Press WINDOWS to return to the dual windows display The lower window will still be active 9 Press WINDOWS OFF and the cable TV analyzer returns to normal operation with the active window as the cable TV analyzer state 10 Pressing WINDOWS at this point turns the windows display format on again with the current display as the new upper window A new lower window will be generated based on the zone in the upper window NOTE Markers and limit lines can be used in both windows but they must be turned on independently in each windovu The current limit li
350. of front panel features Refer to Figure 2 1 l Active function block is the space on the screen that indicates the active function Most functions appearing in this block can be changed using the knob step keys or data keys 2 3 Getting Started Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer 2 Message block is the space on the screen where MEAS UNCAL and the asterisk appear If one or more functions are manually set uncoupled and the amplitude or frequency becomes uncalibrated MEAS UNCAL appears Use AUTO couPLe and AUTO ALL to recouple functions The asterisk indicates that a function is in progress 3 Softkey labels are the annotation on the screen next to the unlabeled keys Most of the labeled keys on the cable TV analyzer front panel also called front panel keys access menus of related softkeys 4 Softkeys are the unlabeled keys next to the screen FREqueNCcY SPAN and ampcitupe are the three large dark gray keys that activate the primary cable TV analyzer functions and access menus of related functions 6 INSTRUMENT STATE functions affect the state of the entire cable TV analyzer Self calibration routines and special function menus are accessed with these keys The green key resets the cable TV analyzer to a known state The key accesses the current operating mode of the cable TV analyzer and allows you to change to any operating mode available for your cable TV analyzer All cable TV analyzers have two modes o
351. off When this input is unconnected TTL is set high For Option 107 only 4 TV MON OUTPUT connector provides a connection for an external television monitor 5 EARPHONE connector provides a connection for an earphone jack instead of using the internal speaker 6 GATE OUTPUT TTL provides a TTL signal which indicates gate status when the when the gate is in edge trigger mode A high TTL signal indicates the gate is on a low TTL signal indicates the gate is off GATE OUTPUT is not active in level mode For O ption 107 only 7 EXT REF IN accepts an external frequency source to provide the 10 MHz 2 to 10 dBm frequency reference used by the cable TV analyzer 8 10 MHz REF OUTPUT provides a 10 MHz 0 dBm minimum time based reference signal 9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR adapts the unit to the power source 115 V or 230 V 10 MONITOR OUTPUT drives an external monitor with a signal spectrum analyzer display that has a 15 7 kHz horizontal synchronizing rate It can also be switched to provide an NTSC format output which is compatible with VHS video recorders or a PAL format which is compatible with PAL SECAM video recorders 11 Power input is the input for the line power source Make sure that the line power source outlet has a protective ground contact Turn off the cable TV analyzer before connecting the AUX INTERFACE connector to a device Failure to do so may result in loss of factory correction constants Do not exceed the current lim
352. oftkeys for setting up black and white HP and Epson compatible printers Front Panel Key Access CONFIG accesses the softkey for setting up the HP PaintJet printer Front Panel Key Access CONFIG 6 131 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions SET DATE SET TIME Setup 6 132 allows you to set the date of the real time clock Enter the date in the YYMMDD format using the number keypad and press ENTER Valid year YY values are 00 through 99 Valid month MM values are from 01 to 12 and valid day values are from 01 to 31 Front Panel Key Access CONFIG allows you to set the time of the realtime clock Enter the time in 24 hour HHMMSS format using the number keypad and pressing ENTER Valid hour HH values are from 00 to 23 Valid minute MM and second SS values are from 00 to 59 Front Panel Key Access CONFIG accesses the menu used to set up parameters specific to the power measurements If another front key is pressed exiting the power menus press the key twice to return to the last power menu that was being used Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER changes the sweep control to single sweep if the analyzer is in the continuous sweep mode It executes a sweep after the trigger condition is met SHOW OPTIONS SIGNAL ID Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions displays the number and description of the options instal
353. og Information Table 6 3 Analyzer Memory Catalog Information e of the catalog source es of analyzer memory used Total bytes of analyzer memory available es used by item e of item This table is not applicable when using CATALOG REGISTER or CATALOG ON EVENT 6 29 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions CATALOG LMT LINE 6 30 Unlike saving to the memory card data is saved as an item in analyzer memory Use the step keys to view different sections of the directory and the knob to select a file The selected file is highlighted in inverse video Each of the catalog softkey functions access the menu that has the DELETE FILE function Use DELETE FILE to delete the item from analyzer memory DELETE FILE will not delete a CATALOG ON EVENT item Pressing CATALOG REGISTER accesses a menu that has the LOAD FILE function Use LOAD FILE to load a state or trace from analyzer memory Do not use LOAD FILE to load limit line table and amplitude correction factor items Also see the CATALOG ALL and CATALOG VARIABLS softkey descriptions Front Panel Key Access or SAVE_ catalogs the limit lines on the memory card Press CATALOG REGISTER to catalog limit line tables stored in analyzer memory limit line tables saved in analyzer memory are stored in trace registers Front Panel Key Access jor SAVE_ Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analy
354. old traceC T TV Getting Started Screen Annotation Table 2 2 Screen Annotation tem Description time and data display e xternal keyboard entry Refer to Externall Keytboardi im Chapter 3 arker readout MKR MKR gt MKR FCTN or PEAK SEARCH easurement uncalibrated or function in progress AUTO COUPLE assages Service request Sea Appendix A emote operation Sea LOCAL in Chapter 6 requency span or stop frequency SPAN STOP FREQ l 2 3 5 ES a resolution bandwidth canter frequency or start frequency correction factors on amglituda correction factors on viger tase node 7 v amplitude offset REF LVL OFFSET a ISCALE LOG LIN Refer to the description of the softkey function that was activated plitude scale active function block Menu and Softkey Overview The keys labeled AMPLITUDE FREQUENCY CAL and MKR are all examples of front panel keys Pressing most front panel keys accesses menus of functions that are displayed along the right side of the display These menus are called softkey menus Softkey menus list functions other than those accessed directly by the front panel keys To activate a function on the softkey menu press the unlabeled key immediately to the right of the annotation on the screen The unlabeled keys next to the annotation on the display screen are called softkeys Front panel keys are designated with a box around
355. olution dynamic range The power ratio dB between the smallest and largest signals simultaneously present at the input of an analyzer that can be measured with some degree of accuracy Dynamic range generally refers to measurement of distortion or intermodulation products EMI The abbreviation for electromagnetic interference An EMI measurement determines how much an undesired electromagnetic disturbance impairs the reception of a desired electromagnetic signal Glossary 8 envelope detector A detector circuit whose output follows the envelope but not the instantaneous variation of its input signal This detector is sometimes called a peak detector In superheterodyne analyzers the input to the envelope detector comes from the final IF and the output is a video signal When we put the analyzer in zero span the envelope detector demodulates the input signal and we can observe the modulating signal as a function of time on the display error message A message displayed on the screen indicating missing or failed hardware improper user operation or other conditions that require additional attention Generally the requested action or operation cannot be completed until the condition is resolved external mixer An independent mixer usually having a waveguide input port used to extend the frequency range of those analyzers designed to use them The analyzer provides the local oscillator signal and mixer bias if needed then retur
356. om FM or phase noise on an otherwise stable signal Glossary 10 front panel key Keys typically labeled and located on the front panel of an instrument The key labels identify the function the key activities Numeric keys and step keys are two examples of front panel keys full span A mode of operation in which the analyzer scans the entire frequency band of an analyzer function The action or purpose which a specific item is intended to perform or serve The analyzer contains functions that can be executed via front panel key selections or through programming commands The characteristics of these functions are determined by the firmware in the instrument In some cases a DLP downloadable program execution of a function allows you to execute the function from front panel key selections gain compression The signal level at the input mixer of an analyzer where the displayed amplitude of the signal is a specific number of dB too low due just to mixer saturation The signal level is generally specified for 1 dB or 0 5 dB compression and is usually between 3 dBm and 10 dBm gated measurement See time gate hard copy Information or data printed onto paper as opposed to its being stored on disk or in the instrument s memory harmonic distortion Undesired frequency components added to signals as a result of nonlinear behavior of the device for example a mixer or an amplifier through which signals pass These unwant
357. on bandwidth So if the resolution bandwidth is reduced by a factor of 10 the sweep time is increased by a factor of 100 when sweep time and bandwidth settings are coupled Sweep time is proportional to 1 BW For fastest measurement times use the widest resolution bandwidth that still permits discrimination of all desired signals The spectrum analyzer allows you to select from 1 kHz to 3 MHz resolution bandwidth in a 1 3 10 sequence plus 5 MHz for maximum measurement flexibility 4 3 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Resolving Signals of Equal Amplitude Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function Example Resolve two signals of equal amplitude with a frequency separation of 100 kHz SOURCE COUPLER Figure 4 1 Set Up for Obtaining Two Signals puil7c 1 To obtain two signals with a 100 kHz separation connect the calibration signal and a signal source to the spectrum analyzer input as shown in Figure 4 1 If available two sources can be used 2 If you are using the 300 MHz calibration signal set the frequency of the source 100 kHz greater than the calibration signal that is 300 1 MHz The amplitude of both signals should be approximately 29 dBmV 3 On the spectrum analyzer press PRESET Set the center frequency to 300 MHz the span to 2 MHz and the resolution bandwidth to 300 kHz by pressing 300 MHz 2 MHz then 300 kHz A single signal peak is visible 4 Si
358. one each for the upper and lower limit line segments can be specified per frequency or time component It is not necessary to specify both an upper and a lower amplitude value Specifying only upper amplitude values results in an upper limit line but not a lower limit line Omitting an amplitude point on one limit line does not affect the other limit line The amplitude of the upper limit line is entered by pressing SELECT UPR AMPL entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key The amplitude of the lower limit line is entered by pressing SELECT LWR AMPL entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key With the mid delta limit line table format two amplitude components one representing a mid amplitude value one representing a deviation positive and negative values from either side of this value is specified per frequency component If no deviation is entered the deviation defaults to zero The middle amplitude value is entered by pressing SELECT MID AMPL entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key The deviation is entered by pressing SELECT DLT AMPL entering an amplitude value and pressing a units key NOTE Frequency or amplitude values that are not within the limit line range will be modified For example a frequency value of 3 GHz will be modified to 1 9 GHz Selecting the Segment Type Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions Press SEGMENT TYPE then FLAT SLOP
359. onnected to GATE TRIGGER INPUT on the rear panel If no trigger is present an error message is displayed and the gate utility will not be activated Press PRESET Connect a pulsed RF signal to the spectrum analyzer s INPUT 75 Q 4 Press FREQUENCY and enter the frequency of your input signal to place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency 5 Press AMPLITUDE PEAK SEARCH and MARKER REF LVL to bring the signal to the top of the display 6 Access the gate utility by pressing SWEEP Gate Control and GATE UTILITY W NOTE If the gate menus are exited without turning the gate utility off by pressing another front panel key press the SWEEP key twice to return to the last gate utility menu used 7 Press Define Time to set up the time domain window the upper window Change the sweep time using the TWINDOW SWP TIME softkey so that the pulses are displayed Press SWEEP DELAY and use the knob to center the pulses in the upper window 11 12 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Gate Utility to Simplify Time Gated Measurements Option 107 only The trigger marker reads out the time from the rear panel gate trigger point to the current marker position Turn the trigger marker on by pressing TRIG MKR ON OFF ON and use the knob to move the trigger marker to the edge of the pulse The marker readout indicates the position of the edge relative to the rear panel trigger
360. ons improve dynamic range quasi peak detector A detector circuit designed with time constants that give a weighted value to the amplitude of a detected signal The displayed signal output is an indication of the degree to which the detected signal would impair the intelligibility of a desired signal The time constants rise fall average for EMI purposes are based on the recommendations of CISPR that are in turn based on subjective tests Interference limits for commercial EMI tests are often given in quasi peak values Glossary 20 random access memory RAM random access memory or read write memory is a storage area allowing access to any of its storage locations Data can be written to or retrieved from RAM but data storage is only temporary When the power is removed the information disappears User generated information appearing on a display is RAM data raster display A television like display in which the image is formed by scanning the electron beam rapidly across and slowly down the CRT face and gating the beam on as appropriate The scanning rates are fast enough to produce a flicker free display Refer also to vector display and sweep time read only memory ROM read only memory that is encoded into the analyzer s firmware The data can be accessed read only it cannot be altered by the user reference level The calibrated vertical position on the display used as a reference for amplitude measurement in which th
361. or OELETE FILE SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Previous Menu ASCOEF GHIJKL MNOPQR STUVWX YZ_ Spc Clear More 1 of 2 CATALOG DLP CATALOG ON EVENT Exit Catalog More 2 of 2 EDIT LAST EDIT CAT ITEM APND CAT ITEM SAVE EDIT NEW EDIT Previous Menu EDIT LAST EDIT CAT tTEM APND CAT ITEM SAVE EDIT NEW EDIT Previous Menu Edit Done More 2 of 2 Editor DELETE FILE SELECT PREF IX Exit Catalog Previous Menu EDIT LAST EDIT CAT ITEM APND CAT TEM SAVE EOIT NEW EDIT Previous Menu Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions RECALL NG AND SAVING TO MEMORY CARD that is with CARD selected TRACE A TRACE B CARD gt STATE TRACE C Card gt Trace LIMIT LINES CARD gt DISPLAY AMP COR CARD gt DLP Previous Menu Catalog Card INTERNAL CARD CATALOG ALL LOAD FILE CATALOG STATES CATALOG TRACES DELETE FILE CATALOG PREF IX SELECT PREFIX Change Prefix Exit Cotalog More 1 of 2 Previous Menu ABCDEF Lae GHI JKL gt MNOPOR JNO STUVWX OF tree YZ_ Spc Clear Edit Done More 1 of 2 More 2 of 2 CATALOG DLP LOAD FILE CATALOG AMP COR CATALOG LMT LINE OELETE FILE CATALOG DISPLAY SELECT PREFIX Exit Catalog Exit Catalog More 2 of 2 Previous Menu 7 13 Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions FOR RECALLING AND SAVING TO ANALYZER MEMORY that STATE gt INTRNL 1S Trace gt Intrni SAV LOCK ON OFF Catalog Interna INTERNAL CARD is with TRACE A TRACE B TRACE
362. os are accurately reported whether the transmitted signal contains tones noise or both IF PARAM AUTO is selected the parameters of the instrument state are set for a valid measurement When using PARAM MAN the following conditions must be maintained to make a valid rms measurement e Video bandwidth is at least 10 times the resolution bandwidth e Detector mode is sample SMP You can use DETECTOR SMP PK to select the detector mode Resolution bandwidth is less than or equal to 100 kHz e Video averaging is OFF Neither MAX HOLD nor MIN HOLD trace mode is selected Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER 6 11 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions ALC MTR INT XTAL ALC TEST ALL DLP CARD Amp Cor Option 011 only activates the automatic leveling control ALC function for internal INT leveling or external XTAL or MTR leveling The external leveling input located on the rear panel of the analyzer can be used with a power meter or crystal that has a positive or negative voltage output See specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for the leveling input characteristics External leveling increases the amplitude accuracy by improving the effective source match The meter MTR position narrows ALC loop bandwidth so an HP power meter can be used Front Panel Key Access Option 011 only breaks the leveling loop of the automatic leveling control in the
363. outines whenever the instrument experiences significant environmental changes such as temperature 5 C humidity shock or vibration such as may occur during shipping or transport This is especially important if the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines were performed last in a different environment If the environment is relatively stable for example a lab environment use CAL FREQ amp AMPTD monthly After being turned off overnight the cable TV analyzer will need to warm up but should not require self calibration To achieve optimal amplitude accuracy for relative measurements a Keep the cable TV analyzer in a stable environment b Use CAL FREQ amp AMPTD before beginning the Erst measurement c Keep the cable TV analyzer turned on between measurements d Do not use CAL FREQ 6 AMPTD before subsequent measurements the amplitude drift is normally smaller than the self calibration uncertainty If you change the input signal for EXT REF IN run the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines using CAL OUT Amplitude calibration is required to improve IF centering If accurate self calibration is needed temporarily in a different environment use CAL FREQ amp AMPTD but do not press CAL STORE The temporary correction factors will be used until the cable TV analyzer is turned off or until CAL FETCH is pressed Memory Card Insertion and Battery Replacement Use the following infor
364. ow to the full screen the key still switches the active window between the two windows The windows remain zoomed full screen so the inactive window is not displayed as the active window is switched places the marker on the next highest peak The signal peak must exceed the threshold value Also see the PEAK EXCURSN and THRESHLD ON OFF softkey descriptions Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL Or peak SEARCH moves the marker to the next peak to the left of the current marker The signal peak must exceed the threshold value If there is no peak to the left the marker will not move Also see the PEAK EXCURSN and THRESHLD ON OFF softkey descriptions Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL or peak search moves the marker to the next peak to the right of the current marker The signal peak must exceed the threshold value If there is no peak to the right the marker will not move Also see the PEAK EXCURSN and THRESHLD ON OFF softkey descriptions Front Panel Key Access PEAK searcu 6 100 No User Menu NORMLIZE ON OFF NORMLIZE POSITION Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions is displayed if key number 1 has not been defined by the user Key number 1 can be defined by remote programming commands KEYCMD or KEYDEF Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER subtracts trace B from trace A and adds the result to the display line The result is displayed in trace A The trace data is
365. ower in the occupied bandwidth and the difference between the analyzer center frequency and the center frequency of the occupied bandwidth The measurement can be made on a single sweep or to continuously update at the end of each sweep The center frequency reference level and channel spacing must be set by the user Press PARAM AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined and other analyzer settings will be set automatically set to make a valid measurement Set PARAM AUTO MAN to MAN to manually control all settings The measurement function stops and the analyzer is returned to its prior state when other functions are activated Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER activates the windows display mode and accesses the menu of window zone functions The windows display function splits the screen into two separate displays Only one of these displays is active at a time The currently active window will have a solid line around the graticule rather than a broken line The WINDOWS NEXT key will switch the active display between the upper and lower windows The instrument state of the active window can be changed without affecting the state of the inactive window The complete annotation is not displayed for each window because of space limitations 6 103 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions When the windows display mode is first turned on the top window will contain an inactive copy of the previous f
366. place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency 3 Press amputupe and adjust the reference level to bring the signal near the top of the display 4 Press MEAS USER and Power Menu to access the power measurement functions Press Setup and CHANNEL BANDWDTH Enter the value for the channel bandwidth The spectrum analyzer will use the last entered value for channel bandwidth if it is not entered 5 Press CHANNEL SPACING and enter the value for channel spacing This is optional and is only used to set the center frequency step size Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements 6 Press Previous Menu to return to the main power menu 7 Press CHANNEL POWER to activate the function 11 29 42 AUG 24 1993 REF 22 6 dBmv AT 10 dB SINGLE SMPL CHANNEL PQWER MEAS LOG Pwr 15 38 d amp mv 10 J 3y OBZ dB tudes CSP 40 00 kHz CONT l CBW BO 00 kHz MEAS E E ae CENTER FREQ MT A TE A C PAT d Mia i VIE iW Ih Ut i J Previous CENTEA 825 03000 MHz SPAN 60 00 kHz AES BW 1 0 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 300 msec n a gt ny om Menu Figure 5 39 Channel Power 8 A graph of the channel power as a function of frequency can be calculated and displayed by pressing PWRGRAPH ON OFF so ON is underlined The numerical channel power results are not displayed
367. played that allows you to select the location on the paper for the plotter output If two PLT plots per page are selected then the LOC function is displayed If PET 0 four plots per page are selected then the LOC is displayed Press the softkey until the rectangular marker is in the desired section of the 1 31 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting softkey label The upper and lower sections of the softkey label graphically represent where the plotter output will be located Note that for a multi pen plotter the pens of the plotter draw the different components of the screen as follows Pen Description Number Draws the annotation and graticula Draws trace A Draws trace 8 Draws trace C and the display line Draws user generated graphics and the lower limit line Draws the upper limit line Press Previous Menu COPY DEY PRNT PLT PLT should be underlined then COPY oo NOTE Once the address of the printer and plotter have been entered the cable TV analyzer remembers these addresses even though the power is turned off There is no need to reenter them when the cable TV analyzer is turned off and on 1 32 Equipment Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting Printing Using a Parallel Interface e HP 8591C cable TV analyzer equipped with Option 024 e HP 92284A parallel printer cable e Printer with parallel Interface choose one of the following QO Q m Q
368. plays This allows two different frequency spans to be viewed simultaneously The analyzer state of the two displays can be set independently zero span The case in which an analyzer s local oscillator remains Exed at a given frequency so that the analyzer becomes a fixed tuned receiver In this state the bandwidth is equal to the resolution bandwidth Signal amplitude variations are displayed as a function of time To avoid loss of signal information the resolution bandwidth must be as wide as the signal bandwidth To avoid any smoothing the video bandwidth must be set wider than the resolution bandwidth zoom A term referring to the process of looking at something more closely This may require narrowing the resolution bandwidth or span to view a signal more closely Or it may mean increasing the size of the analyzer display from a partial screen to the full screen Glossary 29 Index Index 10 MHz reference DAC setting 6 22 10 MHz REF OUTPUT 2 8 10V REF DETECTOR 6 4 6 6 10V REF DETECTOR 6 4 6 6 120 kHz EMI BW 6 7 2 200 Hz EMIBW 6 7 2v REF DETECTOR 6 4 6 7 3 3 dB bandwidth measurement 6 99 7 750 RF bridge 9 7 9 9 kHz EMI BW 6 7 A A lt gt B 6 7 A B A ON OFF 6 8 A C 6 8 ABCDFF 6 9 accessories AC power source 9 7 external keyboard 9 8 HP IB cable 9 8 memory card 9 9 plotter 9 9 printer 9 10 rack slide kit 9 10 RF bridge 9 7 RS 232 cable 9 10 transit case 9 10 acce
369. plicit point is automatically used If a visible point segment at the right hand edge of the display is not desired add an explicit last point segment to the limit line table that is higher in frequency than the stop frequency Figure 3 7 demonstrates the different segment types 3 46 12156522 AUG 18 199 REF PERK 48 8 dBmV Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using Limit line Functions Figure 3 7 Segment Types Segment Types Flat upper limit line Slope upper limit line Point upper limit line Point lower limit line Slope lower limit line Flat lower limit line 3 47 Completing Table Entry and Activating Limit Line Testing Saving or Recalling Limit Line Tables Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using Limit Line Functions Pressing EDIT DONE blanks the limit line table from the screen and accesses the menu with LMT TEST ON OFF and LMT DISP Y N AUTO softkeys Pressing LMT TEST ON OFF turns the limit line testing on and off Pressing LMT DISP Y N AUTO Y turns the limit lines display on Pressing LMT DISP Y N AUTO N turns the limit lines display off Pressing LMT DISP Y N AUTO AUTO sets the limit line display to match the limit line test function With AUTO underlined the limit lines are only displayed when limit line testing is turned on Pressing then Limit Lines accesses SAVE LIMIT and RECALL LIMIT These softkey functions provide an easy way to save or recall current li
370. pling the spectrum analyzer settings to pulse characteristics allows easy accurate pulsed signal measurements The types of signals that can be measured using the time gate function include Pulsed RF signals e Time division multiple access TDMA communication system signals e Interleaved or intermittent signals e Signals with transient spectra Time critical signals are present in many different applications A few of the applications are listed below e Digital cellular communication systems require measurements on pulse modulated TDMA signals Measurements must be accurately aligned with the time division multiple access TDMA burst of the communication carrier The time gate can position spectrum analyzer measurement to assess TDMA burst timing and the quality of the burst modulation e Rotating head devices such as VCRs and hard disks have time interleaved signals multiplexed from alternate recording tracks on the storage media The time gate can isolate the spectrum due to a single recording track e Tests required for mobile communication systems often require that the transient spectrum due to pulse modulation be excluded from measurement results 5 29 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Gate Utility to Simplify Time Gated Measurements Option 107 only Example Measure a Pulsed RF signal 1 The rear panel GATE OUTPUT must be connected to EXT TRIG INPUT 2 A TTL trigger signal must be c
371. ponent Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY allows you to view or edit the upper limit line table Up to 20 entries are allowed for the upper limit line table With the upper limit line table format the coordinates of the upper limit line are specified but none are specified for the lower limit line Even if lower limit line values exist or the values had been entered as an upper and lower limit line table the upper limit line values are treated as a separate table from the lower limit line values The upper limit line entries can have independent frequency or time and amplitude coordinates from lower limit line table entries Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY selects upper or lower limit line tables It switches to the limit line table that is not currently being edited Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY 6 62 Editor EMI BW Menu ENTER PRI Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Refer to the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information accesses the menu of down loadable program DLP editor softkeys Programming commands can be used to write a program to control the analyzer The built in DLP editor uses the analyzer rather than an external computer to create view or edit programs These programs can then be sent to the analyzer command parser which is similar to outputting them to the analyzer from an exte
372. ppears on the screen For example connect the CAL OUT signal to the analyzer input change the trigger mode to video and lower the display line The analyzer triggers when the display line reaches the noise floor Front Panel Key Access holds and displays the amplitude data that is in the trace A register The trace A register is not updated as the analyzer sweeps If trace A is deactivated by pressing STORE BLANK A the stored data can be retrieved by pressing VIEW A Front Panel Key Access TRACE holds and displays the amplitude data that is in the trace B register The trace B register is not updated as the analyzer sweeps If trace B is deactivated by pressing STORE BLANK B the stored data can be retrieved by pressing VIEW B Front Panel Key Access holds and displays the amplitude data that is in the trace C register The trace C register is not updated as the analyzer sweeps If trace C is deactivated by pressing STORE BLAMK C the stored data can be retrieved by pressing VIEW C Front Panel Key Access 6 153 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Volts Watts WINDOWS OFF X FINE TUNE DAC YZ_ spc Clear ZERO MARKER ZERO SPAN changes the amplitude units to volts Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE changes the amplitude units to watts Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE turns off the windows display mode and returns to the normal full sized instrument d
373. quency range The HP 8591C cable TV analyzer is a portable instrument ideal for field use It comes in a durable carrying case that makes it easy to transport and protects it from moisture and dirt The cable TV analyzer is fully operational within the case so you never need to remove it The HP 8591C cable TV analyzer comes equipped with the HP 85721A cable TV measurements and system monitor personality installed The cable TV measurements and system monitor personality is a downloadable program DLP consisting of measurement routines useful for cable television applications 1 3 WARNING Preparing Your Cable TV Analyzer for Use Detailed information for all of the steps in this process is included in this chapter immediately following the process description 1 Unpack the cable TV analyzer from the shipping container and inspect it for damage during shipping 2 Verify that all of the accessories and documentation has been shipped 3 Check that the line voltage selector on the rear panel is set to the proper voltage for your area 4 Check that the correct fuse is in place Failure to ground the cable TV analyzer properly can result in personal injury Use an ac power outlet that has a protective earth contact DO NOT defeat the earth grounding protection by using an extension cable power cable or autotransformer without a protective ground conductor 5 Connect the power cable to the cable TV analyzer and press the front pa
374. r with the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer you can select one or four plots per page but not two plots per page For a multipen plotter the pens of the plotter draw the different components of the screen as follows Pen Description Number Draws the annotation and graticule Draws trace A Draws trace B aws trace C and the display line aws user generated graphics and the lower limit line aws the upper limit line To plot press Previous Menu COPY DEV PRMT PLT PLT should be underlined and COPY Printing is usually faster than plotting but plotting provides higher resolution output The analyzer works with plotters such as the HP 7440A Figure 6 4 shows the rear view of a typical printer analyzer configuration 6 47 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions COPY DEV PRNT PLT CORRECT ON OFF NOTE E nD 2 Roe 000 a n 0666 Ae o0 Figure 6 4 Connecting a Printer to the analyzer changes between a printer and plotter For example if you have been printing and want to do a plot press COPY DEV PRNT PLT to underline PLT before pressing CORY Front Panel Key Access controls use of some of the correction factors When ON is underlined correction factors are used and CORR appears on the display When OFF is underlined correction factors are not used Turning the correction factors of
375. r shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to HP from another country HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument HP does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free 111 Limitation of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Exclusive Remedies THEREMEDIESPROVIDEDHEREINAREBUYER SSOLEANDEXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HPSHALLNOTBELIABLEFORANYDIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL ORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements areavailablef or Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office vi Safety Notes The following safety notes are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with each of the notes and its m
376. r DEFAULT CONFIG in Chapter 6 If the display position is offset Perform the following procedure to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the display 1 Press the following keys to adjust the vertical position More f of 4 CRT VERT POSITION 2 Use the knob or step keys to adjust the vertical position 3 Press the following keys to adjust the horizontal position CAL More 1 of 4 CRT HORZ POSITION 4 Use the knob or step keys to adjust the horizontal position 5 Press CAL CAL STORE to save the new vertical and horizontal display position 8 6 If You Have a Problem Before You Call Hewlett Packard If the analyzer measurements appear inaccurate If it appears that the cable TV analyzer measurements are inaccurate the cable TV analyzer correction factors may have been removed from the measurement results If this occurs perform the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines given in Turning on the Analyzer for the First Time in Chapter 2 After running these routines press CAL STORE then perform the confidence test Perform the confidence test by pressing the following keys More 1 of 4 CONF TEST The cable TV analyzer performs a self test by cycling through its major functions The confidence test is performed within 1 to 2 minutes If the unit does not function properly messages appear on the screen See Error Messages for explanations of error messages If error messages
377. r Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions PEAK ZOOM PK NODE lt gt DL NRM finds the highest displayed signal and narrows the span to a value selected by the user Pressing PEAK ZOOM the first time will make FINAL SPAN the active function so the user can input the destination span The current FINAL SPAN value will be displayed At that time the user can enter a span or press PEAK ZOOM again to use the displayed span The peak zoom function sets the reference level to the signal amplitude and sets the center frequency step size to the signal frequency If the signal is in a microwave band a preselector peak is executed For a signal to be found it must have a peak of at least 6 dB If no signal is found Signal not found will be displayed The routine will ignore the analyzer local oscillator feedthrough signal which is at 0 Hz Front Panel Key Access SPAN select which peaks will be listed in the peak table to include all peaks or to exclude the peaks that are either above or below the display line See Table 6 9 The display line is activated if it was not currently being displayed Table 6 9 Selection Peaks Listed NRM all peaks listed gt DL peaks above display line listed lt DL peeks below display line listed Front Panel Key Access PEAK search 6 108 PK SORT FRQ AMP PK TABLE ON OFF Plot Conf ig PLOTTER ADDRESS PLT _ LOC 2 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Description
378. r Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions changes the rear MONITOR output between normal internal monitor horizontal and vertical synchronization constants or the NTSC video compatible format In the NTSC mode the monitor output is compatible with NTSC video cassette recorders In the normal mode the synchronization constants can be changed from the factory default settings by using CRT HORZ POSITION and CRT VERT POSITION softkeys If the user has not changed the constants the default settings will be used The display will be compressed slightly when using the NTSC format instead of the normal format The NTSC format has less vertical resolution than the analyzer display The top and bottom of the analyzer display are compressed slightly so that all of the information can be fit into the vertical resolution available with the NTSC format Front Panel Key Access CONFIG changes the rear MONITOR output between normal internal monitor horizontal and vertical synchronization constants or the PAL video compatible format In the PAL mode the monitor output is compatible with PAL video cassette recorders In the normal mode the synchronization constants can be changed from the factory default settings by using CRT HORZ POSITION and CRT VERT POSITION softkeys If the user has not changed the constants the default settings will be used The display will be compressed slightly when using the PAL format instead of the normal
379. r cable TV analyzer or as a kit HP part number 5063 0246 Ventilation Requirements When installing the instrument in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used Rack Mount Kit without Handles Option 908 This option provides the parts necessary to mount the cable TV analyzer in an HP System II cabinet or in a standard 19 inch 482 6 mm equipment rack Option 908 is also available as a kit HP part number 5062 4841 Ventilation Requirements When installing the instrument in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used 9 5 Options and Accessories Options Rack Mount Kit With Handles Option 909 Option 909 is the same as Option 908 but includes front handles for added convenience Option 909 is also available as a kit HP part number 5062 4840 User s Guides and Calibration Guide Option 910
380. r configuration 6 44 PRINTER SETUP 6 117 printing 6 45 6 48 HP PaintJet 6 105 RS 232 1 17 printing HP IB centronics converter 1 25 Index 23 deskjet 1 25 epson 1 25 laserjet 1 25 paintjet 1 25 thinkjet 1 25 printing parallel deskjet 1 33 epson 1 33 Taserjet 1 33 paintjet 1 33 thinkjet 1 33 printing RS 232 deskjet 1 17 epson 1 17 laserjet 1 17 paintjet 1 17 thinkjet 1 17 print menu 6 1 17 PROBE PWR 2 5 program cataloging 6 25 program DLP editor 6 63 program editing and creating 6 63 programming command dispose all 6 65 6 66 6 67 front panel execution 6 69 programming command entry external keyboard 3 69 protect data 3 13 PRT MENU ON OFF 6 1 17 pulsed RF using the time gated capability 5 37 pulse edge definition 6 64 Pulse Param 6 118 pulse parameters clearing 6 39 gate length 6 49 PRI 6 49 6 63 pulse width 6 49 6 64 reference edge 6 64 time gate utility 6 118 pulse repetition interval 5 38 6 63 pulse width 5 38 6 64 PURGE AMP COR 3 61 6 118 PURGE LIMITS 3 35 3 39 6 118 PWR SWP ON OFF 6 119 Index 24 R rack mount kit Option 908 9 5 rack mount kit with handles Option 909 9 6 rack slide kit 9 10 ratio video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth 6 151 real time clock 6 143 set date 6 132 set time 6 132 time and date display 6 143 rear panel battery information label 2 31 rear panel features 2 7 9 RECALL
381. r must be The total length of the prefix and register number cannot exceed eight characters The prefix can be any character however the underscore should not be the Erst character of the prefix Pressing Change Prefix accesses a menu containing the letters of the alphabet the underscore symbol _ the number symbol a space and the clear function To select a character press the softkey that displays the group of characters that contains the desired character The softkey menu changes to allow you to select an individual character If you make a mistake press to space back over the incorrect character Additional characters are available by pressing More 1 of 2 Numbers may be selected with the numeric keypad A prefix can be cleared with the clear function Press or DISPLAY Change Prefix YZ_ Spc Clear Clear to clear the current prefix The current prefix is blanked by pressing DEFAULT COMFIG Front Panel Key Access CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or SAVE allows you to write a 53 character screen title across the top of the screen The marker readout may interfere with the last 26 characters The markers can be turned off by pressing MKR More 1 of 2 and MARKER ALL OFF Spectrum Analyzer Made Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Pressing Change Title accesses the softkey menus that contain the available characters and symbols A programming command can be entered in the screen title area It can
382. racking unstable signals that drift with time The maximum hold and minimum hold functions are useful for displaying modulated signals which appear unstable but have an envelope that contains the information bearing portion of the signal MK TRACK ON OFF may be used to track these unstable signals Use peak search tO place a marker on the highest signal on the display Pressing MK TRACK ON OFF ON will bring that signal to the center frequency of the graticule and adjust the center frequency every sweep to bring the selected signal back to the center SPAN ZOOM is a quick way to perform the peak searci MKR FCTN MK TRACK ON OFF SPAN key sequence Note that the primary function of the marker track function is to track unstable signals not to track a signal as the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer is changed If you choose to use the marker track function when changing center frequency check to ensure that the signal found by the tracking function is the correct signal 4 13 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Tracking Unstable Signals Using Marker Track and the Maximum Hold and Minimum Hold Functions Example Use the marker track function to keep a drifting signal at the center of the display and monitor its change This example requires a modulated signal An acceptable signal can be easily found by connecting an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input and tuning to the FM broadcast band 88 t
383. ransmitter Measurements 11 To enable the graph marker press GRPH MKR ON OFF so ON is underlined Delta frequency delta amplitude and absolute amplitude values are displayed for the marker position The marker position can be changed with the RPG knob step keys or data keys 12 Press Previous Menu Press MEAS OFF to turn the measurement off and exit the power menu or press another measurement key to stop the current measurement and start a new measurement NOTE If the power menus have been exited without turning the power measurement off by pressing another front panel key press the MEAS USER key twice to return to the last power menu used 5 73 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Made Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements Channel Power Measurement The channel power function measures the total power in the selected channel bandwidth The signal can be noise tones or a combination of noise and tones The channel power function measures the power using an rms method Enter the channel bandwidth and activate the channel power measurement The spectrum analyzer calculates and displays e The total power in dBmV other units selectable e The power spectral density in dBmV Hz other units selectable Example Measure the total power in a signal 1 Connect a signal to the spectrum analyzer s INPUT 75 Q 2 Press Frequency and enter the frequency of your input signal to
384. re displayed on the cable TV analyzer display 4 Use the numeric keypad to enter a register number and then press ENTER 3 20 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card To Recall a State 1 Press or RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 2 Press Catalog Card then CATALOG STATES Use the knob to highlight the state data to be retrieved 3 Press LOAD FILE State data can also be recalled by specifying the prefix and the register number 1 Use Change Prefix to enter the prefix or use the existing prefix 2 Press RECALL If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD 3 Press CARD STATE 4 Enter the register number that the state was saved under and then press ENTER 3 21 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card To Save a Trace Saving trace data saves the trace data and the state data l 2 3 Press DISPLAY or CONFIG and then Change Prefix to enter a new prefix or change the existing prefix If you do not specify a prefix the trace will be saved with a Ele name consisting of s register number Enter a screen title if desired by using DISPLAY then Change Title Set up the trace to be stored 4 Press SAVE If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD Press Trace Card to access the menu that displays TRACE A T
385. rect for the effects of errors due to analyzer circuitry This factor is the product of the ratio and phase angle correction factors for the existing conditions of operation CRT persistence An indication of the rate at which the image fades on the display In analyzers that digitize the trace information video before writing it to the screen the refresh rate is high enough to prevent any flicker in the display therefore short persistence displays are used Purely analog analyzers typically use long persistence or variable persistence displays because the refresh rate equals the sweep rate current probe A magnetic Eeld sensor that is clamped around power lines to sense conducted emissions It is the preferred transducer for most MIL STD conducted emissions testing The voltage at the output of the probe is proportional to the power line current and affected by probe characteristics Probe characteristics are provided by the manufacturer in the form of transfer impedance Z which varies as a function of frequency The equation below illustrates how probe characteristics may be stated Z dBQ V dBuV I dByA default The preset conditions options or parameters of an instrument The default state may be changed by choosing key selections or writing programming commands to use other conditions delta marker An analyzer mode in which a Exed reference marker is established then a second active marker becomes available so it can be
386. reference level changes the input attenuator setting is changed to keep the power levels less than the selected level at the input mixer Pressing resets the maximum input mixer level to 39 dBmV Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE turns off the measurement functions under the Power Menu softkey and restores the analyzer to the state prior to initiating the power measurement If another front panel key is pressed exiting the power menus press the MEAS USER key twice to return to the power menu Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER switches between the User Menu and the menu containing N dB PTS ON OFF AM ON OFF TOI ON OFF Power Menu and FFT Menu If no keys have been defined in the user menu No User Menu is displayed See the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information about defining keys in the user menu MEM LOCKED MIN HOLD C MK COUNT ON OFF Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions indicates that the save lock function is on It replaces the ERASE STATEALL and ERASE TRACEALL softkeys under the key and it replaces STATE INTERNAL and TRACE INTERNAL under the key when SAV LOCK ON OFF is ON Pressing SAV LOCK ON OFF returns the menu to its unlocked state Front Panel Key Access SAVE or CONFIG maintains the minimum level for each trace point of trace C Updates each trace point if a new mini
387. refix change the current prefix to the prefix used when the data was saved Pressing LOAD FILE is an alternate way to load program data from the memory card into analyzer memory See Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card in Chapter 3 for more information See also the Change Prefix softkey description Front Panel Key Access recalls into analyzer memory a state saved on the memory card CARD STATE also displays the time and date when the state data was stored Before recalling a state that was saved under a prefix other than the current prefix change the current prefix to the prefix used when the state was saved If the windows display mode is being used the instrument state can only be recalled into the active window Pressing LOAD FILE is an alternate way to load state data from the memory card into analyzer memory See Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card in Chapter 3 for more information Front Panel Key Access RECALL Card 4 Trace CATALOG ALL Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions recalls into analyzer memory a trace saved on the memory card Limit lines and amplitude correction factors are recalled by pressing Card Trace LIMIT LINES or AMP CGR If the screen title does not exceed 34 characters the time and date when the trace data was stored is also displayed with the recalled trace data The screen title and date are not recalled with limit
388. rement There are four basic steps in performing a stimulus response measurement whether it be a transmission or reflection measurement set up the spectrum analyzer settings calibrate normalize and measure 1 If necessary perform the self calibration routine for the tracking generator described in Performing the Tracking Generator Self Calibration Routine in Chapter 2 2 To measure the rejection of a low pass filter connect the equipment as shown in Figure 5 4 This example uses a filter with a cut off frequency of 300 MHz as the DUT SPECTRUM ANALYZER pul18c Figure 5 4 Transmission Measurement Test Setup Excessive signal input may damage the DUT Do not exceed the maximum CAUTION power that the device under test can tolerate 3 Activate the tracking generator menu by pressing AUX CTRL and Track Gen To activate the tracking generator power level press SRC PWR ON OFF until ON is underlined See Figure 5 5 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Stimulus Response Measurements NOTE To reduce ripples caused by source return loss use 10 dB or greater tracking generator output attenuation Tracking generator output attenuation is normally a function of the source power selected However the output attenuation may be controlled by using SRC ATN AUTO MAN Refer to Specifications and characteristics in your calibration guide for more information on the relationship between source power and
389. res covered in this chapter are listed below Measuring amplitude modulation using the fast Fourier transform function Stimulus response measurements using the built in tracking generator Option 011 Demodulating and listening to an AM or FM signal Triggering on a selected line of a video picture field Using the Gate Utility to simplify time gated measurements Using the time gated spectrum analyzer capability Using the one button measurements to measure N dB bandwidth percent amplitude modulation and third order intercept TOI Using the power measurement functions to make transmitter measurements To find descriptions of specific spectrum analyzer functions refer to Chapter 6 Key Descriptions 5 2 Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function A Fourier transform transforms time domain data zero span into the frequency domain The fast Fourier transform FFT function of the spectrum analyzer allows measurements of amplitude modulation AM It is commonly used to measure AM at rates that cannot be measured in the normal frequency domain due to spectrum analyzer limitations on narrow resolution bandwidths For a given AM rate the FFT function can generate a trace faster than using the frequency domain for the equivalent spectrum analyzer measurement The FFT function calculates the magnitude of each frequency component from a block of time domain samples of the input signal It us
390. rface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access formats a card in logical interchange format LIF This is the same as ERASE MEM CARD The memory card is formatted with the volume label HP859X Pressing FORMAT CARD causes a message to appear on the analyzer screen If you are sure press key again to purge data Press FORMAT CARD again if you want to format the memory card Pressing FORMAT CARD deletes data stored on the memory card Front Panel Key Access CONFIG activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start as soon as possible after the last sweep Front Panel Key Access displays in real time frequency diagnostic information for the LO section This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access indicates the status of the frequency discriminator as a function of LO span This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL FREQ OFFSET FREQUENCY NOTE Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions allows the user to input a frequency offset value that is added to the frequency readout to account for frequency conversions external to the analyzer Offset entries are added to all frequency readouts including marker start frequency and stop frequency Entering an offset does not affect the trace Offsets are not added
391. rge data Press DELETE FILE again if you want to delete the memory item Deleting items beginning with an underscore from analyzer memory is not recommended and may have unexpected results Items beginning with an underscore are used by the analyzer DELETE POINT DELETE SEGMENT Demod Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE deletes an amplitude correction factor that was previously selected by SELECT POINT Front Panel Key Access deletes the limit line entry for the selected segment number Press SELECT SEGMENT then enter the segment number to select the limit line entry for deletion Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY accesses the softkeys controlling demodulation functions speaker volume squelch level FM gain and dwell time Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL 6 53 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions DEMOD AM FM DEMOD ON OFF DESKJET 310 550C allows selection of amplitude AM or frequency FM demodulation Activating AM detection turns off FM demodulation if it is on When the frequency span is greater than 0 Hz a 30 kHz resolution bandwidth is used during demodulation regardless of the screen annotation When the span is equal to 0 Hz the displayed bandwidth is used Turning FM demodulation on turns off AM demodulation if it is on When the frequency span is greater than 0 Hz a 100 kHz bandwidth is used during the demodulation regardless of the s
392. ries Reducing Damage Caused by ESD The following suggestions may help reduce ESD damage that occurs during testing and servicing operations e Before connecting any coaxial cable to an cable TV analyzer connector for the first time each day momentarily ground the center and outer conductors of the cable Personnel should be grounded with a resistor isolated wrist strap before touching the center pin of any connector and before removing any assembly from the unit Be sure that all instruments are properly earth grounded to prevent a buildup of static charge Table 1 5 lists static safe accessories that can be obtained from Hewlett Packard by using the HP part numbers shown 1 39 Preparing For Use Electrostatic Discharge These techniques for a static safe work station should not be used when WARNING i f working on circuitry with a voltage potential greater than 500 volts Building Ground 1 MegOhm Resistor Building Ground 1 MegOhm Resistor Figure 1 5 Example of a Static Safe Work Station Table 1 5 Static Safe Accessories HP Part Description Number 9300 0797 Set includes 3Mstatic control mat 0 6 mx 1 2 m 2ft x 4 ftland 4 6 cm 115 ft ground wire The wrist strap and wrist strap cord are not included They must be ordered separately 9300 0980 Wrist strap cord 15 m 15 ft 9300 1383 Wrist strap color black stainless steel withou
393. rmat the frequency or time and the middle amplitude plus the delta comprise the upper limit line the frequency or time and the middle amplitude minus the delta comprise the lower limit line The difference between the mid delta and the upper lower format is the way the amplitude values are entered the frequency tune coordinate begins a segment regardless of the format chosen The mid delta format can be used if the upper and lower limit lines are symmetrical with respect to the amplitude axis An upper and lower amplitude component are specified for every frequency or tune component Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Edit Up Low Edit Upper EDIT UPRLWR allows you to view or edit the upper and lower limit line tables simultaneously Up to 20 entries are allowed for the upper and lower limit line tables With the upper and lower limit line table format the upper and lower limit lines can be entered at the same time With the upper and lower limit line format the frequency or time upper amplitude and lower amplitude are specified The frequency or time and upper amplitude value comprise the coordinate point for the upper limit line the frequency or time and lower amplitude value comprise the coordinate point for the lower limit line It is not necessary to specify both an upper and lower amplitude component for every frequency or time com
394. rnal computer Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE accesses the functions that set the analyzer resolution bandwidth to the values required for electromagnetic interference EMI testing 200 Hz EMI BW is only available with Option 130 Front Panel Key Access Pressing which is also the ENTER key terminates and enters into the analyzer a numerical value that has been entered from the front panel using the keypad knob or step up down keys accesses the menu for entering the value of the pulse repetition interval PRI A delta marker can be activated by pressing MARKER ON The other menu functions can be used to manipulate the marker to indicate the pulse repetition interval value Pressing DONE returns to the previous menu and makes the current value of the marker the pulse repetition interval It also restores the time domain window to the state prior to any adjustments made during entry of the pulse repetition interval When the pulse repetition interval is entered an arrow will appear on the display indicating the position of the gate trigger ft for positive triggering or for negative triggering Front Panel Key Access SWEEP 6 63 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions ENTER REF EDGE ENTER WIDTH accesses the menu used to define the edge of the pulse that will be used as the time reference Press MARKER ON to activate a trigger marker The other menu fun
395. rough 9 ABCDEF GHI JKL MNOPOR STUVWX YZ_ Spe Clear More 1 of 2 RECALL LIMIT SAVE LIMIT Change Title LMT DISP Y N AUTO LMT TEST ON OFF Edit Limit GRAT ON OFF ANNOTATN ON OFF THRESHLD ON OFF 54 Change Prefix More 2 of 2 SA lt 003 OF Sze RPG TITLE More 2 of 2 LIMITS FRO TIME Edit Upper Edit Lower Edit Up Low Edit Mid Delt Previous Menu ABCDEF GHIJKL MNOPOR STUVWX YZ Spc Clear Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions SELECT SEGMENT SELECT FREQ or SELECT AMPLITUD SELECT TYPE EDIT UPR LWR More 1 of 2 SELECT SEGMENT SELECT FREQ or SELECT UPR AMPL SELECT LWR AMPL SELECT TYPE More 1 of 2 SELECT SEGMENT SELECT FREQ or SELECT MID AMPL SELECT DLT AMPL SELECT TYPE More 1 of 2 More 1 of 2 Qa lt gt 727 0 aiza Edit Done More 2 of 2 pressing ony brings up the appropriote amplitude terminator menu CENTER FREO START FREQ STOP FREQ CF STEP AUTO MAN FREQ OFFSET LIMITS FIX REL SELECT SEGMENT DELETE SEGMENT EDIT DONE PURGE LIMITS More 2 of 2 SLOPE FLAT POINT LIMITS FIX REL SELECT SEGMENT DELETE SEGMENT EDIT DONE PURGE LIMITS More 2 of 2 SLOPE FLAT POINT LIMITS FIX REL SELECT SEGMENT DELETE SEGMENT EDIT DONE PURGE LIMITS More 2 of 2 pul6c 7 7 Key Menus Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions MEAS USER N dB PTS ON OFF 3 MON OEE OCCUPIED BANDWOTH Rewer Ment ADJ CHAN
396. rrections Index 3 creating 3 58 amplitude corrections creating 3 60 editing 3 59 amplitude demodulation 6 54 amplitude menus 6 13 amplitude modulation 6 6 amplitude modulation measurement 5 59 amplitude scale 6 126 amplitude self calibration 6 21 amplitude units 6 13 dBm 6 50 dBmV 6 50 dBuV 6 50 Volts 6 154 Watts 6 154 Amptd Units 6 13 analog display 6 14 using 3 52 53 ANALOG ON OFF 6 14 ANALYZER ADDRESS 6 16 analyzer attenuator 6 17 analyzer auto coupled sweep time 6 140 analyzer battery 2 31 analyzer configuration default 6 51 analyzer distortion products 4 30 ANALYZER GAINS 6 4 6 16 analyzer memory cataloging functions 6 28 catalog variables 6 35 delete file 6 53 DLP cataloging 6 28 erase user programs and variables 6 56 program and variable cataloging 6 25 recalling amplitude correction factors 3 13 recalling a state 3 9 recalling a trace 3 11 recalling limit lines 3 13 saving amplitude correction factors 3 12 saving and recalling data 3 8 saving a state 3 8 saving a trace 3 10 saving limit lines 3 12 saving to 6 147 state and trace register status 6 34 analyzer mode 6 115 analyzer state recalled 6 111 annotation 2 13 Index 4 ANNOTATN ON OFF 6 16 APND CAT ITEM 6 16 ATTEN AUTO MAN 6 17 attenuation coupling 6 17 attenuator error factors 6 131 AUTO ALL 6 17 AUTO COUPLE 6 18 automatic FFT 6 90 automatic leveling control 6 12 AUXB 6 4 6 1
397. rt number HP 922035 US and Canada and part number HP 92203K international Interconnection and Printing Instructions 1 Turn off the printer and the cable TV analyzer 2 Connect the printer to the cable TV analyzer using the HP IB cable The ThinkJet printer s mode switches must be set correctly for use with the cable TV analyzer Refer to Table 1 4 for the correct settings 1 25 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting Table 1 4 Setting of ThinkJet Printer Mode Switches Switch Setting Comments Number do Printer performs a carriage return only Printer oerforms a line feed only Sets the printer to skip paper perforations Sets the printer for a paper length of 11 inches Sets the printer to HP MOOE Sets the printer to USASCII NOTE Because HP IB cables can be connected together more than one instrument can communicate on the HP IB This means that both a printer and a plotter can be connected to the cable TV analyzer using two HP IB cables Each device must have its own HP 18 address Disconnect or turn off the computer Because the cable TV analyzer cannot print with two controllers the computer and the cable TV analyzer connected the computer must be disconnected from the HP IB In most cases it is sufficient to simply turn the computer OFF 3 Turn on the cable TV analyzer and printer 4 On the cable TV analyzer press_ CONFIG Print Config 1 26 Preparing For Use Printing or Plott
398. ry Sample detection is activated automatically for noise level markers during video averaging and for FFT measurements When positive peak detection is selected PEAK appears in the upper left corner of the screen Positive peak detection obtains the maximum video signal between the last display point and the present display point and stores this value in the trace memory address Positive peak detection is selected at power on and by pressing PRESET Negative peak detection functions the same as positive peak detection but selects the minimum video signal The PEAK message does not appear in the upper left corner of the screen Front Panel Key Access TRACE accesses softkeys that include the HOLD key and limit line menus and activate the display line threshold and analog display mode They allow title and prefix entry and control the display of the graticule and screen annotation displays the current correction factor data generated by the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions DISPLAY CARD saves the current analyzer display image on the memory card for viewing or copying later It does not save the analyzer state or trace so it cannot be used to restore an instrument to the conditions at the time the image was saved To save the curre
399. s Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions switches the peak table sorting routine between listing the peaks in order by descending amplitude or by ascending frequency Front Panel Key Access Peak search displays a list of up to ten signal peaks that is updated at the end of each sweep The peaks can be sorted in order by descending amplitude or by ascending frequency Peaks above or below the display line can be excluded from the table The peak table function works with trace A only The peak table is not saved with the SAVE and keys Front Panel Key Access peak searcu accesses the menu used to address the plotter and to select plotter options See the key for more information Front Panel Key Access CONFIG Option 021 only changes the HP IB address of the plotter The plotter address is set to 5 when DEFAULT CONFIG is pressed Front Panel Key Access selects the position of the plotter output The highlighted portion of the softkey label indicates where the plot is to be output on the page This softkey function appears only if two or four plots per page are selected when PLTS PG 1 2 4 is pressed Front Panel Key Access 6 109 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions PLT MENU ON OFF PLTS PG 124 PLT gt LJT ON OFF POINT 6 110 allows the softkey labels to be plotted along with the analyzer display This function operates when the key is used in a plot configuration
400. s then measured the linearity is the calculated error between the two points compared with the analyzer settings selectivity See bandwidth selectivity sensitivity The level of the smallest sinusoid that can be observed on an analyzer usually under optimized conditions of minimum resolution bandwidth 0 dB input attenuation and minimum video bandwidth Hewlett Packard defines sensitivity as the displayed average noise level A sinusoid at that level appears to be about 2 dB above the noise serial prefix Serial numbers that identify an instrument begin with a five character prefix The prefix in this case represents the version of firmware that particular instrument was shipped with For HP 70000 Modular Measurement Systems file numbers saved by the user in memory are preceded with letters that define the file type Refer to the HP 70000 system operation manual for detailed information shape factor Refer to bandwidth selectivity signal resolution The ability of the analyzer to resolve two separate input signals Closely spaced signals are more difficult to resolve than signals spaced far apart Refer also to resolution bandwidth and shape factor signal identification A routine that identifies whether or not a particular Fourier transform response on the analyzer s display is at the correct frequency The displayed signal may be aliased by the FFT calculation because of inadequate sample rate The signal identification routine
401. s procedure uses the calibration signal as the test signal connect the cable TV analyzer s CAL OUT to the INPUT 75 Q with an appropriate cable Set the cable TV analyzer controls as follows FREQUENCY 300 MHz 50 MHz 3 MHz Press DISPLAY and Limit Lines to access the limit line menus At this point you may need to do the following a To save the current limit line table press SAVE LIMIT and enter the register number Then press ENTER b To clear an existing limit line table press Edit Limit Edit Upper and More 1 of 2 Then press PURGE LIMITS two times If necessary press Edit Limit to access the LIMITS FRQ TIME softkey Press LIMITS FRQ TIME so that FRQ is underlined to select the frequency type of limit line if it is not already selected Press Edit Up Low to create upper and lower limit lines simultaneously Press More 1 of 2 LIMITS FIX REL so that FIX is underlined to select the fixed type of limit line if it is not already selected Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions 9 Specify the first limit line segment by using the following key sequence More 2 of 2 SELECT FREQ 275 MHz s 20 FLAT 10 Repeat the above step for the values listed in the following table to complete the limit line table It is not necessary to repeat the SELECT FREQ softkey for successive entries iegmen Upper lower Number Amplitude Amplitude 2 0 dB
402. s section 4 The gate delay must be equal to the signal delay plus the pulse width r divided by 2 For the first signal there is no signal delay so the gate delay needs to be set to 50 ys 2 or 25 ys Press SWEEP Gate Control GATE DELAY 25 gs 5 Set the gate length to a value equal to the pulse width r divided by 4 For this example the gate length is set to 50 ys 4 or 13 ps Press GATE LENGTH 13 Gis 6 Set the resolution bandwidth to a value that is greater than 2 divided by the gate delay minus the signal delay For this signal 1 there is no signal delay so the resolution bandwidth is set greater than 2 25 ps or greater than 80 kHz Press BW 100 kHz Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Capability Without the Gate Utility Option 107 only 7 Set the video bandwidth to a value that is greater than 1 divided by the gate length For this example the video bandwidth must be greater than 1 13 ys or 80 kHz Press BW YID BW AUTO MAN 100 KHz See Figure 5 23 The spectrum analyzer displays only signal 1 not both signal 1 and signal 2 GATE LENGTH GATE DELAY EDGE POL POS NEG GATE CTL EDGE LVL PREV MENU CENTER 50 aT MHz 000 MHz ij RES BW 100 kHz VBW 108 kHz 4S WP 120 seo RT Figure 5 23 Using Time Gating to View Signal 1 8 To compare signal 1 to signal 2 we first place signal 1 trace A in the view mode Press TRA
403. s the signal strength exceeds the squelch threshold The squelch level does not affect the rear AUX VIDEO OUT signal Squelch level is indicated on screen by the unitless numbers 0 to 100 with O being minimum squelch threshold all signals are passed and 100 being maximum squelch threshold no signals are passed The default squelch value is 0 Front Panel Key Access Option 011 only allows you to select between automatic and manual adjustment of the tracking generator s switching attenuator The HP 8591C cable TV analyzer can be manually adjusted from 0 to 60 dB in 10 dB steps When auto coupled the SRC ATN function automatically adjusts the attenuator to yield the source amplitude level specified by the SRC PWR ON OFF softkey function Set SRC ATN MAN AUTO so that MAN is underlined decoupled for power sweeps greater than 10 dB for the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL Option 011 only offsets the displayed power of the tracking generator SRC Offset values may range from 100 dB to 100 GB Using the source power offset capability of the tracking generator allows you to take system losses or gains into account thereby displaying the actual power delivered to the device under test Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL 6 136 SRC PWR ON OFF SRC PWR STP SIZE START FREQ STATE CARD Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Option 011 only
404. s they happen They can also be made on a single sweep providing time to study or record the data 5 67 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using the Power Measurement Functions to make Transmitter Measurements Occupied Bandwidth and Transmitter Frequency Error You often need to confirm a channel s 99 occupied bandwidth The OCCUPIED BANDWDTH function does this easily The user enters the channel spacing and activates the occupied bandwidth function Markers show the power bandwidth edges and the spectrum analyzer calculates and displays e The total power in dBmV other units selectable e The occupied bandwidth 99 power bandwidth e The transmitter frequency error The transmitter frequency error is the frequency difference between the midpoint of the power bandwidth and the spectrum analyzer s center frequency For special applications you can change the percent power bandwidth from 1 to 99 99 using the OCC BW POWER key Example Measure the 99 occupied bandwidth 1 Connect a signal to the spectrum analyzer s INPUT 75 Q 2 Press FREQUENCY and enter the frequency of your input signal to place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency 3 Press and adjust the reference level to bring the signal near the top of the display 4 Press MEAS USER and Power Menu to access the power measurement functions Press Setup and CHANNEL SPACING to enter the value for the channel spacing The
405. se Printing or Plotting Plotting Using an RS 232 Interface Equipment e HP 8591C cable TV analyzer e HP 13242G RS 232 cable e Any of the following Plotters a HP 7440A ColorPro plotter with an RS 232 interface a HP 7445A plotter with an RS 232 interface a HP 7550A B plotter with an RS 232 interface a HP LaserJet Interconnection and Plotting Instructions 1 Turn off the cable TV analyzer NOTE The RS 232 interface allows only one device either the printer or the plotter to be connected to the cable TV analyzer Refer to the Programmer s Guide for more information on RS 232 protocol and cable wiring 2 Connect the plotter using an RS 232 cable 3 Turn on the cable TV analyzer and the plotter 4 Press CONFIG More 1 of 3 1 22 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting 5 To set the baud rate to 9600 baud press BAUD RATE 9600 Hz NOTE The HP 7470A plotter does not support two plots per page If you use an HP 7470A plotter with an HP 8591C cable TV analyzer you can select one plot per page or four plots per page but not two plots per page 6 Press CONFIG Plot Conf ig You can choose a full page half page or quarter page plot with the PLTS PG 1 2 4 softkey Press PLTS PG 1 2 4 to underline the number of plots per page desired 7 If two or four plots per page are chosen a function is displayed that allows you to select the location on the paper of the plotter output If two plots PLT
406. service guide for more information Front Panel Key Access CAL screen annotation on or off However softkey annotation will remain on the screen The screen annotation may not be required for prints or plots or during remote operation Refer to the HOLD softkey description regarding softkey annotation Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY Refer to Chapter 4 of the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information starts the DLP editor function and allows the highlighted item from the catalog of analyzer memory to be appended to the end of the item that is currently in the analyzer DLP editor memory If the item to be appended will not fit in the available memory space it will not be appended Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE CAUTION ATTEN AUTO MAN Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions input attenuation in 10 dB increments The analyzer input attenuator which is normally coupled linked to the reference level control reduces the power level of the analyzer input signal at the input mixer The attenuator is recoupled when AUTO is underlined Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE or auto courue To prevent damage to the input mixer the power level at the input mixer must not exceed 72 dBmV To prevent signal compression power at the input to the input mixer must be kept below 39 dBmvV NOTE To protec
407. set decoupled For a given source attenuation setting the maximum specified power sweep range is given by the following Power Sweep Range for the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer is 34 dBmV minus the source attenuation setting to 49 dBmV minus the source attenuation setting For example if the source attenuation setting is 20 dB the maximum power sweep range is from 14 dBmV 34 dBmV 20 dB to 29 dBmV 49 dBmV 20 dB The starting power level is the source power setting The ending power level is the sum of the source power setting plus the source power sweep setting Source power sweep may be set as high as 20 dB but performance is specified only up to 15 dB The output power of the tracking generator is swept according to the sweep rate of the analyzer The output power is always swept from the source power setting to a higher power setting negative source power sweep values are not allowed Refer to the calibration guide for your instrument for more information regarding source power and source attenuation relationships 6 119 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions RECALL AMP COR Power sweep measurements are particularly useful in making gain compression measurements or output power versus frequency measurements Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL accesses softkey menus that allow you to recall data from the memory card or analyzer memory When INTERNAL is selected states tra
408. sets the internal counter e Press EP MX80 SML LRG if the cable TV analyzer is connected to a MX 80 Epson or other compatible B pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will print two printouts to a page and will print softkey labels if desired See step 7 Pressing this key to underline LRG will print only one printout to a page and will not print the softkey labels 1 28 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting e Press EP LQ570 SML LRG if the cable TV analyzer is connected to a LQ 570 Epson or other compatible 24 pin print head printer Pressing this key to underline SML will print two printouts to a page and will print softkey labels if desired See step 7 Pressing this key to underline LRG will print only one printout to a page and will not print the softkey labels 7 If you want the softkey labels to be printed with the cable TV analyzer display printout press PRT MENU ON OFF so that ON is underlined Note that this function does not work when EP MX80 SML LRG or EP LQ570 SML LRG are pressed to underline LRG 8 Press Previous Menu COPY DEV PRNT PLT PRNT should be underlined then COPY Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting Plotting Using an HP IB Interface NOTE The HP 7470A plotter does not support 2 plots per page If you use an HP 7470A plotter with an HP 8591C cable TV analyzer you can select one plot per page or four plots per page but not 2 plots per page Equipmen
409. softkey that displays the group of characters that contains the desired character The softkey menu changes to allow you to select an individual character If you make a mistake press to space back over the incorrect character Additional characters are available by pressing Nore t of 2 Numbers may be selected with the numeric keypad The prefix can be from one to seven characters long The longer the prefix the shorter the register number must be The total length of the prefix and register number cannot exceed eight characters The prefix can be any character however the underscore should not be the Erst character of the prefix An existing prefix can be cleared with the clear function Press CONFIG or DISPLAY Change Prefix YZ Spc Clear then Clear to clear the current prefix To change a prefix clear the existing prefix and then enter a new prefix Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card To Save a State 1 Press DISPLAY or _ CONFIG Change Prefix Use the softkeys to enter the prefix under which you want the state saved A prefix can be one to seven characters long If you do not specify a prefix the state will be saved with a Ele name consisting of s_ register number 2 Press SAVE If INTERNAL is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select CARD Selecting CARD selects the memory card as the mass storage device 3 Press STATE CARD REGISTER and PREFIX a
410. solution Bandwidth Gate Length and Video Bandwidth Settings o 00a a a 5 5 Sweep Time Settings o ooa a a 6 1 Commands Not Available with Analog Operation 6 2 Memory Card Catalog Information 6 3 Analyzer Memory Catalog Information 6 4 CATALOG ON EVENT Display Description 6 5 Default Configuration Values 6 6 Compatibility of FFT With Other Functions 6 7 Commands Altered Not Available within the Gate Utility 6 8 Functions Which Exit The Windows Display Format 6 10 Model Specific Preset Conditions 02 6 11 Common Preset Conditions 2 Contents 10 2 15 3 14 3 16 3 31 3 65 5 39 5 42 Preparing For Use Preparing For Use What You ll This chapter describes the process of getting the cable TV analyzer ready Find in This t se when you have just received it See Preparing Your Analyzer For Use for the process steps The process includes initial inspection setting Chapter up the unit for the selected ac power source and performing automatic self calibration routines Information about static safe handling procedures is also included in this chapter Introducing the HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer pullSc Figure l I HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer 1 2 Preparing For Use The HP 8591C cable TV analyzer is a small lightweight test instrument that covers the 1 MHz to 1 8 GHz fre
411. solution bandwidth can be decreased to view low level signals 1 As in the previous example connect an antenna to the spectrum analyzer input Set the spectrum analyzer to view a low level signal 2 Press then J The low level signal appears more clearly because the noise level is reduced See Figure 4 17 10 16 32 JUL 30 1993 a MKR 100 13 MHZ REF 48 8 dBmv AT 20 dB 2 78 dBmv Res ew PEAK AUTO MAN LOG 10 3B VID BW AUTO MAN VBW RBW RATIO VID AVG ON OFF CENTER 100 13 MHZ SPAN 10 00 MHz RES BW 30 KHz VBW 30 KHz SWP 33 3 msec Figure 4 17 Decreasing Resolution Bandwidth A mark appears next to the RES BW annotation at the lower left corner of the screen indicating that the resolution bandwidth is uncoupled As the resolution bandwidth is reduced the sweep time is increased to maintain calibrated data 4 25 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring low level Signals Using Attenuation Video Bandwidth and Video Averaging Example The video filter control is useful for noise measurements and observation of low level signals close to the noise floor The video filter is a post detection low pass filter that smooths the displayed trace When signal responses near the noise level of the spectrum analyzer are visually masked by the noise the video filter can be narrowed to smooth this noise and improve the
412. ssories shipped with the analyzer 1 6 ACPGRAPH 6 9 AC power source 9 7 active function 2 16 active function block 2 3 active function clearing 6 80 addressing printer 6 117 address of analyzer 6 16 address of plotter 6 109 Index 2 adjacent channel power 6 9 extended dynamic range 6 10 using 5 69 73 adjacent channel power graph 6 9 adjacent channel power measurement 5 67 adjacent channel power ratio 6 9 ADJ CHAN POWER 6 9 ADJ CHAN PWR extd 6 10 ALC MTR INT XTAL 6 12 ALC TEST 6 4 6 12 aliasing FFT function 5 5 signal identification 6 133 ALL DLP CARD 3 28 6 12 alpha characters 6 9 6 79 6 138 6 154 AM FM demodulation use with time gated capability 5 34 AM ON OFF 5 61 6 6 Amp Cor 3 61 6 12 AMP COR 6 13 AMP COR ON OFF 3 60 3 64 6 13 AMPLITUDE 2 4 2 17 6 13 amplitude accuracy 6 48 amplitude and frequency self calibration routine 6 22 amplitude correction amplitude coordinate 3 63 frequency coordinate 3 63 point 3 61 testing 3 64 using RECALL AMP COR 3 64 using SAVE AMP COR 3 64 amplitude correction factors 3 57 64 amplitude correction factors 3 57 cataloging 6 26 delete point 6 53 edit 6 58 edit done 6 59 menus 6 12 on or off 6 13 purge 6 118 recall table 6 120 save table 6 125 select amplitude 6 127 select frequency 6 128 select point 6 129 select sweep time 6 130 storing 6 13 amplitude correction functions 3 61 amplitude co
413. sters 1 8 unaffected weep continuous reshold level one graticule above baseline display off Title eared Trace A ear write Trace B ore blank Trace C ore blank at reference level Trace registers unaffected Trigger free run VBW RBW ratio 03 Video averaging off Video bandwidth 1 MHz auto coupled 6 114 PRESET SPECTRUM Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions allows the analyzer mode only to be preset Table 6 12 lists the conditions affected by the PRESET function Other operating modes will not be affected See the description of the key In addition pressing PRESET SPECTRUM erases user generated graphics and blanks the active function block that is on the analyzer screen Pressing PRESET SPECTRUM disposes of ONEOS ONSWP and TRMATH These are remote programming commands see the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information Front Panel Key Access MODE or PRESET Table 6 12 Preset Conditions for All Models A B A Analog display mode Annotation and graticule Attenuation Center frequency Center frequency step size Coupled functions Detector Display line Frequency offset Limit line testing cale arker counter arker counter resolution arkers off off on coupled Refer to Table 6 10 10 of span all set to AUTO positive peek
414. stration Press AMPLITUDE More 1 of 2 Amptd Units dBmV 4 Press DISPLAY Limit Lines to access the limit line menus Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions 11 46 23 AUG 18 1993 eo MKR 302 0 MHz REF 48 8 dBmV AT 40 dB 37 4 FES EU AUTO MAN VID BH AUTO NAN VBW RBW RATIO VID AVG ON OFF EMI BH Menu CENTER 388 8 MHz SPAN 208 0 MHz RES BW 3 8 MHz 4 VBW 388 kHz SWP 20 0 msec Figure 3 4 Typical limit line Display Description of Items in Figure 3 4 Upper limit line Lower limit line Screen messaae 5 To create an upper limit line press Edit Limit The table defaults to frequency parameters the second column should be labeled START FREQ If it is labeled START TIME press More 1 of 2 EDIT DONE and Edit Limit Press LIMITS FRQ TIME so that FRQ is underlined LIMITS FRQ TIME specifies that the limit line parameters be entered in either frequency or time 3 35 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions NOTE To clear an existing limit line table press More 1 of 2 Then press PURGE LIMITS two times After pressing PURGE LIMITS the first time the message If you are sure press key again to purge data will appear Pressing PURGE LIMITS a second time purges the limit line table PRESET turns limit line testing off if it is on but does not clear an existing limit line table 6 Press Edit Upper to edit or create an upper l
415. system The impedance you select is for computational purposes only since the actual impedance of 75 Q is set by internal hardware The preset value can be changed by using a service function Select the computational input impedance by pressing INPUT Z 502 758 or by entering 75 or 50 using the numeric keypad Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE 6 81 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions INTERNAL CARD INTERNAL STATE Internal Trace 6 82 selects between spectrum analyzer memory and the memory card for the save and recall functions Front Panel Key Access RECALL or recalls the saved analyzer state from the selected state register Recalling a state from the analyzer memory displays the time and date when the state data was stored To recall a state press INTERNAL STATE and use the numeric keypad to enter a state register number valid state register numbers are through 9 State register 9 contains a previous state state register 0 contains the current state If windows are being used the instrument state can only be recalled into the active window Front Panel Key Access RECALL accesses a softkey menu that allows you to either select the trace in which the trace data is to be recalled trace A trace B or trace C recall the current limit line tables or recall amplitude correction factors When recalling a trace select the trace in which the trace data is to be r
416. t and replace mode at the cursor BACKSPACE ases the previous character to the left of the cursor DELETE Clears the keyboard line ears to end of line l e J he cursor to the left he cursor to the riaht rom later items to earlier items in the recall buffer rom earlier items to later items in the recall buffer d of text e feed ie a iy 5 iage return AQ z i s on inverse vid s enhancements inverse video underlining off A IE ry ic JE E h s on underlining scape The dash between keys indicates t keys should be pressed at the same time 3 66 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features External Keyboard The external keyboard operation with the cable TV analyzer is similar to its operation with a computer except for the following SCROLL LOCK and NUM LOCK are fixed and cannot be changed Pressing displays the keyboard mode on the cable TV analyzer screen The analyzer will not recognize the control characters or function keys The keyboard supports a 244 character recall buffer The longest single item is limited to 243 characters subsequent characters are ignored Using the C or 7 keys of the external keyboard to recall an item does not change the buffer contents Recalling an item and then pressing the key does not store a new copy of the item in the recall buffer If an item is recalled and then modified a new copy will be m
417. t appear below the line when this function is on The boundary is defined in amplitude units that correspond to its vertical position when compared to the reference level The value of the threshold appears in the active function block and on the lower left side of the screen The threshold level does not influence the trace memory or marker position The peaks found by the markers must be at least the peak excursion value above the threshold level The value of the threshold level can be changed using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad Pressing any digit 0 through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu If a threshold is active press THRESHLD ON OFF until OFF is selected to turn the threshold display off The threshold value affects peak searching even when the THRESHLD function is set to off Front Panel Key Access DISPLAY accesses the softkey menu used to set and display the real time clock Front Panel Key Access CONFIG 6 143 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions TIMEDATE ON OFF TOI ON OFF turns the display of the realtime clock on or off Pressing DEFAULT CONFIG sets TIMEDATE ON OFF to ON Front Panel Key Access CONFIG finds the third order intercept of the two highest amplitude signals and the two associated distortion products The effect of unequal test signal amplitude is compensated for The measurement runs continuously re execu
418. t cord has four adjustable links and a 7 mm post type connection 9300 1 169 ESD heel strap reusable 6 to 12 months 1 40 Getting Started What You ll Learn in this Chapter Getting Started This chapter introduces the basic functions of the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer In this chapter you will Get acquainted with the front panel and rear panel features Get acquainted with the menus and softkeys Learn about screen annotation Make a basic measurement the calibration signal Learn how to improve measurement accuracy by using self calibration routines Learn how to insert the memory card and about the memory card battery Learn about the cable TV analyzer battery NOTE Before using your cable TV analyzer please read Chapter 1 Preparing for Use which describes how to set up your cable TV analyzer and how to verify that it is operational Chapter 1 describes many safety considerations that should not be overlooked 2 Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer O BERRY CABLE TV ANALYZER FREQUENCY CONTROL AMPL TUDE oOo winoows L Figure 2 1 Front Panel Feature Overview Front Panel Features pull c The following section provides a brief description
419. t e HP 8591C cable TV analyzer with Option 021 e HP 10833 or equivalent HP IB cable e Any of the following plotters a HP 7440A ColorPro plotter with HP IB a HP 7445A plotter with HP IB a HP 7550A B plotter with HP IB Interconnection and Plotting Instructions 1 Turn off the plotter and the cable TV analyzer 2 Connect the plotter to the cable TV analyzer using the HP IB cable 1 30 Preparing For Use Printing or Plotting NOTE Because HP IB cables can be connected together more than one instrument can communicate on the HP IB This means that both a printer and a plotter can be connected to the cable TV analyzer fusing two HP IB cables Each device must have its own HP IB address Disconnect or turn off the computer Because the cable TV analyzer cannot plot with two controllers the computer and the cable TV analyzer connected the computer must be disconnected from the HP IB In most cases it is sufficient to simply turn the computer OFF Turn on the cable TV analyzer and the plotter On the cable TV analyzer press_ CONFIG Plot Conf ig The plotter usually resides at the fifth device address To set the plotter address press PLOTTER ADDRESS 5 Hz to enter the address 5 for the plotter With PLTS PG 1 2 4 you can choose a full page half page or quarter page plot Press PLTS PG 1 2 4 to underline the number of plots per page desired If two or four plots per page are chosen a function is dis
420. t side of the graticule Recouple a single function by pressing the function label to activate the function and pressing the function again so that AUTO is underlined Pressing auto courte AUTO ALL couples all coupled functions listed Aux Conn Control AUXB B C B lt gt C B DL B Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions the softkey menu used to control the auxiliary outputs and input The auxiliary outputs are controlled by pressing CNTL A O 1 CNTL B 0 1 CNTLCO 1 and CNTL DO 1 The status of the auxiliary input control line I can be displayed on the analyzer screen with DISPLAY CNTL I Front Panel Key Access AUX CTRL accesses the softkey menu used for control of the auxiliary interface connector accesses demodulation functions For Option 011 it accesses tracking generator functions displays the voltage level present at an unused input to the Test Point MUX circuitry located on the A7 Analog Interface assembly This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access copies trace B into trace C Front Panel Key Access TRACE exchanges the contents of trace B with trace C and puts trace B in view mode Front Panel Key Access TRACE subtracts the display line from trace B and places the result in trace B The B DL B function is a math operation See the A B A ON OFF softkey description for information about
421. t the highest amplitude on screen signal move the signal to center screen by pressing and MARKER CF If marker track is on press and 1 to reduce the span to 1 MHz If marker track is not used use the step down key Q_ to reduce the span and use MARKER gt CF to keep the signal of interest at center screen Set the span to zero by pressing ZERO SPAN ZERO SPAN turns off the marker track function Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Demodulating and listening to an AM or FM Signal 5 Change the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz by pressing and entering 100 kHz 6 Set the signal in the top two divisions of the screen by changing the reference level Press AMPLITUDE and then the step down key D until the signal is in the top two divisions T Press AUX CTRL Demod DEMOD ON OFF ON then DEMOD AM FM FM SPEAKER ON OFF is set to ON by the preset function Use the front panel volume control to control the speaker s volume For FM demodulation use FM GAIN to adjust the top to bottom screen deviation of the signal with center screen as the reference 0 deviation The top is the positive deviation and the bottom is the negative deviation FM gain sensitivity is increased by decreasing the FM gain value As the FM gain sensitivity is increased the volume is increased Pressing SQUELCH mutes the noise level De REF 48 8 dBmv AT 10 GB FMV PTIME ec wie Y
422. t the mixer from possible damage 0 dB RF attenuation no input power reduction to the mixer can be selected only from the number units keypad AUTO ALL he following functions resolution bandwidth video bandwidth attenuation sweep time center frequency step video bandwidth and video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio Front Panel Key Access avro coure Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions AUTO COUPLE accesses the softkey menu of functions that can be coupled Coupled functions are functions that are linked if one function is changed the other function is changed The functions that can be auto coupled are listed below e Resolution bandwidth couples to span e Video bandwidth couples to resolution bandwidth when the analyzer has a video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio of 0 3 e Sweep time couples to span resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth e RF attenuation couples to reference level e Center frequency step size couples to 10 of span During normal operation the sweep time resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth are coupled to yield optimum performance If any of these functions becomes uncoupled that is is manually set a will appear next to the screen annotation representing the function on the screen If one or more functions are manually set so that the amplitude or frequency becomes uncalibrated MEAS UNCAL appears on the righ
423. table format the mid delta limit line table format provides a means of specifying the upper and lower limit lines at the same time Unlike the upper and lower table format the amplitude values are specified as a middle amplitude value with a delta the upper and lower limit lines are then drawn at an equal positive and negative distance from the middle amplitude With the mid delta format the frequency or time and the mid amplitude plus the delta comprise the upper limit line the frequency or time and the mid amplitude minus the delta comprise the lower limit line The difference between the mid delta format and the upper lower format is the way the amplitude values are entered however in both formats the frequency coordinate begins a segment The mid delta format can be used if the upper and lower limit lines are symmetrical with respect to the amplitude axis NOTE Editing a limit line table can be done using a different format than the one that was used for creating it Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Using limit line Functions Selecting the Segment Pressing SELECT SEGMENT specifies the segment number to be entered or Number edited Limit lines are created by entering frequency or time values and amplitude values into a limit line table The frequency time and amplitude values specify a coordinate point from which a limit line segment is drawn The coordinate point is the lowest frequency or time point of the line segment Li
424. takes approximately 3 minutes 7 minutes with Option 130 to adjust the bandwidths log and linear switching IF gains IF frequency centering RF attenuation and log amplifier When the amplitude calibration routine has Enished the preset display returns and CAL DONE is displayed Although the cable TV analyzer stores the correction factors in battery backed RAM the data will not be saved when the cable TV analyzer power is turned off unless the data has been stored with CAL STORE Using CAL STORE stores the correction factors in an area of cable TV analyzer memory that is accessed when the cable TV analyzer is turned on After the frequency and amplitude self calibration routines are complete CORR corrected now appears on the left side of the screen indicating that the cable TV analyzer is using its frequency and amplitude correction factors Correction factors can be turned off by pressing CORRECT ON OFF When OFF is underlined most amplitude correction factors and some frequency correction factors are not used If the self calibration routines cannot be performed see Check the Basics in Chapter 8 2 23 Getting Started Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines Performing the Tracking Generator Self Calibration Routine Option 011 only In order for the tracking generator to meet its specifications allow the cable TV analyzer to warm up for 30 minutes after being turned on before attempting to make any calibra
425. ted measurements Be sure to calibrate the cable TV analyzer and the tracking generator only after the cable TV analyzer has met operating temperature conditions NOTE Since the tracking generator self calibration routine uses the absolute amplitude level of the cable TV analyzer the cable IV analyzer amplitude should be calibrated prior to using CAL TRK GEN 1 To calibrate the tracking generator connect the tracking generator output RF OUT 75 0 to the cable TV analyzer INPUT 75 connector using an appropriate cable and adapters NOTE A low loss cable should be used for accurate calibration Use the 75 Q cable shipped with the cable TV analyzer Getting Started Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines 2 Press the following cable TV analyzer keys CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 and CAL TRK GEN TG SIGNAL NOT FOUND will be displayed if the tracking generator output is not connected to the cable TV analyzer input 3 To save this calibration data in the area of cable TV analyzer memory that is saved when the cable TV analyzer is turned off press CAL then CAL STORE 2 25 Getting Started Improving Accuracy with Self Calibration Routines When Is Self Calibration Needed While it is difficult to provide general advice for your specific measurement needs the following suggestions may help you decide when to use the self calibration features l Perform the frequency and amplitude self calibration r
426. terminator menu Front Panel Key Access AMPLITUDE 6 121 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions REF LVL OFFSET RES BW AUTO MAN 6 122 adds an offset value to the displayed reference level Offsets are entered by using the number units keypad Entering an offset does not affect the trace or the attenuation value Reference level offsets are used when gain or loss occurs between a device under test and the analyzer input Thus the signal level measured by the analyzer is the level at the input of an external amplitude conversion device When an amplitude offset is entered its value is displayed on the left side of the screen as opposed to frequency offsets which are displayed at the bottom of the screen To eliminate an offset press REF LVL OFFSET 0 or GdBmv Pressing also sets the offset to zero Reference level offsets are entered using the numeric keypad See also the EXTERNAL PREAMPG softkey description Front Panel Key Access changes the analyzer 3 dB resolution bandwidth As the resolution bandwidth is decreased the sweep time is increased to maintain amplitude calibration Resolution bandwidth is also related to span As span is decreased the resolution bandwidth is decreased A mark appears next to RES BW on the screen to indicate that it is not coupled To recouple the resolution bandwidth press RES BW AUTO MAN so that AUTO is underlined The resolution bandwidth
427. th should be about 10 times greater than the highest modulation frequency of interest For the 60 Hz fundamental a 1 kHz video bandwidth works well 11 Press and AM ON OFF so that ON is underlined The spectrum analyzer reads out the percent AM of the largest modulation frequency An arrow indicates the signal being measured See Figure 5 1 This measurement does not include all of the harmonics of the modulating signal Note that when the FFT measurement is active pressing the key will cycle between the MEAS USER and FFT menus NOTE The percent AM function will not run if the SIGNAL CLIPPED error message is being displayed Increase the reference level until the error message goes away 5 8 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measuring Amplitude Modulation with the Fast Fourier Transform Function Co REF 424 2 mV AT 20 dB MARKER SMPL NORMAL AM 40 37 k MARKEA A MARKER AMPTD SELECT 1234 SA VB sc FC MARKER 1 ME Mh FFT START O Hz FFT STOP 250 Hz RES BW 30 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 800 msec Figure 5 2 Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement Example 2 Use the automatic FFT measurement to look at 60 Hz AM modulation 1 Connect a signal generator to the spectrum analyzer s INPUT 75 Q Adjust the signal generator to produce an AM signal with a 60 Hz modulation frequency 2 Pr
428. the analyzer Front Panel Key Access CONFIG 6 111 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions NOTE provides a convenient starting point for making most measurements Pressing displays softkeys used for accessing the operating modes available for your analyzer See Table 6 1 1 and Table 6 10 for the conditions established by pressing PRESET The instrument preset function performs a processor test but does not affect CAL data Pressing clears both the input and output buffers but does not clear trace B The amplitude values of trace C are set to the reference level Amplitude correction factors are turned off Limit line testing is turned off but the limit line tables remain in analyzer memory The status byte is set to 0 Instrument preset affects all operating modes See the key description for for more information about other operating modes Pressing erases all on time functions ONCYCLE ONDELAY ONEOS ONMKR ONSRQ ONSWP ONTIME and TRMATH These are remote programming commands See the HP 8590 E Series and L Series Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information Turning the analyzer on performs an instrument preset Turning on the analyzer also fetches CAL data completes a processor test clears trace B trace C and both the input and output buffers turns off amplitude correction factors turns off limit line testing
429. the display 6 104 PAINTJET PRINTER PAL Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Table 6 8 Functions Which Exit The Windows Display Format Description AM measures percent amplitude modulation Adjacent Channel Powel neasures adjacent channel power Calibration Functions self calibration routines Channel Power measures channel power Confidence Test built in self routine Dispose User Memory deletes user s items from analyzer memory FFT nitiates FFT on zero span input Gate Utility accesses time gate functionality nstrument Preset eturns analyzer to preset state arker Table ists all of the active markers dB Points easures N dB bandwidth Occupied Bandwidth easures occupied bandwidth Peak Table ists displayed signal peaks Peak Zoom initiates the peak zoom routine Tol akes a third order intercept measuremen selects a color print for use with an HP PaintJet printer only The traces are displayed in orange trace A blue trace B and red trace C The graticule screen annotation and user information are displayed in black Front Panel Key Access CONFIG allows you to trigger on the PAL video format Pressing PAL alters the TV line number that the analyzer triggers on internally the line number displayed when TV LINE is pressed does not change Pressing PAL changes the video modulation to negative set TV SYNC MEG POS so that POS is underline
430. the Resolution Bandwidth Function 2 Set the center frequency to 300 MHz and the span to 2 MHz press 300 MHz then SPAN 2 Witz 3 Set the source to 300 2 MHz so that the signal is 200 kHz higher than the calibration signal Set the amplitude of the signal to 31 dBmV 60 dB below the calibration signal 4 6 Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Resolving Small Signals Hidden by large Signals Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function 4 Set the 300 MHz signal to the reference level by pressing_ peak_search_ MKR then MARKER REF LVL If a 10 kHz filter with a typical shape factor of 15 1 is used the filter will have a bandwidth of 150 kHz at the 60 dB point The half bandwidth 75 kHz is narrower than the frequency separation so the input signals will be resolved MKA 389 010 MHz 23 7 dBm ATTEN 18 dB 23 86 dBm MARKER 300 010 MHz 23 86 dBm ICENTERRESIBWwema KHz VBW 10 kHz SPANSWP2 60 ms Wt Figure 4 4 Signal Resolution with a 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Making Basic Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Resolving Small Signals Hidden by large Signals Using the Resolution Bandwidth Function If a 30 kHz filter is used the 60 dB bandwidth will be 450 kHz Since the half bandwidth 225 kHz is wider than the frequency separation the signals most likely will not be resolved See Figure 4 5 To determine resolution capability for intermediate
431. the key label for example AMPLITUDE softkeys are designated by shading on the key label for example REF LVL The softkeys that are displayed depend on which front panel key is pressed and which menu level is enabled If a softkey function s value can be changed it is called an active function The function label of the active function appears in inverse video For example press AMPLITUDE This calls up the softkey menu of related amplitude functions Note the function labeled REF LVL appears in inverse video REF LVL also appears in the active function block indicating that it is the active amplitude function and can now be changed using any of the data entry controls A softkey with ON and OFF in its label can be used to turn the softkey s function on or off To turn the function on press the softkey so that ON is underlined To turn the function off press the softkey so that OFF is underlined The following example demonstrates how an ON or OFF softkey function will be annotated VID AVG ON OFF ON A function with AUTO and MAN in the label can either be auto coupled or have its value manually changed The function s value can be changed manually by pressing the softkey until MAN is underlined and then changing its value with the numeric keypad knob or step keys To auto couple a function press the softkey so that AUTO is underlined The following example demonstrates how an AUTO or MAN softkey function will be
432. the result of A B A is 1 dBmV 39 dBmV 7000 measurement units 9 dBmV 4000 measurement units the result is 3000 measurement units which is equal to 1 dBmV Front Panel Key Access copies trace A into trace C Front Panel Key Access 6 8 ABCDEF ACPGRAPH ON OFF ADJ CHAN POWER Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions accesses the softkey menu for selecting screen title characters A through F Front Panel Key Access CAL CONFIG DISPLAY RECALL or GAVE turns the adjacent channel power graph ON or OFF With ACPGRAPH ON the ACP ratio graph is calculated and displayed and the numeric results are not displayed The value of the ACP ratio is displayed at the selected marker frequency offset from the center frequency This graph function is used after doing an adjacent channel power measurement with the ADJ CHAN POWER or ADJ CHAN PWR extd softkeys Front Panel Key Access measures the power leakage into the adjacent channels and calculates the adjacent channel power ratio of both the upper and lower channels with respect to the total power The total power of the carrier is displayed The adjacent channel power ratios of both channels are also displayed and the larger number is marked with a A Vertical lines on the display indicate the bandwidth edges of the three different channels being measured The measurement can be made on a single sweep or con
433. the self calibration routine messages may appear on the display to indicate how the calibration routines are progressing For example sweep freq span MC delay FM coil and atten can appear on the cable TV analyzer display LOCK OFF appears briefly during the CAL FREQ self calibration routine this is normal and does not indicate a problem M CAL _ done Press CAL STORE to save Indicates that the self calibration routine is finished and that you should press CAL STORE M CAL cannot execute CALAMP enter 0 dB PREAMP GAIN The preamplifier gain should be set to 0 dB before the CAL AMPTD routine is performed The preamplifier gain is set by using EXTERNAL PREAMPG This message also sets SRQ 110 U CAL DATA NOT STORED CAL AMP NEEDED The correction factors are corrupt and cannot be stored You need to perform the CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routine before trying to store the correction factors This message also sets SRQ 110 U CAL FM SPAN SENS FAIL The cable TV analyzer could not set up span sensitivity of the FM coil H CAL GAIN FAIL Indicates the signal amplitude is too low during the CAL AMPTD routine This message also sets SRQ 110 H CAL MAIN COIL SENSE FAIL The cable TV analyzer could not set up span sensitivity of the main coil If this message appears press_ rrequency 37 Hz CAL More 1 of 4 More 2 of 4 DEFAULT CAL DATA and perform the CAL FREQ routine again H If You Have a Prob
434. then be executed from the front panel by pressing EXECUTE TITLE The screen title will remain on the screen until either Change Title is pressed again or a trace is recalled that was saved with a screen title A screen title can also be cleared by using the clear function Press DISPLAY Change Title YZ Spc Clear Clear to clear the current screen title Pressing Change Title accesses a menu containing the letters of the alphabet the underscore symbol the number symbol a space and the Clear softkey To select a character press the softkey that displays the group of characters that contains the desired character The softkey menu changes to allow you to select an individual character If you make a mistake press to space back over the incorrect character Additional characters are available by pressing More 1 of 2 Numbers may be selected by using the numeric keypad Pressing RPG TITLE provides additional characters for the menu accessed by pressing Change Title Pressing RPG TITLE provides lowercase letters numbers Greek letters and punctuation symbols To access additional characters press RPG TITLE When RPG TITLE is pressed a character table appears on the screen To select a character turn the knob to position the cursor under the desired character and press the key The step keys move the cursor between rows When all desired characters have been entered press WINDOWS NEXT All other analyzer functions
435. tified as a peak signal The definition of a peak excursion can be changing by selecting PEAK EXCURSN while the upper window is active Pressing ZONE PK RIGHT will have no effect if the upper window is in zero span Front Panel Key Access WINDOWS allows the span of the zone markers to be changed without changing the center frequency The zone markers are vertical lines marking the zone on the upper window They correspond with the frequency range displayed in the lower window As the zone markers are moved the span of the lower window is changed but the lower window will not be updated unless it is active The zone can be expanded beyond the frequency range that is being displayed in the upper window Its movement is limited to the frequency range of the analyzer The zone markers will be displayed at the edges of the upper window when the zone is moved beyond the displayed frequency range Front Panel Key Access WINDOWS switches between the split screen windows display and a full size display of the window that is currently active Once the ZOOM function is active the key can be used to switch between the two windows while remaining zoomed full sized 6 156 Key Menus Key Menus This chapter contains the key menu diagrams for the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer Each key menu diagram is arranged alphabetically according to the front panel key name NOTE The softkeys in the key menus that are specific to the HP 85
436. ting at the end of each sweep The units for the displayed value can be selected by pressing Amptd Units softkey The two test signals and the two associated distortion products must all be displayed for the measurement to function The relative amplitudes and frequencies of the displayed signals must fit the TOI pattern All of the signals must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold Front Panel Key Access MEAS USER accesses the trace softkeys that allow you to store and manipulate trace information Each trace is comprised of a series of data points that form a register where amplitude information is stored The analyzer updates the information for any active trace with each sweep If two traces are being written to they are updated on alternating sweeps Also see Screen Annotation in Chapter 2 6 144 TRACE ABC TRACE A TRACE B TRACE C Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions selects the softkey menu used for trace A trace B or trace C functions Press TRACE A B C until the letter of the desired trace is underlined Front Panel Key Access TRACE sets up trace A for recalling previously saved trace data into trace A or saving trace data from trace A Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE sets up trace B for recalling previously saved trace data into trace B or saving trace data from trace B Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE sets up trace
437. tinuously updated at the end of each sweep See SINGLE MEAS and CONT MEAS The measurement stops and the analyzer is returned to its prior state when other measurement functions are activated 6 9 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions ADJ CHAN PWR extd The center frequency must be set to the intended carrier frequency and the reference level set to optimize the displayed signal The channel bandwidth and channel spacing must be entered by the user If PARAM AUTO is selected so AUTO is underlined other analyzer settings will then be coupled and set automatically The adjacent channel power measurement responds to signals like an rms power measurement This means that the measurement of the total channel power and the adjacent channel power ratios are accurately reported whether the transmitted signal contains tones noise or both If PARAM AUTO is selected the parameters of the instrument state are set for a valid measurement When using PARAM MAN the following conditions must be maintained to make a valid rms measurement If these conditions are not met errors of up to 2 5 dB can occur for noise like signals e Video bandwidth is at least 10 times the resolution bandwidth e Detector mode is sample SMP You can use DETECTOR SMP PK to select the detector mode Resolution bandwidth is less than or equal to 100 kHz Video averaging is OFF Neither MAX HOLD nor MIN HOLD trace mod
438. tion to determine the correct format U INVALID RANGE Stop lt Start Indicates that the first trace element specified for a range of trace elements is larger that ending trace element When specifying a trace range the starting element must be less than the ending element For example TRA 2 300 is legal but TRA 300 2 is not U If You Have a Problem Error Messages INVALID REGISTER NUMBER The specified trace register number is invalid U INVALID REPEAT MEM OVFL Memory overflow occurred due to a REPEAT routine This can occur if there is not enough cable TV analyzer memory for the REPEAT UNTIL declaration or if the REPEAT UNTIL declaration exceeds 2047 characters U INVALID REPEAT NEST LEVEL The nesting level in the REPEAT routine is improperly constructed This can occur if too many REPEAT routines are nested When used within a downloadable program DLP the maximum number of REPEAT UNTIL statements that can be nested is 20 U INVALID RS 232 ADRS OPERATION An RS 232 operation was aborted due to an invalid operation U INVALID SAVE REG Data has not been saved in the specified state or trace register or the data is corrupt U INVALID SCRMOVE Indicates the cable TV analyzer may have a hardware failure See the cable TV analyzer Service Guide for more information H INVALID START INDEX Indicates that the first trace element specified for a range of trace elements is not within the trace range of the specif
439. tions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Define Coupling Define Gate Define Time Option 107 only accesses the time gate utility menu for coupling analyzer settings to the input pulsed signal parameters It also accesses the pulsed signal parameter entry menus Front Panel Key Access SWEEP Option 107 only accesses the menu for turning on and defining the gate from within the time gate utility Gate delay and gate length settings determine when the gate turns on and how long it remains on The trigger marker can be activated from this menu This menu also includes a function which switches the active window between the time domain window and the frequency domain window allowing the corresponding trace to be updated Front Panel Key Access SWEEP Option 107 only accesses the menu for manipulating the time domain window in the gate utility It will automatically make the time window active and turn off the gate The trigger marker can be activated from this menu Front Panel Key Access SWEEP 6 52 DELETE FILE NOTE Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions function allows you to delete an item from analyzer memory or a file from the memory card Use the step keys to view different sections of the directory and use the knob to select the file or item to delete Pressing DELETE FILE causes a message to appear on the analyzer screen If you are sure press key again to pu
440. to MAX REG for traces limit lines amplitude correction factors Prefix register lt 8 characters lemory card lto Bfor states 0 Types of Data That Can Be Stored btates traces limit line Catalog Functions Available CATALOG ALL tables amplitude correction CATALOG REGISTER States traces limit line CATALOG VARTABLS CATALOG ON EVENT CATALOG PREFIX CATALOG DLP DELETE FILE LOAD FILE CATALOG ALL tables amplitude correction CATALOG STATES factors display images and downloadable programs Specifies types of data that can be stored by using normal front panel operation When cataloging analyzer memory LOAD FILE is available for CATALOG REGISTER only CATALOG TRACES CATALOG PREFIX CATALOG DLP CATALOG AMP COR CATALOG LMT LINE DELETE FILE LOAD FILE 3 16 Using Spectrum Analyzer Features Saving and Recalling Data from the Memory Card Preparing the Memory Card for Use NOTE improper insertion causes error messages to occur but generally does not damage the card or instrument Care must be taken however not to force the card into place The cards are easy to insert when installed properly 1 Locate the arrow printed on the card s label 2 Insert the card with its arrow matching the raised arrow on the bezel around the card insertion slot See Figure 3 3 oo0j000 ogogo oojooo aqgono ooa ooo ooo pilae Figure 3 3 Inserting the Me
441. to the span Frequency offsets are entered using the numeric keypad When a frequency offset is entered its value is displayed on the bottom of the screen as opposed to reference level offsets which are displayed on the left side of the screen To eliminate an offset press FREQ OFFSET and 0 ENTER Pressing PRESET also sets the offset to zero Front Panel Key Access Frequency activates the center frequency or star frequency function and accesses the menu that has the frequency functions The center frequency or start frequency value appears below the graticule on the screen Although the analyzer allows entry of frequencies greater than the specified frequency range using frequencies greater than the frequency span of the analyzer is not recommended When changing both the center frequency and the span change the frequency first since the span can be limited by the frequency value 6 75 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Gale Control GATE CTL EDGE LVL Option 107 only accesses the menu of gate control functions and the entrance to the gate utility menus The gate can be controlled independently or from within the gate utility The gate utility makes it easier to set up and manipulate the gate When the gate control functions are accessed under the Gate Control menu outside of the gate utility they do not interact with the gate utility Values that are changed us
442. tor U CMD ERR The specified programming command is not recognized by the cable TV analyzer Press ANNOTATN ON OFF to clear U CONF TEST FAIL Indicates that the confidence test failed If this happens ensure that the CAL OUT connector is connected to the cable TV analyzer input perform the CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routine and then perform the confidence test again This message also sets SRQ 110 H and U If You Have a Problem Error Messages EMPTY DLP MEM Indicates that the user defined items user defined functions user defined variables user defined traces user defined softkeys and any personalities for example the HP 85721 cable TV system personality in the cable TV analyzer memory have been deleted If the message is continuously displayed at power up it may indicate a hardware failure See the cable TV analyzer Service Guide for more information U Factory dlp not editable Indicates that the downloadable program or variable that you have selected is used by a personality and cannot be edited A personality is a program that is manufactured by Hewlett Packard and is available for use with the HP 8591C cable TV analyzer An example of a personality is the HP 85721A cable TV system personality U FAIL _ An error was discovered during the power up check The 4 digit by lo digit code indicates the type of error Error codes are described in the cable TV analyzer service guide H File t
443. tracking generator This is a service diagnostic function and is for service use only Refer to the service guide for more information Front Panel Key Access saves all the downloadable programs and key definitions that are in analyzer memory onto the memory card If the downloadable program was stored using a prefix the file name for the downloadable program consists of d prefix _ register number If no prefix was specified the data is stored with the file name d_ register number Front Panel Key Access accessed by CAL Amp Cor accesses the menus for entering and editing the current amplitude correction factors Front Panel Key Access CAL 6 12 AMP COR AMP COR ON OFF AMPLITUDE Amptd Units Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions when accessed by SAVE AMP COR stores the current amplitude correction factors table in analyzer memory or on the memory card When accessed by RECALL AMP COR recalls the amplitude correction factors table from either analyzer memory or the memory card Amplitude correction factors are saved with an a before the memory card file name Screen titles are not recalled with the data Refer to To Save a Limit Line Table or Amplitude Correction Factors in Chapter 3 for more information Amplitude correction factor memory card files can be catalogued using CATALOG AMP COR Front Panel Key Access RECALL or SAVE turns the current
444. triggering on the selected line of a video picture field and accesses the softkey menu used to select the line number of the video picture field and the type of video picture frame When TV TRIG is pressed the trigger mode is changed to TV trigger TV LINE becomes the active function and the softkey menu for changing the TV line numbers and video field trigger is accessed If the analyzer is in non zero span the resolution bandwidth is changed to 1 MHz the frequency span is set to 0 Hz the detector mode is changed to sample the sweep time is changed to 100 ys the amplitude scale is changed to linear a sweep is taken and a marker is placed on the signal peak Front Panel Key Access TRIG 6 149 Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions TV TRIG EVEN FLD TV TRIG ODD FLD TV TRIG VERT INT UPDATE TIMEFREQ User Menus selects an even video field of an interlaced video format to trigger on Front Panel Key Access selects an odd video field of an interlaced video format to trigger on Front Panel Key Access TRIG selects a vertical interval to trigger on Triggering occurs on the next pulse edge If it triggers on an even field triggering will not alternate between odd and even fields If it triggers on an odd field triggering will alternate between odd and even fields The vertical interval is used for non interlaced video formats Front Panel Key Access Option 107 o
445. tures Saving and Recalling Data from Analyzer Memory To Save a Limit Line Table or Amplitude Correction Factors The procedure for saving limit line tables or amplitude correction factors is similar to saving trace data State and trace data is not recalled with limit line tables or amplitude correction factors 1 Enter a screen title if desired by using DISPLAY Change Title The screen title is displayed when CATALOG REGISTER is used to catalog the trace registers The screen title is not recalled however with the limit line tables or amplitude correction factors 2 When saving limit line tables set up the limit line table to be stored see Using the Limit Line Functions in this chapter When saving amplitude correction factors enter the data using the remote programming AMPCOR command or use the amplitude correction function softkeys See Using Amplitude Correction Functions in this chapter for more information about entering amplitude correction factors via the front panel 3 Press SAVE If CARD is underlined press INTERNAL CARD to select INTERNAL 4 Press Trace Intrn This accesses a menu with LIMIT LINES and AMP CDR 9 Press LIMIT LINES to save limit line tables Press AMP COR to save amplitude correction factors REGISTER and MAX REG are displayed on the cable TV analyzer screen The number after MAX REG indicates the maximum register number that can be entered for storage in cable TV a
446. udes relative uncertainties plus calibrator uncertainty For improved accuracy some analyzers specify frequency response relative to the calibrator as well as relative to the midpoint between peak to peak extremes Refer also to relative amplitude accuracy active function readout The area of a display screen where the active function and its state are displayed The active function is the one that was completed by the last key selection or remote programming command active marker The marker on a trace that can be repositioned by front panel controls or programming commands active trace The trace commonly A B or C that is being swept updated with incoming signal information adjacent channel power The measure of transmitter signal leakage into adjacent channels The measured value is usually expressed as the ratio of the power in the adjacent channel to the channel power amplitude accuracy The general uncertainty of an analyzer amplitude measurement whether relative or absolute analog display mode A display mode of the HP 8590 Series analyzers that digitally simulates an analog display The analyzer takes several samples of the signal amplitude at each horizontal point as it sweeps across the screen The samples are displayed as individual dots on the screen that are not connected This analog like trace data is available along with the normal digital display features like hard copy output screen annotation and titles a
447. uency and amplitude self calibration routines Connect CAL OUT to the analyzer input before pressing CAL FREQ amp AMPTD Remove the cable from the rear panel GATE INPUT before starting the self calibration routine Front Panel Key Access stores the correction factors from the last calibration The stored correction factors are automatically retrieved when the analyzer is turned on If correction factors are not stored they will be retained only until the analyzer is turned off See the description for the CAL FETCH softkey Front Panel Key Access CAL changes the setting of the 10 MHz reference standard timebase DAC that is located on the A25 Counter Lock assembly This is a service calibration function and is for service use only Front Panel Key Access CAL Option 011 only performs the tracking peak self calibration The analyzer should be amplitude calibrated by pressing CAL AMPTD prior to using the CAL TRK GEN function Connect the tracking generator output to the analyzer input before pressing CAL TRK GEM Front Panel Key Access Card Conf ig CARD DISPLAY Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions accesses the softkey menu that allows you to catalog format and delete data from a memory card Front Panel Key Access CONFIG recalls into analyzer memory a display image saved on the memory card It does not recall the associated instrument state but the restored display can
448. ull display The lower window will be active and will display a subset of the frequency span of the upper window The displayed span or zone of the lower window will be indicated on the upper window by two vertical lines called zone markers The zone can be moved and changed using the zone keys which are accessed by pressing the WINDOWS ON key Changing the span or center frequency of the lower window will change the corresponding zone markers on the upper window Most functions can be used from within the windows display mode Some functions like editing limit lines and showing the options require a full sized display They will temporarily exit the windows display format When the function is finished the instrument will return to a windows display Other functions will permanently exit the windows display and it will be necessary to restart the windows display mode by pressing WINDOWS ON See Table 6 8 Limit lines can be displayed and tested within the windows display mode Viewing and testing must be turned on independently in each window The current limit lines will be common to both windows SAVE and RECALL do not save the windows display mode If the windows display mode is being used the save state function saves the state of the currently active window The recall state function recalls the stored state into the currently active window See the DISPLAY CARD and CARD DISPLAY softkeys for information about saving
449. up the time gate and make measurements The center frequency and reference level must be set correctly before entering the gate utility There must be a TTL signal at the GATE TRIGGER INPUT on the rear panel and GATE OUTPUT must be connected to EXT TRIG INPUT If no trigger is present an error message is displayed Connect a trigger input or press instrument preset to exit the gate utility If the gate utility menus are exited by pressing one of the front panel keys they may be re entered by pressing SWEEP twice 6 78 GHI JKL Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions Some analyzer functions are altered or are not available when the gate utility is active See Table 6 7 From within the gate utility press EXIT UTILITY to return to normal analyzer operation Press twice and EXIT UTILITY to return to the gate utility and then exit it properly Command AM Adjacent Channel Power Calibr atio Channel P FFT N dB Poi Occupied Peak Zoo Res BW Span Sweep ti Tol Video BW ower ts Bandwidth oO Table 6 7 Commands Altered Not Available within the Gate Utility Description of Change easurement function is not available easurement function is not available o calibration functions can be accessed easurement function is not available easurement function is not available easurement function is not available easurement
450. ur cable TV analyzer is equipped with Option 021 HP IB interface the appropriate interface address HP IB ADRS XX in place of the baud rate also appears on the screen Preparing For Use Turning on the Analyzer for the First Time NOTE Record the firmware date and keep it for reference If you should ever need to call Hewlett Packard for service or with any questions regarding your cable TV analyzer it will be helpful to have the firmware date readily available 4 To meet cable TV analyzer specifications allow a 30 minute warm up before attempting to make any calibrated measurements Be sure to calibrate the cable TV analyzer only after the cable TV analyzer has met the operating temperature conditions 5 Connect the 75 Q coaxial cable between the front panel CAL OUT and the INPUT 75 Q connector NOTE Remove all connections to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT rear panel connector before performing the self calibration routines 6 Perform the frequency and amplitude self calibration routine by pressing CAL and CAL FREQ amp AMPTD During the frequency routine CAL SWEEP CAL FREQ and CAL SPAN and CAL FM GAIN OFFSET are displayed as the sequence progresses During the amplitude routine CAL AMPTD CAL 3 dB BW CAL ATTEN and CAL LOGAMP are displayed as the sequence progresses CAL DONE appears when the routine is completed Any failures or discrepancies produce a message on the screen see Chapter 8
451. ure 3 8 Upper and lower limit line Testing To turn the limit line testing on and off use LMT TEST ON OFF Use PURGE LIMITS to clear the limit line tables To remove the limit lines from the display use LMT DISP Y N AUTO Underlining Y displays the limit lines N turns them off and AUTO displays them if the testing is turned on or turns them off if testing is turned off Learn About the Analog Display Mode The analog display mode combines traditional analog display performance with digital display benefits Analog display mode gives the cable TV analyzer the look and feel of older analog displays such as the HP 8558B but it has the added benefit of features common to digital displays Display features include e Hard copy output directly to a printer e Complete marker functionality such as peak search and noise readout e Screen annotation functions such as title linear and log scales and graticule e Negative peak detector The analog display mode can be used to view interfering inter modulation products on a live television channel It can be used to set the residual carrier level and check the linearity of a video modulator Refer to Product Note 8590 3 HP part number 5091 2480 for more information about these measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Features learn About the Analog Display Mode 11 41 05 JUL 29 1993 REF 48 8 dBmV AT 10 dB PEAK 0 Hz STOP 1 500 GHZ RES BW 3 0 MHz VBW MHz SWP 30 0 mse
452. values of many functions that change in increments only Clockwise rotation of the knob increases values For continuous changes the extent of alteration is determined by the size of the measurement range the speed at which the knob is turned does not affect the rate at which the values are changed The knob enables you to change the center frequency start or stop frequency or reference level in smooth scrolling action The smooth scrolling feature is designed to move the trace display to the latest function value as the knob is turned When either center frequency or reference level is adjusted the signal will shift right or left or up or down with the rotation of the knob before a new sweep is actually taken An asterisk is placed in the message block the upper right hand corner of the cable TV analyzer display to indicate that the data on screen does not reflect data at the current setting 2 10 Number Units Keypad Step Keys Getting Started Getting Acquainted with the Analyzer NOTE When using the knob to change frequency or amplitude settings the trace data is shifted Therefore when using MAX HOLD A MAX HOLD B or MIN HOLD moving the center frequency with the knob will not simulate a drifting signal The number units keypad allows entry of exact values for many of the cable TV analyzer functions You may include a decimal point in the number portion If not the decimal point is placed at the end of the num
453. whose repetition rate is greater than about twice the resolution bandwidth of the analyzer Note that a signal can have a spread spectrum and still be viewed in the narrowband mode on the analyzer The same checks that were listed under broadband response are used here but with different results e Change the frequency span The frequency separation of the components remains unchanged e Change the resolution bandwidth The amplitude of the responses does not change with resolution bandwidth changes as long as the bandwidth remains narrow relative to the separation of the responses e Change the sweep time The separation of the responses is independent of sweep time e Change the video bandwidth The amplitude of the responses is unaffected by changes in video bandwidth negative peak The minimum instantaneous value of an incoming signal On digital displays each displayed point of the signal indicates the minimum value of the signal for that part of the frequency span or time interval represented by the point noise figure The ratio usually expressed in dB of the signal to noise ratio at the input of a device mixer amplifier and so on to the signal to noise ratio at the output of the device Glossary 17 noise marker A marker whose readout represents the noise level in a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth When the noise marker is selected the sample display detection mode is activated the values of a number of consecutive tra
454. wo defined limit lines may be displayed simultaneously One sets an upper test limit the other sets a lower test limit Trace data can be compared with the limit lines as the analyzer sweeps If the trace data exceeds either the upper or lower limits the analyzer displays a message or sounds a warning indicating that the trace failed the test limits limit line file The user memory file that contains the limit line table entries Limit lines are composed of frequency and amplitude components that make up a trace array and this data is stored in the file The limit line file feature is available on analyzers that are capable of limit line operation Refer also to limit line limit line table The line segments of a limit line are stored in the limit line table The table can be recalled to edit the line segments then restored in the limit line file Refer also to limit line linear display The display mode in which vertical deflection on the screen is directly proportional to the voltage of the input signal The bottom line of the graticule represents 0 V the top line represents the reference level The reference level is a non zero value characteristic to the analyzer model On the HP 140 series analyzers select a specific scale factor in volts per division On newer models of analyzers select the reference level The scale factor becomes the reference level value divided by the number of graticule divisions Although the display is linear
455. y twice the intermediate frequency IF away from the frequency indicated by the analyzer For each harmonic of the local oscillator there is an image pair One is below the local oscillator frequency by the IF and the other is above Images usually only appear on nonpreselected analyzers impedance The apparent opposition in an electrical path to the flow of current The specified nominal input impedance of an analyzer is stated for the input connector The most common impedance for RF and microwave analyzers is 500 However 750 is typically used for cable television CATV work impulse bandwidth The width of a rectangular filter that has the same peak voltage output as the actual analyzer filter The impulse bandwidth of the synchronously tuned Gaussian like resolution filters in the Hewlett Packard analyzers is approximately 1 5 times the 3 dB bandwidth Glossary 12 incidental FM Undesired frequency modulation on the output of a device for example a signal source or an amplifier caused by or incidental to some other form of modulation such as amplitude modulation input attenuator An attenuator between the input connector and the first mixer of an analyzer also called an RF attenuator The input attenuator is used to adjust the signal level incident to the first mixer and to prevent gain compression due to high level or broadband signals It is also used to set the dynamic range by controlling the degree of internally gener
456. ype incompatible Indicates that the selected file is not a display image file The file name for eso a display image file is always preceded by an i U FREQ UNCAL If the FREQ UNCAL message appears constantly it indicates a YTO tuning error If this message appears constantly perform the CAL FREQ routine FREQ UNCAL appears briefly during the CAL FREQ routine this is normal and does not indicate a problem U and H U and H Function not available in current Mode Indicates that the function that you have selected can only be used with the cable TV analyzer mode You can use the key to select the cable TV analyzer mode U Function not available with analog display Indicates that the function that you have selected is not compatible with the Analog display mode To use the function you must first turn off the Analog display mode with ANALOG ON OFF U If You Have a Problem Error Messages Gate card not calibrated This message can indicate that either the CAL AMPTD routine need to be performed before the time gating functions can be used or that something was connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector during the CAL AMPTD or CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routines Ensure that nothing is connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector when the CAL AMPTD or CAL FREQ amp AMPTD routines are performed U and H INTERNAL LOCKED The cable TV analyzer internal trace and state registers have been locked To unlock
457. yzer places arrow markers on the three signals to be used to compute percent amplitude modulation and displays the value If the sidebands are not in the frequency span or their frequency spacing is not equal the measurement stops and an error message is displayed Percent AM measurement accuracy for close signals e typically about 9 1 for log mode e typically about 3 for linear mode w MKR 400 0000 MHz 3EF 48 8 dBmV AT 20 dB 35 87 dBmV sen EAK Menus 0G AM 8 53 a N dB PTS ae 4 J ON QFE AM ON OFF TOI it ON OFF WA SB N sc FC 1 Power CORR Menu FFT Menu CENTER 400 0000 MHz SPAN 271 4 kHz RES BW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 30 0 msec Figure 5 33 Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement 5 62 Making Measurements Using Spectrum Analyzer Mode Percent Amplitude Modulation Measurement Example Use the AM function to make a measurement 1 Press PRESET Connect a signal with amplitude modulation to the spectrum analyzer s INPUT 75 Q 2 Press Trrequency and enter the frequency of your input signal to place the signal at the spectrum analyzer center frequency 3 Press SPAN Change the span until only the signal and its two sidebands appear on the display 4 Press and AM ON OFF ON to activate the percent amplitude modulation function 5 Read the measurement results in the upper left corner of the screen
458. zer Mode Functions CATALOG ON EVENT displays the on event programming commands and their status The on event programming commands are as follows ONEOS Performs command list at end of every sweep ONSWP Performs command list at beginning of every sweep TRMATH Performs trace math ONCYCLE Performs command list periodically ONDELAY Performs command list once after a time period ONMKR Performs command list at the marker ONSRQ Performs command list on every service request ONTIME Performs command list at a specific time ONPWRUP Performs command list once at power up NOTE If you get into an infinite loop with ONPWRUP press to abort the command list then press ERASE DLP MEN to clear all DLPs The on event programming commands can be set remotely see the HP 8590 E Series and L Sties Spectrum Analyzers and HP 8591 C Cable TV Analyzer Programmer s Guide for more information about setting the commands Spectrum Analyzer Mode Key Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Mode Functions When the on event programming commands have not been set or when an instrument preset has been performed pressing CATALOG ON EVENT displays the status of the on event programming commands as UNDEFINED If the ONEOS ONSWP TRMATH ONMKR ONPWRUP and ONSRQ commands have been set pressing CATALOG ON EVENT displays their status as ACTIVE When ONCYCLE ONDELAY or ONTIME have been set pressing CATALOG ON EVENT displays the information in Tabl
459. zer at some level below the minimum insertion loss point maximum deflection point on the display The 3 dB resolution bandwidth is specified for others it is the 6 dB resolution bandwidth rose n fell For digital displays this is the display detection mode in which the value displayed at each point on a trace is based upon whether or not the video signal both rose and fell during the frequency or time interval represented by the point If the video signal only rose or only fell the maximum value is displayed If the video signal both rose and fell the maximum value during the interval is displayed by odd numbered points and the minimum value by even numbered points To prevent the loss of a signal occurring during an even numbered interval the maximum value of the signal during this interval is preserved At the next odd numbered interval the value displayed is the greater value carried over or the maximum that occurs during the current interval sample The instantaneous value of an incoming signal On digital displays each displayed point of the signal indicates the instantaneous value of the signal for that part of the frequency span or time interval represented by the point Glossary 22 scale factor The per division calibration of the vertical axis of the display scan frequency span linearity The measured accuracy of the horizontal axis of the analyzer display When two horizontal points are set with analyzer control

HP 8591C User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents